Xlab5 Manual

X-LabPro 5
X-LabPro 5
Operator Manual
SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

Pro
Software Help X-Lab 5
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 1 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Table of Contents
SOFTWARE HELP ..............................................................................................................10
1 Job Manager ...............................................................................................................10
1.1 Job Manager ........................................................................................................10
1.1.1 Window overview ..........................................................................................10
1.2 Job Window .........................................................................................................10
1.3 Create New Job/Job Properties ...........................................................................12
1.4 Edit Job ................................................................................................................14
1.5 Import Job ............................................................................................................15
1.6 Export Job............................................................................................................15
1.7 Tree Control .........................................................................................................16
1.8 Context Menu for a job .........................................................................................17
1.9 Context Menu for a sample ..................................................................................17
1.10 Context Menu for the trashcan .............................................................................18
1.11 Menu Commands .................................................................................................18
1.11.1 Commands in the File Menu ..........................................................................18
1.11.2 Commands in the Edit Menu .........................................................................19
1.11.3 Commands in the View Menu ........................................................................21
1.11.4 Commands in the Window Menu ...................................................................21
1.11.5 Commands in the X-LabPro Menu ................................................................22
1.11.6 Commands in the Help Menu ........................................................................22
1.12 Other ....................................................................................................................23
1.12.1 Toolbar ..........................................................................................................23
1.12.2 Title Bar.........................................................................................................24
1.12.3 Status Bar .....................................................................................................24
2 Routine Dialog ............................................................................................................25
2.1 The X-LabPro Routine Dialog ..............................................................................25
2.2 How to Define New Samples/Enter the Sample Data (Xepos)..............................26
2.3 How to Define New Samples/Enter the Sample Data (IQ) ....................................28
2.4 How to Load and Save the Sample Plates ...........................................................29
2.5 The Measurement ................................................................................................30
2.6 Show the Sample Results ....................................................................................31
2.7 Prepare Global Recalibration ...............................................................................33
2.8 Prepare MCA Recalibration..................................................................................34
2.9 Prepare Intercept Recalibration ............................................................................35
2.10 Prepare Method Recalibration ..............................................................................36
2.11 The Routine Dialog Spectrum Display ..................................................................38
2.12 The Routine Dialog Sample Plate Display ............................................................39
2.13 Settings Dialog Box ..............................................................................................39
3 Result Viewer ..............................................................................................................43
3.1 Selection of elements / definition of concentration limits .......................................43
4 Spectra Viewer ............................................................................................................47
4.1 The Spectra Viewer..............................................................................................47
4.2 The Tree Control ..................................................................................................47
4.2.1 How to Select Spectra for Representation .....................................................48
4.2.2 How to Enable/Disable the Tree Control........................................................48
4.3 The Selection Table .............................................................................................48
4.3.1 Selecting Spectra ..........................................................................................49
4.4 Menu Commands .................................................................................................50
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 2 of 397
X-LabPro 5
4.4.1 Spectra Viewer Menu Overview ....................................................................50

4.4.4 Commands in the Spectra Menu ...................................................................51
4.4.6 Calculate Background Dialog Box .................................................................54
4.4.7 Edit Channel Contents Dialog Box ................................................................56
4.4.8 Window Menu ...............................................................................................56
4.5 Other ....................................................................................................................57
4.5.1 Toolbar ..........................................................................................................57
4.5.2 Status Bar .....................................................................................................58
4.5.3 Titlebar ..........................................................................................................59
4.6 Tool Window ........................................................................................................59
4.6.1 Toolbox .........................................................................................................59
4.6.2 Select Lines Dialog Box.................................................................................61
5 Method Administration ...............................................................................................62
5.1 The Method Window ............................................................................................62
5.2 The Tree Control ..................................................................................................63
5.3 General Page .......................................................................................................64
5.4 Element Page ......................................................................................................66
5.5 Standard Page .....................................................................................................68
5.5.1 The Enter/Edit Sample Data Dialog ...............................................................69
5.5.2 Given Concentrations Dialog Box ..................................................................71
5.6 Measurement Page ..............................................................................................74
5.7 Deconvolution Page .............................................................................................76
5.7.1 Limits for Background Spectra Switchovers Dialog Box.................................79
5.8 Calibration Page ..................................................................................................79
5.9 Output Page .........................................................................................................83
5.9.1 Determinate Order of Elements Dialog ..........................................................86
5.9.2 Edit Chemical Bond Dialog ............................................................................86
5.10 Library of Standards Dialog Box ...........................................................................87
5.10.1 Select Standard Dialog Box ...........................................................................87
5.10.2 Library of Standards: Display Standard Data Dialog Box ...............................88
5.10.3 Edit Standard Data Dialog Box ......................................................................89
5.11 Menu Commands .................................................................................................91
5.11.4 Commands in the Method Menu....................................................................94
5.11.5 Commands in the Tools Menu .......................................................................94
5.11.6 Commands in the Window Menu ...................................................................94
5.11.7 Commands in the X-LabPro Menu ................................................................95
5.12 Other ....................................................................................................................96
5.12.1 Toolbar ..........................................................................................................96
5.12.2 Title Bar.........................................................................................................97
6 Configuration Editor ...................................................................................................97
6.1 Using the Configuration Editor .............................................................................97
6.1.1 Menu Commands ..........................................................................................97

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 3 of 397
X-LabPro 5

6.1.3 Open Dialog Box ...........................................................................................99
6.1.4 Save As Dialog Box.......................................................................................99
6.1.5 Commands in the Reset Menu ....................................................................100
6.1.6 Commands in the View Menu ......................................................................100
6.1.7 Commands in the Help Menu ......................................................................101
6.1.8 Commands in the Control Menu ..................................................................101
6.2 Other ..................................................................................................................103
6.2.1 Toolbar ........................................................................................................103
6.2.2 Title Bar.......................................................................................................103
6.2.3 Status Bar ...................................................................................................104
6.2.4 Scroll bars ...................................................................................................104
6.3 The Configuration Editor Dialog Boxes...............................................................104
6.3.1 Global Settings and Instrument Data Dialog Box .........................................104
6.3.2 Targets/Filter Dialog Box .............................................................................105
6.3.3 X-Ray Tube Dialog Box ...............................................................................108
6.3.4 Instrument Control Dialog Box .....................................................................109
6.3.5 Sample Plate Dialog Box .............................................................................111
6.3.6 Detector Dialog Box ....................................................................................113
6.3.7 Filenames Dialog Box .................................................................................114
6.3.8 Interface Dialog Box ....................................................................................115
6.3.9 Artefacts Dialog Box ....................................................................................116
6.3.10 Geometry and Protection Foil Dialog Box ....................................................116
6.3.11 User Dialog .................................................................................................116
6.3.12 Routine Dialog Settings Dialog Box .............................................................116
6.3.13 Locked Positions Dialog Box .......................................................................118
6.3.14 Spectral Representation Settings Dialog Box ..............................................119
6.3.15 Select Elements Dialog Box ........................................................................121
6.3.16 Sample Settings Dialog Box ........................................................................122
6.3.17 Sample State Dialog Box.............................................................................123
6.3.18 Global Corrections Dialog Box.....................................................................124
6.3.19 MCA Recalibration Dialog Box ....................................................................124
6.3.20 Select Elements Dialog Box ........................................................................126
6.3.21 Evaluation Dialog Box .................................................................................128
6.3.22 Data Transmission Dialog Box ....................................................................128
6.3.23 Users and Passwords .................................................................................128
6.3.24 User Management Dialog Box .....................................................................128
6.3.25 User Levels .................................................................................................130
6.3.26 Recalibration Dialog Box .............................................................................130
6.3.27 Bond Classes Dialog Box ............................................................................131
6.3.28 Foils Dialog Box ..........................................................................................131
7 Library of Atomic Data .............................................................................................132
7.1 Using the Library of Atomic Data ........................................................................132
7.1.1 Items of the client area ................................................................................132
7.1.2 Parameters Dialog Box ...............................................................................133
7.1.3 Select Element Dialog Box ..........................................................................133
7.1.4 Search for Element Dialog Box....................................................................134
7.2 Menu Commands ...............................................................................................135
7.2.1 Library of atomic data ..................................................................................135
7.2.2 Commands in the File Menu ........................................................................135
7.2.3 Commands in the Element Menu ................................................................136
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 4 of 397
X-LabPro 5
7.2.4 Commands in the View Menu ......................................................................136

7.2.5 Commands in the Help Menu ......................................................................136
7.2.6 Commands in the Control Menu ..................................................................137
7.3 Other ..................................................................................................................138
7.3.1 Status Bar ...................................................................................................138
7.3.2 Toolbar ........................................................................................................138
7.3.3 Scroll bars ...................................................................................................139
7.3.3.1 Title Bar.......................................................................................................139
8 Hot Keys ....................................................................................................................140
8.1 General Hot Keys ...............................................................................................140
8.2 Job Manager Shortcuts ......................................................................................141
8.3 Shortcuts............................................................................................................141
8.4 Method Administration Shortcuts........................................................................142
Pro
X-LAB 5 General Tutorial ..............................................................................................143
9 Application guide......................................................................................................143
10 Sample Preparation ..................................................................................................145
10.1 Sample Preparation for Liquids ..........................................................................145
10.2 Sample Preparation for Powder Samples...........................................................145
10.3 Sample Preparation for Liquids / Powders .........................................................146
10.4 Sample Preparation for Pellets ...........................................................................148
10.5 Preparation of Pressed Powder Pellets in Rings ................................................149
10.6 Sample Preparation for Fused Beads ................................................................156
11 Measuring a sample - The Routine Dialog ..............................................................157
11.1 Configure Routine Dialog ...................................................................................158
11.2 Routine Dialog ...................................................................................................161
12 Printing results .........................................................................................................165
12.1 Output ................................................................................................................166
12.2 Print Preview ......................................................................................................166
13 Working with jobs .....................................................................................................168
14 The Recycle Bin ........................................................................................................170
15 Configuration Editor .................................................................................................170
15.1 User Management .............................................................................................170
15.2 Definition of Foils ...............................................................................................172
15.3 Definition of Bonds .............................................................................................173
15.4 Definition of Recalibration Samples and Methods ..............................................174
15.5 Definition of Samples .........................................................................................175
16 General ......................................................................................................................177
16.1 Recalibration ......................................................................................................178
16.2 Global Recalibration ...........................................................................................179
16.3 Method Recalibration .........................................................................................181
16.4 Intercept Recalibration .......................................................................................185
16.5 Run MCA Calibration .........................................................................................188
16.6 Standards ..........................................................................................................189
17 Data Storage .............................................................................................................193
18 Import/Export ............................................................................................................194
18.1 Export Methods ..................................................................................................194
18.2 Import Methods ..................................................................................................196
18.3 Export Jobs ........................................................................................................198
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 5 of 397
X-LabPro 5
18.4 Import Jobs ........................................................................................................200

18.5 Export Samples..................................................................................................201
18.6 Import Samples ..................................................................................................203
18.7 Protocol File for Recalibrations ..........................................................................204
19 Literature ...................................................................................................................206
Spectro Midex Easy GUI ..................................................................................................208
20 How to start ...............................................................................................................208
21 Starting up.................................................................................................................209
21.1 Log in .................................................................................................................209
21.2 Standby mode ....................................................................................................209
22 Using Easy Routine ..................................................................................................210
22.1 Introducing the dialog .........................................................................................210
22.1.1 Sample view ................................................................................................211
22.1.2 Selecting a Method class.............................................................................212
22.1.3 Selecting a Method......................................................................................212
22.1.3.1 Selecting a Job ........................................................................................212
22.1.3.2 Editing a Job............................................................................................213
22.1.3.3 Editing the sample name .........................................................................213
22.1.3.4 Pasting a sample .....................................................................................213
22.1.3.5 Using the virtual keyboard .......................................................................214
22.1.4 Spectrum view .............................................................................................215
22.1.5 Close Button................................................................................................216
22.2 Function Buttons ................................................................................................216
22.2.1.1 Start ........................................................................................................216
22.2.1.2 Stop.........................................................................................................216
22.2.1.3 Off ...........................................................................................................217
22.2.1.4 Standby ...................................................................................................217
22.2.1.5 Settings ...................................................................................................217
22.2.1.6 Recalibration ...........................................................................................218
22.2.1.7 Validate ...................................................................................................218
22.2.1.8 Print .........................................................................................................218
22.2.2 Set Video ....................................................................................................219
22.2.3 Light ............................................................................................................220
22.2.4 Laser ...........................................................................................................220
22.2.5 Parameter Bar .............................................................................................220
22.2.6 State Icons ..................................................................................................221
22.2.6.1 Lock/Unlock .............................................................................................221
22.2.6.2 X-Ray on/off ............................................................................................221
22.2.7 Settings dialog .............................................................................................222
22.2.8 Recalibration dialog .....................................................................................223
22.3 Recalibration ......................................................................................................224
22.3.1 MCA ............................................................................................................224
22.3.2 Global..........................................................................................................224
22.3.3 Intercept ......................................................................................................225
22.3.4 Method ........................................................................................................225
22.4 Validation ...........................................................................................................226
SPECTRO MIDEX Tutorials ..............................................................................................227
23 About this Manual.....................................................................................................228
24 Getting started ..........................................................................................................228
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 6 of 397
X-LabPro 5
24.1 Application Requirements ..................................................................................228

24.1.1 Starting the Application ...............................................................................228
24.1.2 Shutting down the Application .....................................................................229
24.2 Quick Scan Guide ..............................................................................................230
25 Routine Dialog ..........................................................................................................231
25.1 Wizard Style .......................................................................................................231
25.2 Integration into X-LabPro 5 ..................................................................................231
25.3 Login and Authorization .....................................................................................232
25.4 Connecting to the Device ...................................................................................233
25.4.1 Connection Setup ........................................................................................233
25.4.2 Testing the Connection ...............................................................................233
25.4.3 Simulation Mode .........................................................................................234
25.5 Routine Dialog Main Window .............................................................................235
25.5.1 Main Menu Items .........................................................................................236
25.5.2 Measurement Parameters and Information Bar ...........................................237
25.5.3 Status Icons ................................................................................................238
25.5.4 Popup Notifications .....................................................................................240
25.5.5 X-LabPro Bar ................................................................................................240
25.5.6 Device Control Log Window ........................................................................241
25.5.7 Device Communication Log Window ...........................................................242
25.5.8 Wizard Navigation .......................................................................................242
25.6 Wizard Pages and Device Operation .................................................................242
25.6.1 Wizard Workflow .........................................................................................242
25.6.2 Welcome Page ............................................................................................244
25.6.2.1 Entering Standby Mode ...........................................................................245
25.6.3 Instrument Setup Page ................................................................................245
25.6.3.1 Live Video ...............................................................................................247
25.6.3.2 Stage Control ..........................................................................................248
25.6.3.4 Define the Maximum Z-Position of the Stage ...........................................252
25.6.4 Preview Scan Page .....................................................................................254
25.6.4.1 Scan Modes ............................................................................................254
25.6.4.2 Raster Scan.............................................................................................254
25.6.4.3 Point and Shoot Scan ..............................................................................257
25.6.5 Scan Setup Page ........................................................................................258
25.6.5.1 Toolbars ..................................................................................................259
25.6.5.2 Preview Image.........................................................................................261
25.6.5.3 Zooming the preview ...............................................................................262
25.6.5.4 Navigating through the preview ...............................................................265
25.6.5.5 Preview Options ......................................................................................267
25.6.5.6 Method Class and Method Selection .......................................................269
25.6.5.7 Saving and Loading Setup Lists ..............................................................269
25.6.5.8 Switching Scan Types (Mapping, Linescan or Pointscan) ........................270
25.6.5.9 Setup Mappings ......................................................................................271
25.6.5.10 Setup Linescans ......................................................................................274
25.6.5.11 Setup Pointscans ....................................................................................276
25.6.5.12 Stage Coordinates and Units ...................................................................280
25.6.5.13 Repro Scans............................................................................................280
25.6.5.14 Recalibration ...........................................................................................281
25.6.6 Verification Page .........................................................................................281
25.6.6.1 Review the Scan Setup ...........................................................................282
25.6.6.2 Select an Evaluation Mode ......................................................................283
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 7 of 397
X-LabPro 5
25.6.6.3 Start the Scan..........................................................................................283

25.6.7 Scan Progress Page ...................................................................................284
25.6.7.1 Display of Scan Progress ........................................................................284
25.6.7.2 Intermediate Results View .......................................................................285
25.6.7.3 Aborting the Scan ....................................................................................285
25.6.8 Scan Results Page ......................................................................................286
25.6.8.1 Visualization ............................................................................................286
25.7 After measurement ............................................................................................290
25.8 Evaluating of mappings measured with SPECTRO MIDEX ................................291
SPECTRO iQ II Easy GUI ..................................................................................................297
26 How to start ...............................................................................................................297
27 Starting up.................................................................................................................298
27.1 Log in .................................................................................................................298
27.2 Interlock check ...................................................................................................298
27.3 Standby mode ....................................................................................................299
28 Using Easy Routine ..................................................................................................300
28.1 Introducing the dialog .........................................................................................300
28.1.1 Sample view ................................................................................................301
28.1.2 Selecting a Method class.............................................................................301
28.1.3 Selecting a Method......................................................................................302
28.1.3.1 Selecting a Job ........................................................................................302
28.1.3.2 Editing a Job............................................................................................302
28.1.3.3 Editing the sample name .........................................................................303
28.1.3.4 Pasting a sample .....................................................................................303
28.1.3.5 Using the virtual keyboard .......................................................................303
28.1.4 Spectrum view .............................................................................................304
28.1.5 Close Button................................................................................................305
28.2 Function Buttons ................................................................................................305
28.2.1.1 Start ........................................................................................................305
28.2.1.2 Stop.........................................................................................................305
28.2.1.3 Pause ......................................................................................................306
28.2.1.4 Continue ..................................................................................................306
28.2.1.5 Off ...........................................................................................................306
28.2.1.6 Standby ...................................................................................................307
28.2.1.7 Settings ...................................................................................................307
28.2.1.8 Recalibration ...........................................................................................307
28.2.1.9 Validate ...................................................................................................308
28.2.1.10 Print .........................................................................................................308
28.2.2 Parameter Bar .............................................................................................308
28.2.3 State Icons ..................................................................................................309
28.2.3.1 Lock/Unlock .............................................................................................309
28.2.3.2 X-Ray on/off ............................................................................................309
28.2.4 Settings dialog .............................................................................................310
28.2.5 Recalibration dialog .....................................................................................311
28.3 Recalibration ......................................................................................................312
28.3.1 MCA ............................................................................................................312
28.3.2 Global..........................................................................................................312
28.3.3 Intercept ......................................................................................................313
28.3.4 Method ........................................................................................................313
28.4 Validation ...........................................................................................................314
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 8 of 397
X-LabPro 5
SPECTRO iQ II XRF Tutorial ............................................................................................315

29 Method Administration .............................................................................................315
30 Calibration .................................................................................................................316
30.1 Calibration Procedure ........................................................................................318
30.2 Empirical Calibration using Lucas-Tooth/Price ...................................................322
30.3 Calibration based on a Fundamental Parameter Model (FPM) ...........................327
30.4 Special procedure for Calibration of Layer thickness ..........................................330
30.5 Elements ............................................................................................................331
30.6 Measurement .....................................................................................................332
30.7 Spectra Viewer...................................................................................................335
30.8 Deconvolution ....................................................................................................336
30.9 Deconvolution Strategies ...................................................................................340
30.10 Artefacts: .....................................................................................................341
30.11 Background Spectra ....................................................................................342
30.12 Background and Contaminations.................................................................344
30.13 Library of Standards ....................................................................................346
30.14 Regions in Lucas-Tooth/Price .....................................................................346
30.15 Error Messages during Calibration ..............................................................348
SPECTRO XEPOS XRF Tutorial .......................................................................................350
31 Method Administration .............................................................................................350
32 SPECTRO Calibration - a Hybrid Procedure ...........................................................351
33 Calibration .................................................................................................................353
33.1 Calibration Procedure ........................................................................................354
33.2 Empirical Calibration using Lucas-Tooth/Price ...................................................359
33.3 Calibration based on a Fundamental Parameter Model (FPM) ...........................365
33.4 Calibration with Extended Compton Model .........................................................367
33.5 Special procedure for Calibration of Layer thickness ..........................................370
33.6 Elements ............................................................................................................372
33.7 Measurement .....................................................................................................373
33.8 Spectra Viewer...................................................................................................376
33.9 Deconvolution ....................................................................................................377
33.10 Deconvolution Strategies.............................................................................384
33.11 Artefacts: .....................................................................................................385
33.12 Background Spectra ....................................................................................386
33.13 Background and Contaminations.................................................................387
33.14 Calibration of the Mass Attenuation Coefficient ...........................................392
33.15 Library of Standards ....................................................................................394
33.16 Regions in Lucas-Tooth/Price .....................................................................395
33.17 Error Messages during Calibration ..............................................................396
34 Important Information...............................................................................................397

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 9 of 397
X-LabPro 5
SOFTWARE HELP
1 Job Manager
1.1 Job Manager

The Job Manager XLJobMan is a module of the X-LabPro software package to
display and edit jobs and samples.
XLJobMan contains a new tree control following the design of the Windows
explorer. Using the menu entries or the command buttons of the toolbar you can
create, edit, backup or delete jobs and samples. The tree control and the job
window offer you context menus to do further operations. Note: Some menu
entries and command buttons of the toolbar are disabled as long as no sample is
selected or as long as no job window is opened.
1.1.1 Window overview

 Tree Control
 Job Window
Menu overview
 File Menu
 Edit Menu
 View Menu
 Job Menu
 Window Menu
 X-LabPro Menu
 Help Menu
Other
 Title Bar
 Toolbar
 Status Bar
1.2 Job Window

The job window is used to display all of the samples assigned to the active job.
Samples can be assigned to jobs and organized using the job window. Each
customer sample has to be assigned to a job. Click on the head of a column (like
in the Windows explorer) to sort the samples alternately up- and downward in
relation to the contents of the selected column.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 10 of 397
X-LabPro 5
You get access to all commands of the Edit menu by clicking the right mouse
button on a sample.
Instead of a job, the trashcan can be opened. In this case the trashcan context
menu looks like shown on the following pictures.
 Restore
Select Restore to restore the selected sample(s). The sample(s) will be
assigned to the former jobs(s). If a job does not exist any more, the sample
will be restored to the collective job.
 Restore All
Select Restore All to restore all samples in the trashcan. See Restore for
details.
 Delete
Select Delete to delete the selected sample(s).
 Delete All
Select Delete All to delete all samples in the trashcan.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 11 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Note:
The samples should be assigned to different jobs even if your applications are not
organized according to jobs. In this case, a new job may be created for each
week, for example.
Changes to the data are automatically stored. Use the New Window menupoint of
the Window menu or of the job context menu of the tree control to open additional
job windows.
Use the Sample menu or the command buttons in the toolbar to copy sample data
to other jobs or windows.
1.3 Create New Job/Job Properties

Use this dialog to create a new job.
Key Information Group

Name of job
Enter the name of the job to be newly created. The name may be up to 20
characters long and must be unique.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 12 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Description
Enter a description of the new job. The description may be up to 20 characters
long.
Comment
Use this field to enter a comment for the new job.
Customer Group
Name
Enter the customer's name and the name of the contact person, etc. as desired in
these text boxes. Up to 40 characters may be entered in each field.
Street
Enter the street address for the customer in this text box. Up to 40 characters may
be entered in this text field.
City, State, Zip
Enter the city, state and postal code information for the customer address in this
text box. Up to 40 characters may be entered in this text box.
Comments Group
Enter comments about the job being created in these text boxes. Up to 80
characters may be entered in each of the text boxes.
After entering the new job´s data click on the OK command button to confirm the
entries. The job will be created and automatically displayed in a new job window.
To cancel just click on the Cancel command button. Now, the job won´t be
created.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 13 of 397
X-LabPro 5
1.4 Edit Job

Use this dialog to edit a job.
Key Information Group

Name of job
Edit the name of the job. The name may be up to 20 characters long and must be
unique.
Description
Edit the description of the job. The description may be up to 20 characters long.
Customer Group
Name
Edit the customer's name and the name of the contact person, etc. as desired in
these text boxes. Up to 40 characters may be entered in each field.
Street
Edit the street address for the customer in this text box. Up to 40 characters may
be entered in this text field.
City, State, Zip
Edit the city, state and postal code information for the customer address in this text
box. Up to 40 characters may be entered in this text box.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 14 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Comments Group
Edit the comments about the job in this text boxes. Up to 80 characters may be
entered in each of the text boxes.
After editing the job´s data click on the OK command button to confirm the
changes.
To cancel click on the Cancel command button and the job won´t be changed.
1.5 Import Job

Use this dialog box to select the archive-file of the job you want to import.
For a detailed description how to import/export jobs please refer to the relevant
chapter.
1.6 Export Job

Use this dialog box to select the folder where you want to export a job.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 15 of 397
X-LabPro 5
For a detailed description how to import/export jobs please refer to the relevant
chapter.
1.7 Tree Control

In the left area of the job manager it is possible to display the tree control.
The tree control displays all the jobs and their assigned samples and
measurements of the database. Further it displays the trashcan, where deleted
samples are stored. To show or hide the tree control choose Tree Control of the

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 16 of 397
X-LabPro 5
View menu ( ALT, V, C ). Update of the same menu will add valid database
changes to the tree control.
Click on a job to display the assigned samples in the active job window. Double
click on a job or sample item to fold open or back the children, clicking on a plus or
minus icon of the tree is the same. The blue number maintain the numbers of
children of the items.
Right click on an item will give you access to a context menu in relation to the type
( job, sample, measurement, trashcan ).
1.8 Context Menu for a job
 Job Properties
Select Job Properties to get the properties of the selected job. This selection
opens the Job Properties dialog box.
 New Window
Select New Window to open a new job window containing the selected job.
 Delete Job
Select Delete Job to delete the selected job. This selection opens a dialog
box to confirm the deletion. The assigned samples will be moved to the
trashcan.
1.9 Context Menu for a sample
 Sample Properties
Select Sample Properties to get the properties of the selected sample. This
selection opens the Sample Properties dialog box.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 17 of 397
X-LabPro 5
 Show Spectra
Select Show Spectra to open the X-LabPro Spectra Viewer and see the
spectra of the selected sample.
 Results
Select Results to get the results of the selected sample. This selection opens
the Display Sample Results dialog box.
1.10 Context Menu for the trashcan
 Delete All
Select Delete All to delete all samples in the trashcan.
 New Window
Select New Window to open a new job window containing the trashcan.
Note: The job window offers you some more commands for the trashcan. For
example, you can restore samples.
1.11 Menu Commands
1.11.1 Commands in the File Menu

 Open Job
Use this command to open a job. This command opens a dialog box to select
a job. The selected job will be opened in a new job window.
 Shortcuts:
Toolbar:
Keyboard: CTRL+O
 Close Job
Use this command to close the active job window.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 18 of 397
X-LabPro 5
 Shortcuts:
Keyboard: CTRL+Q
 Print
Use this command to print the selected sample(s). This command opens a
Print dialog box to do printer settings and the printing.
Shortcuts
Keyboard: CTRL+P
 Print preview
Use this command to get a preview of the print-out on the screen.
 Exit
Use this command to end your XLJobMan session. You can also use the
Close command on the application control menu.
Shortcuts
Mouse: Double click the application's icon.
Keyboard: ALT+F4
1.11.2 Commands in the Edit Menu

 New
Use this command to create a new sample. This command opens the
Enter/Edit Sample Data dialog box to enter the new sample´s properties. If a
sample is selected at the moment you use this command, the dialog box will
be preset with the properties of the selected sample otherwise with defaults.
The new sample will be assigned to the active job.
 Edit
Use this command to edit the selected sample. This command opens the
Enter/Edit Sample Data dialog box to change the sample´s properties.
 Copy
Use this command to copy the selected sample(s) to the X-LabPro clipboard.
Shortcuts
Toolbar:
Keyboard: CTRL+C
 Paste
Use this command to paste the sample(s) from the X-LabPro clipboard into
the active job.
Shortcuts
Toolbar:
Keyboard: CTRL+V

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 19 of 397
X-LabPro 5
 Paste with Data

Use this command to paste the sample(s) including their results from the X-
LabPro clipboard into the active job.
Shortcuts
Keyboard: CTRL+W
 Clone
Use this command to clone the selected sample(s). The selected sample(s)
will immediately be copied and pasted to the active job. The X-LabPro
clipboard won´t be used.
Shortcuts
Toolbar:
Keyboard: CTRL+B
 Delete
Use this command to delete the selected sample(s). The selected sample(s)
will be moved to the trashcan.
Shortcuts
Toolbar:
Keyboard: CTRL+X
 Assign Method
This command changes the method assignment of a sample.
 Reset Measurements
This command resets the measurements of one or more selected samples.
 Import Sample(s)
Use this command to import samples from archive-files (*.smp). This
command opens a dialog box where you can select one or more files. The
imported samples will be assigned to the active job.
 Export Sample(s)
Use this command to export the selected samples to archive-files (*.smp).
This command opens a dialog box where you can select the export folder.
 Evaluate
Use this command to evaluate the selected sample(s)
 Show Spectra
Use this command to open the X-LabPro Spectra Viewer to see the spectra of
the selected sample(s).
Shortcuts
Toolbar:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 20 of 397
X-LabPro 5
 Results
Use this command to get the results of the selected sample. This command
opens the Display Sample Results dialog box.
Shortcuts
Toolbar:
 Properties
Use this command to get the properties of the selected sample. This
command opens the Sample Properties dialog box.
1.11.3 Commands in the View Menu

 Toolbar
Use this command to display and hide the toolbar, which includes buttons for
some of the most common commands in the Job Manager. A check mark
appears next to the menu item when the toolbar is displayed.
See Toolbar for help on using the toolbar.
 Status Bar
Use this command to display and hide the status bar, which describes the
action to be executed by the selected menu item or depressed toolbar button,
and keyboard latch state. A check mark appears next to the menu item when
the status bar is displayed.
See Status Bar for help on using the status bar.
 Tree Control
Use this command to show and hide the tree control. The tree control shows
the jobs and the assigned samples with measurements.
 Update
Use this command to update the tree control after valid database changes
have been made from X-LabPro. When using this command the tree will only
be reloaded from its temporary files.
 Rebuild
have been made from X-LabPro. When using this command the tree will
completely re-calculated from the database. This operation will take a few
seconds.
1.11.4 Commands in the Window Menu

The Window menu contains the following commands.
 New Window
Select this menupoint to open a new job window.
 Cascade
Select this menupoint to arrange open windows so that the title bar of each
window is visible. Only a portion of the other windows is displayed. Scroll
within the visible portion with the scroll bars.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 21 of 397
X-LabPro 5
 Tile
Select this menupoint to arrange all of the open windows side by side so that
all of them are visible. Only a portion of the other windows is displayed. Scroll
 Arrange Icons
Select this menupoint to arrange the icons within the application window.
1.11.5 Commands in the X-LabPro Menu

The X-LabPro menu contains the following commands to open other applications:
 Method Administration...
Use this command to open the Method Administration. You may also click on
the button on the toolbar.
 Job Manager...
This command would open the Job Manager. It is disabled because the Job
Manage is already running.
 Routine Dialog...
Use this command to open the Routine Dialog. You may also click on the
button on the toolbar.
 Spectra Viewer...
Use this command to open the Spectra Viewer. You may also click on the
 Configuration Editor...
Use this command to open the Configuration Editor.
 Evaluation...
Use this command to open the Evaluation Tool.
1.11.6 Commands in the Help Menu

The Help menu contains the following commands which will assist you by using
this application:
 Contents
Select this menupoint to display a table of contents for the help system of the
X-LabPro applications. In the help system, select the Contents command
button below the menuline to show the table of contents.
 Context Sensitive
Select this menupoint to display a context sensitive help text. This menupoint
corresponds to the command button with a question mark in the toolbar.
 Software
Select this menupoint to display a table of contents for the software
description. Use of the operation and control software for the X-LAB energy
dispersive x-ray fluorescence spectrometer is described in this section.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 22 of 397
X-LabPro 5
 Shortcuts
Select this menupoint to display an overview of the keyboard shortcuts.
 About XLJobMan
Show the version and copyrights of the Job Manager.
1.12 Other
1.12.1 Toolbar
The toolbar is displayed across the top of the application window, below the menu
bar. It provides quick mouse access to many functions used in the job manager.
To hide or display the toolbar, choose Toolbar from the View menu (ALT, V, T).
Click to
Create a new job and open it in a new job window.
Open a dialog to select a job. The selected job will be opened in a new
job window.
Copy the selected sample(s) to the X-LabPro clipboard.
Paste the sample(s) in the X-LabPro clipboard to the active job.
Clone the selected sample(s). The selected sample(s) will immediately be
copied and pasted to the active job. The clipboard will not be used for this
operation.
Delete the selected sample(s). The selected sample(s) will be moved to
the trashcan.
Open the X-LabPro Spectra Viewer to show the spectra of the selected
sample(s).
Open the Display Sample Results dialog box to show the results of
the selected sample.
Print the selected sample(s).
Open the Online Help.
Open the Method Administration.This button is disabled because the

Method Administration is already running.
Open the Job Manager.
Open the Routine Dialog.
Open the Spectra Viewer.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 23 of 397
X-LabPro 5
1.12.2 Title Bar
The title bar is located along the top of the application window. It contains the
names of the application and of the current job window.
To move the window, drag the title bar. Note: You can also move dialog boxes by
dragging their title bars.
The title bar may contain the following elements:
Exit button
Maximize button
Minimize button
Name of the application
Name of the job window
Icon of the application
1.12.3 Status Bar
The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Job Manager. To display or hide
the status bar, use the Status Bar command in the View menu.
The left area of the status bar describes actions of menu items as you use the
arrow keys to navigate through menus. This area shows messages that describe
the action of a toolbar button while pressing the button. If after viewing the
description of the toolbar button command you wish not to execute the command,
then release the mouse button while the pointer is off the toolbar button.
Moreover the database reading status will be shown in the status bar by a
progress bar.
The right areas of the status bar indicate which of the following keys are latched
down:
Indicator Description
CAP The Caps Lock key is latched down.
NUM The Num Lock key is latched down.
SCRL The Scroll Lock key is latched down.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 24 of 397
X-LabPro 5
2 Routine Dialog
The Routine Dialog offers the user an easy use of the X-LabPro routine
measurement.
It is possible to enter the sample data in the right area of the screen, the sample
table. The left area contains a tab control for the selection of different view modes
during the measurement. It is possible to switch between the
 Sample Plate Display
 Spectrum Display
 Video Display (if your instrument is equipped with a video camera system).
 Comunication
 Element Mapping (MIDEX equipped with xyz stages only)
The following menus are displayed when the Routine window is active:
 File Menu
 Edit Menu
 View Menu
 Tools Menu
 Recalibration Menu
 Video Menu
 Help Menu
 System Menu
See also:
Toolbar
Statusbar
2.1 The X-LabPro Routine Dialog

The Routine Dialog offers the user an easy use of the X-LabPro routine
measurement.
It is possible to enter the sample data in the right area of the screen, the sample
table. The left area contains a tab control for the selection of different view modes
during the measurement. It is possible to switch between the
 Sample Plate Display
 Spectrum Display
 Video Display (if your instrument is equipped with a video camera system).
 Comunication
 Element Mapping (MIDEX equipped with xyz stages only)
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 25 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The following menus are displayed when the Routine window is active:
 File Menu
 Edit Menu
 View Menu
 Tools Menu
 Recalibration Menu
 Video Menu
 Help Menu
 System Menu
See also:
Toolbar
Statusbar
2.2 How to Define New Samples/Enter the Sample Data

(Xepos)
By clicking a cell in the "Name" column this will be highlighted and you can enter
the sample name using the keyboard. After leaving this cell by pressing the "Enter"
key, an arrow key or clicking into another cell, the sample name is accepted.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 26 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Moreover, the job name will generated automatically as configurated. You can
overwrite the job name if necessary.
Use the mouse to select a method from the method field. By clicking on the
method field, a drop down list opens and it is possible to select a method. Only the
methods of the selected method class will be displayed in the drop down list.
For editing additional sample data it is possible to display the respective columns
by changing the configuration in the Routine Dialog Settings Dialog Box in the
Configuration Editor. For changing additional data without displaying the columns,
click with the right mouse button on the respective cell containing the sample
name and select the Sample Data menu point from the context menu. The
Enter/Edit Sample Data Dialog Box opens.
It is possible to select another method class for your sample plate by using the
drop down list box above the sample table. In the example the method class "Vac
methods" is in use.
Note: By selecting a new method class all contents of the sample table will be
deleted.
It is possible to define the sample plate for repeated runs by selecting a repetition
number from the drop down list box left above the sample table (Here only 1 run is
selected).
You can use the following shortcuts to use the clipboard:
 Use the "Del" key to delete the content of the selected field or the whole
sample, if the belonging row is selected in the table.
 Use "Ctrl+Ins" or "Ctrl+C" to copy selected table areas into the clipboard.
 Use "Shift+Ins" or "Ctrl+V" to paste the data from the clipboard into the
selected table area.
 Use "Shift+Del" or "Ctrl+X" to cut selected table areas into the clipboard.
You can edit the entered data at every time before the measurement is started.
Just click into the cell to overwrite the contained data.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 27 of 397
X-LabPro 5
2.3 How to Define New Samples/Enter the Sample Data (IQ)
By clicking in the "Sample Name" edit box you can enter the sample name using
the keyboard. Moreover, the job name will generated automatically as
configurated. You can overwrite the job name if necessary.
Use the mouse to select a method from the "Method" drop down list. Only the
methods of the selected method class will be displayed in the drop down list.
For editing additional sample data click with the right mouse button in the "Sample
Name" edit box and select the Sample Data menu point from the context menu.
The Enter/Edit Sample Data Dialog Box opens.
It is possible to select another method class by using the drop down list box above
the "Sample Name" edit box. In the example the method class "SPECTRO IQ" is
in use.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 28 of 397
X-LabPro 5
It is possible to define a sample measurement for repeated runs by selecting a

repetition number from the drop down list box left above the sample table (Here
only 1 run is selected).
You can edit the entered data at every time before the measurement is started.
2.4 How to Load and Save the Sample Plates

At every time it is possible to save the entered sample data for later use. To do
this use the menu point Save as of the File Menu. The Save As dialog box opens
like shown in the picture below:
Enter a file name for your sample plate. By clicking the "Save" command button
the sample plate data will be saved. The file type is "xst" ("X-LabPro Sample
Table").
To open a saved sample plate later, use the File Open command in the File Menu.
The File Open dialog shown in the picture below will open and you can select one
of the files shown in the dialog box.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 29 of 397
X-LabPro 5
2.5 The Measurement

After entering all sample plate data or loading a sample plate, the measurement
can be started by clicking the Start button shown below. The following picture
shows the control panel of the Routine Dialog.
For an IQ you have to enter a sample name in the Sample Name Eedit field. The
following picture shows the control panel of the Routine Dialog if your intrument is
a IQ.
The command buttons have the following functions:

 Start – Starts the measurement. Will be switched during the measruement to
 Stop – Measurement will be stopped (Standby Mode will be entered if
selected)
 Abort – Measurement will be stopped (Standby Mode will not be entered)
 Pause – Measurement will be paused. Continue by clicking Start
 Test – Starts a test measurement after entering all measurements parameters

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 30 of 397
X-LabPro 5
 Next – During the measurement: The current measurement will be breaked

and the next measurement will be started
 Standby – The standby mode of the instrument can be switched on or off
 Reset – The actually measurement will be restarted
 Off – Turn off the instrument (IQ only)
The check boxes on the right have the following functions:
 Measurement – The samples of the current selected sample plate will be
measured
 Evaluation – The samples of the current selected sample plate will be
evaluated
 Direct Print – The sample results will be printed directly after the
measurement is done
 Standby – After the measurement is completed the instrument will be
switched into the standby mode.
After the measurement is started the samples will be shown in different colors. The
colors have the following symbols (Xepos only):
 Red = The sample is not measured completely
 Yellow = This sample is in measurement
 Green = The sample is measured completely
The remaining time will be displayed like in the following picture (Xepos only):
2.6 Show the Sample Results

After the measurement and evaluation of a sample is finished, you can open the
context menu by clicking the right mouse button on the sample name. The context
menu is shown in the following picture:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 31 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Select the Results menu point to open the Display Sample Results Dialog Box:
For a IQ the sample results will be shown automatically after the measurement
and evaluation of a sample is finished.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 32 of 397
X-LabPro 5
2.7 Prepare Global Recalibration

If a global recalibration is necessary, use the menu point Prepare Global
Recalibration of the Recalibration menu. Remember that reference samples
defined once in X-LabPro are required for a propper work of this function.
The routine dialog itself will create a new global sample plate like shown in the
following picture:
The routine dialog for an IQ will also create a new global sample like shown in the
following picture:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 33 of 397
X-LabPro 5
New recalibration samples with a continuous numbered sample name (e.g.

"_07R", "_06R",...) will automatically be generated as defined in the configuration
editor. These samples will automatically contain a link to the original reference
sample as control sample.
Use this function only to prepare and start a global recalibration.
Do not try to edit the automatically generated sample plate manually.
2.8 Prepare MCA Recalibration

If an MCA recalibration is necessary, use the menu point Prepare MCA
Recalibration of the Recalibration menu. Remember that a reference sample
defined once in X-LabPro is required for a propper work of this function.
The routine dialog itself will create a new MCA sample plate like shown in the
following picture:
The routine dialog for an IQ will also create a new MCA sample like shown in the
following picture:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 34 of 397
X-LabPro 5
New MCA samples with a continous numbered sample name (e.g. "_27R",
"_28R",...) will automatically be generated as defined in the configuration editor.
These samples will automatically contain a link to the original reference sample as
control sample.
Use this function only to prepare and start an MCA recalibration.
Do not try to edit the automatically generated sample plate manually.
2.9 Prepare Intercept Recalibration

If an Intercept recalibration is necessary, use the menu point Prepare Intercept
Recalibration of the Recalibration menu. A dialog box for method selection will be
opened. Select the method that should be calibrated in this dialog box.
Remember that a reference sample defined once in Method Administration is
required for a propper work of this function.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 35 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The routine dialog itself will create a new Intercept sample plate like shown in the
following picture:
For an IQ the routine dialog look like the following picture:
New Intercept samples with a continous numbered sample name (e.g. "_27R",
control sample.
Use this function only to prepare and start an Intercept recalibration.
2.10 Prepare Method Recalibration

If an Method recalibration is necessary, use the menu point Prepare Method
Recalibration of the Recalibration menu. A dialog box for the method selection will
be opened. Select in this dialog box the method that should be calibrated
Remember that a reference sample defined once in Method the Administration is
required for a propper work of this function.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 36 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The routine dialog itself will create a new Method sample plate like shown in the
following picture:
For an IQ the routine dialog look like the following picture:
New Mehod samples with a continous numbered sample name (e.g. "_27R",
control sample.
Use this function only to prepare and start an Method recalibration.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 37 of 397
X-LabPro 5
2.11 The Routine Dialog Spectrum Display
The spectrum display shows the spectrum that is transmitted from the instrument.
On the top the sample name of the current measured sample and the
measurement number is displayed.
On the bottom the line cursor data for the current line cursor position is displayed.
Click into the spectrum display to place the line cursor.
Use the Toolbox to have enhanced access to the spectral representation. You can
open the toolbox by using the Toolbar symbol or the Tools Menu.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 38 of 397
X-LabPro 5
2.12 The Routine Dialog Sample Plate Display
The sample plate display can be selected by using the tab control in the middle left
of the Routine Dialog screen. It shows the instrument sample plate status at its
current situation.
The different colors have the following significance:
Dark Gray (with text "Lock")
Locked Position. You cannot place samples on this plate position. Locked
positions can be defined in the Configuration Editor by using the Routine Dialog
Settings Dialog Box.
Green
Measurement of this sample is completed
Yellow
Measurement of this sample in progress
Red
Measurement of this sample is not completed
Blue (during editing the sample table)
This position is selcted for entering sample data
2.13 Settings Dialog Box

The presets for the Routine Dialog can be configured using the Configuration
Editor. Click with the right mouse button on the X-LabPro communication server
(small icon in the tray, left to the clock) and click Configuration Editor. After double-
clicking the Routine Dialog icon, the following dialog opens:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 39 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Here the method class, a sample plate and a list of locked positions can be
selected as pre-setted for the Routine Dialog. Moreover you can decide how the
job name will be created automatically. You can choose between collective job as
automatically used, a daily generated job (e.g. 2001_06_05), a weekly generated
job (e.g. 2001_23) or a monthly generated job (e.g. 2001_06).
Note: A job can include a maximum of 1000 samples.
If you measure a lot of samples it will be useful to use weekly or daily generated
jobs.
The check box at the bottom of the dialog can be used to start the Routine Dialog
automatically with X-LabPro.
You must define at least one method class. Click on the Method Class tab control
to open the following sheet:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 40 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The picture shows a system containing 3 method classes. Up to 20 method

classes can be defined. Use the Insert and Delete button to manage your method
classes. After you have defined the method classes use the Method Assignment
sheet to assign the methods to the defined classes.
Select the method class in the drop down list at the top right of the dialog. Use
Insert to add selected methods from the list at the left to the selected method class
represented by the right list. Use Delete to remove a selected method from the
right list.
Click to the Locked Positions sheet to define the list of locked positions as shown
in the picture below. Use New to open the Edit Locked Positions dialog box for
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 41 of 397
X-LabPro 5
selecting locked positions. By clicking Edit you can edit the selected list of locked
positions. Click Delete for deleting the selected list of locked positions.
In the Columns sheet you can define the order of the columns and select if you
want the columns to be visible or hidden. Use the Up and Down buttons to change
the order position of a selected column. Double-click on a column to change
between visible or hidden.
After the configuration is finished it is meaningful to edit and check the settings on
the first sheet Presets again and to save the configuration. Restart all the X-
LabPro applications to make user of the new settings.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 42 of 397
X-LabPro 5
If you want to change the settings for a selected plate in the Routine Dialog, use
the Settings dialog box that can be opened by clicking Settings in the Extras
menu.
3 Result Viewer
Certain applications require the compliance with a predefined set of concentration
limits for one or more elements. The result viewer not only controls the compliance
of the analytical result, it also presents it in a visual form with all relevant
information included.
3.1 Selection of elements / definition of concentration limits

Open the “Method Administration” and select a method. In the tab “Output” –
“Element Options” select the elements which have to be monitored.
To activate the Result viewer click on “Open Result View after Measurement”.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 43 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Select tab “Elements” and enter the minimum and maximum concentration range.
Open the “Results viewer”.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 44 of 397
X-LabPro 5
After a measurement is finished the results are displayed.

Green bar : defined concentration range
Green arrow : result within concentration range
Red arrow : result out of concentration range
If you would like to have further information, click on “Tools – Settings”.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 45 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Here you can choose if you would like a scaling on the bars and a different color
for the concentration limits.
In the menu bar “View” you can either create a bitmap or open the bitmap in an
external application.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 46 of 397
X-LabPro 5
4 Spectra Viewer
4.1 The Spectra Viewer

The Spectra Viewer is used to view and compare spectra measured by your X-
LabPro software. To select spectra for the representation, the Spectra Viewer
offers two possibilities:
 The Tree Control
 The Selection Table
If at least one spectra window is shown, the following menus are enabled:
 File Menu
 View Menu
 Spectrum Menu
 MCA Menu
 Window Menu
 Help Menu
4.2 The Tree Control

In the left area of the Spectra Viewer it is possible to display the tree control. The
tree control displays the methods or jobs; you can select it below the control use
the tab control. The small blue number behind the methods (or jobs) shows the
number of samples a method or job is containing. The small number behind the
sample shows the number of measurements. The different sample types are
displayed by different icons, just as the different measurement states (-, M, A).

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 47 of 397
X-LabPro 5
4.2.1 How to Select Spectra for Representation

The usage of the tree control can be compared to the Windows Explorer. Use the
following possibilities to select a spectrum for being displayed in a spectra window:
 A double click on a measurement opens the spectrum in a new spectra
window.
 "Open new Spectrum Window" from the context menu (the context menu can
be opened by clicking with the right mouse button on a measurement) opens
the spectrum in a new spectra window.
 "Add to Spectrum Window" displays the selected measurement in an opened
(and activated) spectra window.
 By clicking "Measurement Properties" important information about the
measurement will be shown.
4.2.2 How to Enable/Disable the Tree Control

The tree control needs a lot of processor performance. Moreover, when opening
the Spectra Viewer with an activated tree control, all databases must be scanned
first. This needs a lot of time on older systems and it is possible that during a
measurement, the databases will be locked. This causes possible errors and
problems.
Note: If you are using an older PC system or if you want to use the spectra
viewer during measurements, please disable the tree control.
The tree control can be enabled or disabled by using the Tree Control menu point
in the View Menu.
4.3 The Selection Table

Use the selection table to decide which spectra in which order will be shown in the
selected spectra window. You can open the selection table by using the menu
point Selection Table in the Spectrum menu. Moreover, you can use the shortcut
"Ctrl+T" or the symbol in the toolbar.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 48 of 397
X-LabPro 5
4.3.1 Selecting Spectra

Use the command buttons to select spectra. Activate the referring cell in the
Sample Name column before.
Paste Command Button
If you have copied sample(s) into the clipboard e.g. from the method window, use
this command button to paste it into the selection table.
Sample Command Button
Click this command button to open a dialog for selecting a sample from a method
or from a job.
Remove Command Button
Click this command button to delete a selected sample from the selection table.
Import Command Button
You can import samples from files by clicking on this command button..
Export Command Button
If a measurement is selected in the columns 1-6, you can export the sample data
into a file.
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,- Command Buttons
Use this command buttons to define the order of the spectra.
OK Command Button
Click on this command button to close the dialog box and store any changes.
Cancel Command Button
Click on this command button to close the dialog box. Changes to the settings are
not stored.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 49 of 397
X-LabPro 5
4.4 Menu Commands
4.4.1 Spectra Viewer Menu Overview

Menu overview
 File Menu
 View Menu
 Spectrum Menu
 MCA Menu
 Tools Menu
 Window Menu
 Help Menu
 System Menu

 New
Creates a new spectra window.
 Open
Use the open command to load an existing spectra window. This command
will open a standard Windows File Dialog to select the spectra window.
Shortcuts:
Toolbar:
Keyboard: CTRL+O
 Close
Use the close command to close the selected spectra window. You will be
promted to save the spectra data if the data contains any new information.
 Save
Use this command to save the active spectra window to its current name and
directory. If you want to change the name and directory of an existing spectra
window before you save it, use the Save As command.
Shortcuts:
Toolbar:
Keyboard: CTRL+S
 Save as
Use this command to save and name the active spectra. The Spectra Viewer
displays the Save As dialog box so you can name your spectra.
To save a spectra with its existing name and directory, use the Save command.
 Print
Use this command to print the aktice spectra window.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 50 of 397
X-LabPro 5
 Exit
Use this command to end the Spectra Viewer session. You can also use the
Close command on the Application Control Menu. The Spectra Viewer
prompts you to save documents with unsaved changes.
Shortcuts:
Mouse: Double click the application's Control menu Icon.
Keys: ALT+F4

 Toolbar
Use this command to display and hide the Toolbar, which includes buttons for
some of the most common commands in the Spectra Viewer, such as File
Open. A check mark appears next to the menu item when the toolbar is
displayed.
 Statusbar
Use this command to display and hide the Status Bar, which describes the
the Status Bar is displayed.
 ToolBox
Use this command to display or hide the tool window.
 Tree Control
Use this command to display and hide the tree control. The tree control
displays the methods or jobs.
 Update Tree
have been made from X-LabPro. Use F5 as shortcut for this command.
 Rebuild Tree
Use this command to rebuild the tree control completely from your X-LabPro
database.
4.4.4 Commands in the Spectra Menu

The Spectra menu contents the following commands:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 51 of 397
X-LabPro 5
 Selection Table
Select this menupoint to display the Selection Table Dialog Box.
 Rotate
Select this menupoint to rotate the order of the spectra in the selected spectra
window.

This menu is used to manipulate the displayed foreground spectrum and second
spectrum. The abbreviation "MCA" stands for Multi Channel Analyzer. The
menupoints in the menu are similar to the functions of an MCA. The menu is
shown only in the Spectra window. The following menupoints are available:
 Normalize to 2nd Spectrum
Select this menupoint to adjust the foreground spectrum to the second
spectrum within a defined region (ROI). An adjustment factor is determined in
the selected region using the least squares method. The channel contents in
the foreground spectrum are then multiplied by this factor.
The spectrum window will automatically switch to the ROI marking mode.
Click the left mouse button in the spectral representation to select a ROI. The
adjustment is automatically performed and the display is updated.
 Normalite All to Foreground
Select this menupoint to adjust the background spectra to the foreground
spectrum within a defined region (ROI). An adjustment factor is determined in
the selected region using the least squares method. The channel contents in
the are then multiplied by this factor.
 Copy to Foreground
Select this menupoint to copy a selected region of the second spectrum into
the foreground spectrum.
selected region of the second spectrum is automatically copied into the
foreground spectrum and the display is updated.
 Multiplicate 1st Spectrum...
Select this menupoint to multiplicate the foreground spectrum with a factor. A
dialog will be opened to edit the factor.
 Add 2nd Spectrum
Select this menupoint to add a selected region of the second spectrum from
selected region of the second spectrum is automatically subtracted from the
 Subtract 2nd Spectrum
Select this menupoint to subtract a selected region of the second spectrum
from the foreground spectrum.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 52 of 397
X-LabPro 5
selected region of the second spectrum is automatically subtracted from the
 Edit Channel Contents
Select this menupoint to open the Edit Channel Contents dialog box. The
impulse number can be manually edited for each channel in this dialog box.
The display of the foreground spectrum is automatically updated.
 Smooth Spectrum
Select this menupoint to smooth the foreground spectrum using a three point
formula. The smoothened spectrum is automatically displayed as the
foreground spectrum.
 First Derivative
Select this menupoint to automatically calculate the first derivative of the
foreground spectrum. The derivative is automatically displayed as the new
foreground spectrum. Negative values or values smaller than 1 are displayed
only in the linear representation display format.
 Second Derivative
Select this menupoint to automatically calculate the second derivative of the
foreground spectrum. The derivative is automatically displayed as the new
foreground spectrum. Negative values or values smaller than 1 are displayed
only in the linear representation display format.
 Calculate Background
Select this menupoint to calculate a background for the foreground spectrum
in the second spectrum. The Calculate Background dialog box opens. After
the calculation, the calculated background is automatically displayed as the
second spectrum.
 Reset Foreground Spectrum
Select this menupoint to abandon any changes to the foreground spectrum.
The original data for the measurement is newly read from the measurement
databank when the spectrum is reset.
 Reset 2nd Spectrum
Select this menupoint to abandon any changes to the second spectrum. The
original data for the measurement is newly read from the measurement
databank when the spectrum is reset.
 Reset All Spectra
Select this menupoint to abandon any changes to all spectra. The original
data for the measurements is newly read from the measurement databank
when the spectrum is reset.
 Assign Background
Select this menupoint to save the current spectrum as a background
spectrum.
Note: The manipulations are always performed on the foreground spectrum, with
one exception (Calculate Background).

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 53 of 397
X-LabPro 5
4.4.6 Calculate Background Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to select the type of calculation to be used to calculate the
background. This dialog box is opened with the Calculate Background menupoint
in the MCA menu. The dialog box contains the following elements:
Background Type Group Box
Constant Background Option Button
Select this option button to calculate a constant background. The background is
calculated using the defined ROI. At least one ROI must be defined for a constant
background. The following figure shows an example of a constant background:
Linear Background Option Button

Select this option button to calculate a linear background. The background is
calculated using the defined ROI. At least two ROI must be defined for a linear
background. The following figure shows an example of a linear background:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 54 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Quadratic Background Option Button

Select this option button to calculate a quadratic background. The background is
calculated using the defined ROI. At least three ROI must be defined for a
quadratic background. The following figure shows an example of a quadratic
background:
OK Command Button
Click on this command button to close the dialog box. The background is
calculated and carried into thesecond spectrum.
Click on this command button to close the dialog box and cancel the procedure for
calculating the background.
Note:
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 55 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The calculated background is carried into the second spectrum. The calculated
background can then be subtracted from a selected region of the foreground
spectrum using the Subtract 2nd Spectrum menupoint in the MCA menu.
4.4.7 Edit Channel Contents Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to edit the impulse number for the channel at the position
of the energy cursor for the foreground spectrum in the selected spectrum window.
This dialog box is opened with the Edit Channel Contents menupoint in the MCA
menu. The dialog box contains the following elements:
Channel Display Field
The number of the channel selected in the spectrum window is displayed in this
display field.
Energy Display Field
The energy of the channel selected in the foreground spectra is displayed in this
display field.
Impulse (old) Display Field
The number of impulses for the selected channel in the foreground spectrum is
displayed in this display field.
Impulse (new) Text Box
Enter the new value for the number of impulses for the selected channel in this
text box.
 (Left Arrow) Command Button
Click on this command button to select the previous channel. Changes in the
impulse number for the currently selected channel are automatically carried into
 (Right Arrow) Command Button
Click on this command button to select the next channel. Changes in the impulse
number for the currently selected channel are automatically carried into the
foreground spectrum.
OK Command Button
Click on this command button to close the dialog box and carry the new value into
Click on this command button to close the dialog box and cancel the procedure for
editing the channel contents.
Note: Select the Reset Foreground Spectrum in the MCA menu to reset any
changes in the foreground spectrum.
4.4.8 Window Menu

This menu is used to switch between and arrange windows. The menu is
displayed in every open window. The following menupoints are available:
 Cascade
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 56 of 397
X-LabPro 5

 Tile
 Arrange Icons

 Contents
Select this menupoint to display a table of contents for the help system for the
X-LABPro program. In the help system, select the Contents command button
below the menuline to show the table of contents.
 Software
 About XLSpcView
Show the version and copyrights of the Spectra Viewer.
4.5 Other
4.5.1 Toolbar
bar. The toolbar provides quick mouse access to many functions used in the
Spectra Viewer.
To hide or display the Toolbar, choose Toolbar from the View menu (ALT, V, T).
Click To
Create a new spectra window
Open an existing spectra window. The Spectra Viewer displays the Open
dialog box, in which you can locate and open the desired file.
Save the active spectra window with its current name. If you have not
named the document, the Spectra Viewer displays the Save As dialog
box.
Display or hide the Toolbox Window

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 57 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Opens the Selection Table Dialog Box

Rotate the order of the spectra in the selected spectra window
Print the actually spectra.

Calculate the associated escape lines for the selected elements.
Calculate the associated Pile-Up lines for the selected elements.
Search for elements in the actually spectra.
Insert a text at an arbitrary position.
Delete one or all inserted text(s) from the spectral representation.
Create a bitmap/jpeg file from the current spectral representation.
Opens the Online Help.
4.5.2 Status Bar
The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Spectra Viewer. To display or hide
the status bar, use the Status Bar command in the View menu
arrow keys to navigate through menus. This area similarly shows messages that
describe the actions of toolbar buttons as you depress them, before releasing
them. If after viewing the description of the toolbar button command you wish not
to execute the command, then release the mouse button while the pointer is off
the toolbar button.
Moreover the database reading status will be shown in the statusbar by a progress
bar.
down:.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 58 of 397
X-LabPro 5
4.5.3 Titlebar
The title bar is located along the top of a window. It contains the name of the
application and the spectra window.
A title bar may contain the following elements:
Exit button.
Maximize button.
Minimize button.
Name of the application.
Name of the spectra window
Applications icon.
4.6 Tool Window
4.6.1 Toolbox
The toolbox window offers a lot of functions to view and edit spectral
representations. You can enable/disable this window by clicking the menu point
Toolbox in the View menu. It may be freely moved around on the monitor. In this
way, it is possible to move the window so that it does not interfere with your view
of the portion of the spectrum that is being examined. The Toolbox window
contains the following command buttons:
Click on this button to stretch the displayed spectrum. At least 64
channels are always displayed.
Click on this button to compress the displayed spectrum.
Click on this button to stretch the display of the spectrum along the y-
axis. The extent of the change depends on the type of display.
Click on this button to compress the spectrum along the y-axis. The
extent of the change depends on the type of display.
Click on this button to shift the displayed spectrum in small steps to the
left.
Click on this button to shift the displayed spectrum in small steps to the
right.
Click on this button to shift the displayed spectrum in small steps
upwards.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 59 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Click on this button to shift the displayed spectrum in small steps

downwards.
Click on this button to shift the displayed spectrum in large steps to the
left.
Click on this button to shift the displayed spectrum in large steps to the
right.
Click on this button to shift the displayed spectrum in large steps
upwards.
Click on this button to shift the displayed spectrum in large steps
downwards.
Click on this button to move the Energy cursor one channel to the left. If
the Energy cursor is not active, it is automatically activated by clicking
on this command button.
Click on this button to move the Energy cursor one channel to the right.
If the Energy cursor is not active, it is automatically activated by clicking
on this command button.
Click on this button to switch to the channel representation.
Click on this button to switch to the energy representation.
Click on this cursor to move the Z-cursor to the element with the next,
higher atomic number. If the Z-cursor is not active, it is automatically
activated by clicking on this command button.
Click on this cursor to move the Z-cursor to the element with the next,
lower atomic number. If the Z-cursor is not active, it is automatically
activated by clicking on this command button.
Click on this cursor to move the Z-cursor to the next, higher shell; the
element with the nearest energy is chosen. If the Z-cursor is not active,
it is automatically activated by clicking on this command button.
Click on this cursor to move the Z-cursor to the next, lower shell; the
element with the nearest energy is chosen. If the Z-cursor is not active,
it is automatically activated by clicking on this command button.
Click on this button to display or hide the background grid.
Click on this button to turn display of the selected ROI on or off. Display
of the ROI is automatically enabled after a ROI is defined.
Click on this button to turn display of the selected line markers on or off.
Display is automatically activated when line markers are selected.
Click on this button to open the Select Elements dialog box in order to
select the line markers to be displayed
Click on this button to open the Select Lines dialog box in order to
select the line markers to be displayed.
Click on this button to delete the ROI at the current Energy cursor
position.
Click on this button to delete all of the ROI in the displayed spectrum.
Click on this button to view data for the ROI data of the displayed
spectra.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 60 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Click on this button to search for the lines at the current Energy cursor
position.
Click on this button to activate the logarithmic representation of the
spectrum.
Click on this button to activate the square root representation of the
spectrum.
Click on this button to activate the linear representation of the
spectrum.
Click on this button to reset the display of the spectrum to its original
values.
Click on this button to switch to the magnify mode. You can choose an
area to zoom in by using your mouse.
Click on this button if you want to switch the spectral representation to
display one channel on one pixel.
Click on this button to enable the ROI marking mode. Display of the ROI
is automatically enabled after a ROI is defined.
The cursor keys may also be used to move the Energy cursor.
4.6.2 Select Lines Dialog Box

You can use this dialog box to manage all displayed lines of your spectra window.
You can choose lines from a list of all available lines or from a list of filtered lines:
Available Lines List Box
Shows all available Lines or lines filtered by element and/or by energy. Use the
checkboxes "Filter By Element" and "Filter By Energy" to use the filter options.
Filter By Element Check Box
Enables a filter for displaying only lines belonging to the selected elemnt. You can
enter an element atomic number or select an element from the periodic table.
Filter By Energy Check Box
Enables a filter for displaying only lines in a defined area of energy. Enter your
energy limits in the text fields.
Selected Lines List Box
Shows the lines selected for being displayed in the spectra window.
Insert Command Button
Copies a selected line from the "Available Lines" list box to the "Selected Lines"
list box.
Deletes the selected line in the "Selected Lines" list box.
Remove all Command Button
Deletes all lines in the "Selected Lines" list box.
Show Line Marker Text Check Box
Enables/disables the display of the line name for the selected line.
Show Element Symbol Only Check Box
Switch the announcement of the line designation in the spectrum representation
on or off.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 61 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Show Escape Lines Check Box

Switch the announcement of the Escape Lines in the spectrum representation on
or off.
Show Pile-Up Lines Only Check Box
Switch the announcement of the Pile-Lines in the spectrum representation on or
off.
OK Command Button
not stored.
5 Method Administration
The Method Administration is used to do all settings for the methods in the X-
LabPro software. Create, edit or delete methods or the assigned standard samples
here. You get information about the methods in general and about their standard
samples or measurements. Settings for deconvolution or calibration may also be
done.. The Method Administration offers two possiblities to navigate through and
use the application:
 The Tree Control
 The Method Window
If at least one method is opened, the following menus are enabled:
 File Menu
 Edit Menu
 View Menu
 Method Menu
 Tools Menu
 Window Menu
 X-LabPro Menu
 Help Menu
5.1 The Method Window

In the right area of the Method Administration the Method Window is displayed.
Here you get some different property pages which guide you to get information
and do settings dependant on the opened method. Click on the title of a property
page to open it.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 62 of 397
X-LabPro 5
 General: This page includes general information about the opened method
like global settings, dilution, normalization and additional settings. Moreover,
you can finalize the method here.
 Elements: You may choose the elements you want to analyse and do the
settings on this page.
 Standards: Get a table of the assigned standard samples of the opened
method and information about these standard samples.You may also create,
edit or delete standards here.
 Measurement: On this page you get information or do settings for the number
and type of measurements.
 Deconvolution: This page offers you the possibility to do settings for the
deconvolution. Calibration: Do the settings for the calibration on this page.
 Output: Do the settings for the printer output on this page.
If you select another page of the Method Window by clicking the title of this page
and if you have changed values or parameters, you will be prompted to confirm
the changes. In this case the changes will be written to the database immediately.
See also:
Method Administration
Method Administration ( Tree Control )
5.2 The Tree Control

In the left area of the Method Administration the tree control is displayed. Here you
find all methods ordered by their sample types. Click on the small cross next to an
icon to open a sample type folder and get a list of the methods. The small blue
number behind the description of a folder shows the number of methods the folder
is containing. A padlock behind the name of a method indicates that the method is
finalized. Double click on a method to open it in the Method Window. You may
also use the context menu to open a method: Right click on a method and select
OPEN.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 63 of 397
X-LabPro 5
You may sort the different methods in a hierachy by using the option Subclass
Methods of the File Menu. While selected, this option offers you to drag a method
with a left mouse click and drop it as a child in the tree.
See also:
Method Window
5.3 General Page

The General Page of the Method Window is used to set the parameters for the
method, dilution material and normalization in different group boxes. You may also
finalize the method currently selected or do an automatic recalibration.
Global Settings Group Box
The global method settings are displayed and can be changed with the dialog
elements in this group box. The individual elements have the following meanings:
Method Name Text Box
The name of the currently selected method is displayed and can be changed in
this text box.
Created by Text Box
The name of the user who created the method is displayed and can be changed in
this text box.
Sample Type Drop-down List Box
The sample type for which the method was defined is displayed and can be
changed in this drop-down list box.
Sample State Drop-down List Box
The sample state to which the method is assigned is displayed and can be
changed in this drop-down list box. The parameters depand on the pre-defined
sample state. To define/edit sample types/states use the configuration editor.
Description Text Box
A short description of the method is displayed and can be changed in this text box.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 64 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Matrix for Calib. Text Field

The chosen matrix for calibration is displayed in this text field.
Select Button
Click on this button to select a matrix for calibration. The matrices can be defined
in the configuration editor.
Edit Button
Click on this button to create or edit a matrix for calibration
Mathematics Drop-down List Box
The mathematical method for the calculation is displayed and can be changed in
this drop-down list box.
Option Drop-down List Box
Use this drop-down to select what kind of method you want to create (e.g.
recalibration).
Use external concentration as Drop-down List Box
The meaning of the external concentration is displayed and can be changed in this
drop-down list box.
Dilution Group Box
The information about the used dilution is displayed and can be changed with the
dialog elements in this group box. The individual elements depend on the selected
sample state and can be pre-defined in the configuration editor.
Dilution Material Drop-down List Box
The dilution material of the currently selected method is displayed and can be
changed in this drop-down list box.
Sample Mass Text Box
The sample mass ( in g ) of the currently selected method is displayed and can be
changed in this text box.
Dilution Mass Text Box
The dilution mass ( in g ) of the currently selected method is assigned is displayed
and can be changed in this text box.
Sum/Factor Display Fields
The sum of the sample mass and the dilution mass and the part of the sample
mass of the sum of both is displayed in this display field.
Additional Settings Group Box
The additional method settings are displayed and can be changed with the dialog
Sample Diameter Text Box
The sample diameter (in mm) is displayed and can be changed in this text box.
The default diameter depends on the selected sample state and can be pre-
defined in the configuration editor.
Cuvette Foil Drop-down List Box
The type of the cuvette foil of the method is displayed in this drop-down list box.
Protection Foil Drop-down List Box
The type of the protection foil of the method is displayed in this drop-down list box.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 65 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Note: The foils can be defined in the configuration editor.

Dust Protection Foil / Liquid Protection Cup Radio Button
Select with this radio button the usage of the protection foil. If you select Dust
Protection Foil the Routine Dialog will ask for inserting the foil.
Standard for Comparison Display Field
The standard for comparison of the method is displayed in this display field. To
select or change the standard click on the button at right. You will be prompted to
choose a standard. Click on the cross to delete the selection.
Normalization Group Box
The settings of the normalization are displayed and can be changed with the
dialog elements in this group box. Choose the type of the normalization between
the following dialog elements:
No Normalization
Select this option if you don´t want to normalize. See: Normalization.
Use MSK Calibration
Select this option to normalize via MSK Calibration.
Normalize Results
Select this option to normalize the results. You are asked to enter the
normalization concentration by one value or a bandwith.
Difference Element
Select this check box to enter an element which influences the sample but which
isn´t measurable. This can be used to tell the mathematical procedure, what's the
"non-visible" part of the sample. You may enter the number of the element in the
text box below or left click on the button PTE to get the periodic table of elements
where you can choose one element.
Finalize Button
To finalize your method click this button. Note: A finalized method cannot be
modified further.
See also:
Method Window
5.4 Element Page

You may choose the elements you want to analyse and do the settings on this
page of the Method Window. This page offers the following dialog elements:
Coherent Back Scatter Correction Text Box
The intensity correction factor for the coherent back scatter correction is displayed
and can be changed in this text box.
Incoherent Back Scatter Correction Text Box
The intensity correction factor for the incoherent back scatter correction is
displayed and can be changed in this text box.
Typical Standard Display Field
The typical standard sample for this method is displayed in this display field. To
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 66 of 397
X-LabPro 5
select or change the standard sample click on the button at right. You will be
prompted to choose a standard sample. Click on the cross to delete the selection.
Elements Button
Click on this button to select the elements you want to analyse. The Select
Elements dialog box will be opened and shows a periodic table of elements. Here
you may select the desired elements. All of the elements that are to be expected
for the samples to be measured should be selected.
Display Matrix Check Box
Activate this check box to enable the matrix presentation of the selected elements
and the displayed values.
Elements Table
In the table below the selected elements are listed. Do the settings for the different
elements here. The table contains the following columns:
N Column
The atomic number of the element is displayed in this column.
Sym. Column
The element symbol (or its chemical bond) of the element is displayed in this
column.
Name Column
The name of the element is displayed in this column.
Analysis Elem Column
Select this option to include the element to the analysis. A check mark appears if
the option is selected.
LOD [µg/g] Column
This column shows the value for the Limit of Detection of the element. You may
enter a new value. Valid entries lie in the range between 0 and 10000 µg/g.
Conc. Range Min [µg/g] and Conc. Range Max [µg/g] Columns
It is possible to calculate up to three calibrations for different concentration ranges.
Control of selection of the range is conducted using the min and max
concentration limit for the respective calibration. Enter the desired range in this two
columns. If only one calibration is to be calculated, then select the concentration
limits for this range so that all possible cases fall within one range.
Conc. Limit [µg/g] Column
Enter the concentration limit for consideration of the lower shell for the selected
element in this column.
See also:
Method Window

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 67 of 397
X-LabPro 5
5.5 Standard Page

On this page of the Method Window all standard samples assigned to the opened
method are listed in a table. You may edit the standard samples by using the
menu points in the Edit Menu, the buttons of the toolbar or the menu points of the
context menu. The context menu will be opened by right clicking on a standard
sample, it contains the same menu points as the Edit Menu.. Please see Edit
Menu for additional information.
Standards Table
In the table below the standard samples are listed. The table contains the following
columns:
Name Column
The name of the standard sample is displayed in this column.
Description Column
The description of the standard sample is displayed in this column.
Status Column
The measurement status of the standard sample is displayed in this column.
Creation Date Column
The creation date of the standard sample is displayed in this column.
Evaluation Date Column
The evaluation date of the standard sample is displayed in this column.
Dilution Column
If the standard sample is using a dilution, a check mark appears in this column.
Backg. Column
If the standard sample is a background sample, a check mark appears in this
column.
See also:
Method Window
Method Administraiton (Edit Menu)

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 68 of 397
X-LabPro 5
5.5.1 The Enter/Edit Sample Data Dialog
This dialog box is used to enter and edit data for a sample or a standard sample.
The dialog box contains the following elements:
General Information Group Box
Sample Name Text Box
Enter the sample name (up to 250 characters) in this text box.
Comment Text Box
Enter an additional description (up to 20 characters) for the sample here. This text
box does not have to be filled in.
Method Drop-Down List Box
The name of the method to which the sample is assigned is displayed in this
display field. When editing a sample (not standard) you can select a method here.
Job Drop-Down List Box
The sample can be assigned to a job in this list box. This command is not active
for the definition of a standard sample, because standard samples are always
assigned to a single method. If the dialog box is opened from the Job Manager,
then the name of the currently selected job is automatically entered.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 69 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Control Sample Display Field and Buttons

The name of the sample for comparison (control sample) is displayed in this
display field. Use the button to select a control sample spectrum. Use the
button to remove your selection and reset the display field to "None". The
spectrum of the control sample is shown as the second spectrum in the Routine
Dialog (Measured Spectrum) during the measurement.
Optional Entries Group Box
Measurement Status 1 bis 6 Display Fields
The measurement status of the sample is shown in these fields.
Sample State Drop-Down List Box
Select the desired sample state in this drop-down list box. The possible sample
states can be changed in the Sample Settings dialog box.
Dilution Material Drop-Down List Box
Select the name of the desired dilution material in this drop-down list box. The
possible dilution materials must be defined in the selected method as standard
samples that are marked as dilution materials. If no dilution materials have been
defined, the text "none" is displayed.
Sample Mass Text Box/Display Field
Enter the sample mass (in g) in this text box. Whether this field or the three
following fields are active or not, depends on the settings in the Sample Settings
dialog box. It is possible to choose between two variations: The entry of sample
and dilution mass or the entry of total mass and dilution factor. For each option,
the other quantities are automatically calculated.
Dilution Mass Text Box/Display Field
Enter the dilution mass (in g) in this text box (see "Sample Mass Text Box/Display
Field" for additional information).
Sum of Masses Text Box/Display Field
Enter the sum of the masses for the sample (in g) in this text box (see "Sample
Mass Text Box/Display Field" for additional information).
Dilution Factor Text Box/Display Field
Enter the dilution factor in this text box (see "Sample Mass Text Box/Display Field"
for additional information).
Diameter Text Box
Enter the sample diameter (in mm) in this text box.
Given Loss Of Ignition Text Box
Enter the given value for the loss of ignition (in percent) in this text box. If you do
not want to set a value for the loss of ignition, enter "-1" or simply a dash. The loss
of ignition is interpreted to be 0% if a zero is entered.
Date of Receipt Text Box
Enter the date of receipt for the sample into your laboratory in this text box. The
date is printed with the printout of the results. When a new sample is entered, this
field is automatically filled with the current date.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 70 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Ext. Conc.
Click on this command button open the Edit External Concentrations for Sample
Dialog Box.
OK Command Button
Click on this command button to close the dialog box and save the modified or
newly entered sample.
Click on this command button to close the dialog box. New samples or changes to
an existing
See also:
Edit Menu (Job Manager)
Edit Menu (Method Development)
5.5.2 Given Concentrations Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to enter and edit the given (e.g. certified) concentration for
a standard sample. This dialog box is opened with menu point Given
Concentrations of the Edit Menu (Method Administration) or via the context menu
of the Standards Page (Method Window). The dialog box contains the following
elements:
Sample Name Display Field
The name of the selected standard sample is displayed in this display field.
Comment Display Field
The comment of the selected standard sample is displayed in this text box.
Sample State Display Field
The state of the selected standard sample is displayed in this display field. The
possible sample states can be changed in the Sample Settings dialog box.
Dilution Material Display Field
The name of the assigned dilution material is displayed in this display field.
Sample Status Display Field
The measurement status is displayed in this field.
Sample Mass Display Field
The sample mass is displayed in g in this display field.
Dilution Mass Display Field
The dilution mass is displayed in g in this display field.
Dilution Factor Display Field
The dilution factor calculated from the sample and dilution masses is displayed in
this display field.
Sample Specification Group Box
Average Atomic Number Calibration Check Box
Mark this check box if the selected standard sample is to be used for the Average
Atomic Number Calibration.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 71 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Mass Attenuation Coefficient Calibration Check Box

Mark this check box if the selected standard sample is be used for the Mass
Attenuation Coefficients Calibration.
Layer thickness standard Check Box
Mark this check box if you want to use a layer thickness calibration. Note that the
following elements will be enabled and overwrite other ones.
Substrat Display Field
The name of the assigned substrat is displayed in this display field. This display
field overwrites the Dilution Material Display Field of the General Information
Group Box.
Density Display Field
The density of the standard sample is displayed in this display field. This display
field overwrites the Sample Mass Display Field of the General Information Group
Box. Further the Dilution Mass and Dilution Factor Display Fields are disabled.
Substrat Check Box
Mark this check box if the selected standard sample is to be used as a substrat.
This Check Box overwrites the Dilution Material Check Box of the Sample
Specification Group Box.
Layer Thickness [nm] Text Box
Enter the layer thickness in this text box. This text box is added to the Settings for
given conc. Group Box.
Standard Type Drop-Down List Box
Select in this Drop-Down List Box the sample type if the selected standard sample
is to be used as one of the following sample types:
Dilution Material (D)
Validation Sample (V)
Method Recal Sample (M)
Intercept Recal Sample (I)
Settings for given conc. Group Box
Bonds Check Box
Mark this check box if you want to enter the concentrations as bond
concentrations. The bonds are set in the Edit Chemical Bonds dialog box . When
entered, the concentrations for the bonded elements are automatically,
proportionally entered.
Output Ele. Only Check Box
Mark this check box if you want to display only the output elements. Note: The
elements H, C, N and O are always shown.
Typical Unit Drop-Down List Box
Select the typical mass unit for entry of the given values for the standard sample.
Sum of Conc. Display Field
The sum of the entered given concentrations is displayed in % in this display field.
Concentration Values Group Box
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 72 of 397
X-LabPro 5
In the Concentration Values Group Box you find a table with the following
columns:
Z Column
The atomic number of the selected element is displayed in this column. Row 0
includes the LOI (loss of ignition).
Symbol Column
The element symbols of the selected element is displayed in this column.
Element Column
The element names of the selected element is displayed in this column.
Conc. Column
Enter the given concentrations of the selected element in this column.
Error Column
Enter the absolute errors of the given concentrations of the selected element in
this column.
Level Column
Select certification level for the selected element for the standard sample in this
drop-down list box.
Emp. 1, 2, 3, Fund. 1, 2 and Std. Columns
Select this options by a left mouse click if the standard sample should be used for
the calibration (Compton/empirical calibration, fundamental parameter calibration
and recalibration) for the various evaluation methods for the selected element. A
check mark appears in the field if the option is enabled.
Std. Lib. Command Button (Save)
Click on this command button to store the data for the standard sample in the
library of standards.
Std. Lib. Command Button (Load
Click on this command button to load the data of a standard sample in the library
of standards.
Reset Command Button
Click on this command button to reset the settings for the selected standard
sample to the default values stored in the library of standards . The name of the
standard sample must be the same as the name of an entry in the library of
standards . If this is not the case, all of the concentrations are set to zero. A
message to this effect is displayed.
OK Command Button
Click on this command button to close the dialog and store the settings that have
changed.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 73 of 397
X-LabPro 5

Click on this command button to close the dialog without storing changes to the
settings.
5.6 Measurement Page

On this page of the Method Window you can edit the settings for the
measurements of the standard samples of the selected method. The page
contains the following elements:
General Settings Group Box
Do the general settings for the measurements in this group box. The different
elements have the following meanings:
Measurements 1-8 Check Boxes
Here you can select how many and which measurements should be assigned to a
standard sample of the selected method. A check mark appears if the check box is
selected.
Measurement Type Drop-down List Box
Select the measurement type of the standard samples in this Drop-down List Box.
Sample Rotation Check Box
If this check box is enabled the sample will be rotate during a measurement
Quick Start Check Box
If the Quick Start feature is enabled, gas flush or vacuum pumping will be done
during the first measurement. When disabled, it will be done before the first
measurement.
Measurements Pages
For each measurement selected in the General Settings Group Box you may do
individual settings. Left click on the title of the measurement´s page you want to
edit. The measurement pages offer you the following group boxes.
Detection System Group Box
Do the settings for the Detection System in this group box. The group box contains
the following elements:
Channels Drop-down List Box
Select the number of channels for the measurement in this drop-down list box.
Valid entries are 1024, 2048 and 4096.
Peak Time [µs] Drop-down List Box
Select the peak time that is to be used for the selected measurement in this drop-
down list box.
Zero Peak Rate [cps] Drop-down List Box
Select the zero peak rate that is to be used for the selected measurement in this
drop-down list box.
Energy Range[keV] Drop-down List Box
Select the energy range that is to be used for the selected measurement in this
drop-down list box.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 74 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Target Drop-down List Box

Select the target to be used for the selected measurement in this drop-down list
box.
Generator Control Group Box
Do the settings for the Generator Control in this group box. The group box
Voltage Group Box
Use the slider to set the tube voltage for the selected measurement. The values
that can be currently set, depending on the tube characteristic line, are displayed
at the end of the scroll bar. Valid entries lie in the range between 8 kV and a value
that can be set in the Instrument Control Settings dialog box.
The currently set tube voltage is displayed in kV in the text box. A new value for
the voltage can also be entered in this field. If the value "zero" is entered for the
voltage and for the current, the measurements are conducted with out high
voltage. This can be useful for tests or for measurements with a nuclide source.
Current Group Box
Use the slider to set the tube current for the selected measurement. The values
that can be currently set, depending on the tube characteristic line, are displayed
at the end of the scroll bar. Valid entries lie in the range between 8 and 80 mA.
The currently set tube current is displayed in mA in the text box. If the value "zero"
is entered for the voltage and for the current, the measurements are conducted
with out high voltage. This can be useful for tests or for measurements with a
nuclide source.
Mark the Current Regulation Check Box to set automatically the current of the
measurement by evaluating the best value.
Measurement Time Limit Check and Group Box
Mark this field and group to end the selected measurement after a given maximum
time has elapsed. Measurement limited by time can be combined with
measurement by impulse number; the measurement is ended as soon os one of
the conditions has been met. You are asked to do some further settings:
Measurement Time Text Box
Enter the default time for the maximum measurement time in this text box when
the measurement is to be limited by time. Valid entries lie in the range between 0
and 200000 s.
Measurement Pulse Limit Check and Group Box
Mark this field and group to end the selected measurement after a given maximum
impulse number has been reached in the given window (between first and last
channel). You are asked to do some further settings:
No. of Impulses Text Box
Enter the maximum impulse number in this text box when the measurement is to
be limited by impulse number. The measurement is ended when the sum of the
impulses in the given window reach this number.
First Channel Text Box
When the measurement is to be limited by impulse number, enter the first channel

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 75 of 397
X-LabPro 5
for the window in which the impulses are to be summed in this text box. Valid
entries lie in the range between 1 and 1024 and must be smaller than or equal to
the entry for the last channel.
Last Channel Text Box
When the measurement is to be limited by impulse number, enter the last channel
for the window in which the impulses are to be summed in this text box. Valid
entries lie in the range between 1 and 1024 and must be larger than or equal to
the entry for the first channel.
See also:
Method Window
5.7 Deconvolution Page

Use this page of the Method Window to do the settings for the deconvolution. This
page contains the following three property pages:
Number of background spectra Drop-Down List Box
Set the number of background spectra used in this drop-down list box. Since
Version 3.0 the background spectra are stored in samples named Background_xx.
The switchover between regions is set for each sample by the scattering ratio. The
default for the number of background spectra is 3 (for light, medium and heavy
sample matrices). A maximum of 6 different background spectra can be used. To
use more than one background it is necessary that a Compton target is used for
the first measurement and the selected mathematics is Ext. Compton, Spectro or
Compton/Rayleigh.
Edit Limits Command Button
Click on this command button to open the Limits for Background Spectra
Switchovers dialog box in order to change the scattering ratio for the switch
between the various background spectra.
Property Pages
Further you get some property pages: The general page and one page for each
measurement.
General Property Page
This page shows a table with all elements selected on the Elements Page. It gives
an overview about the settings on the n Measurement tables. For example a 2,3 in
the Intensity column of the row of element 11 means that for the measurements
number 2 and 3 the option Intensity of the element number 11 is selected. You
cannot edit the table on this page, it is created to give you an overview. The table
contains the following columns:
N Column
Sym. Column
The element symbol of the element is displayed in this column.
Name Column
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 76 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Intensity Column
This column shows for which measurement and element the Intensity option is
selected.Click on this command button to open the Select Elements dialog box.
This dialog box is used to select the elements for which intensities are to be
determined for the selected measurement. Individual elements can be selected for
multiple measurements. Only elements that have been previously defined for the
respective measurement as deconvolution elements can be selected.
Concentration Column
This column shows for which measurement and element the Concentration option
is selected.
Measurement n Property Page
On this page you may do the individual settings for each measurement. The page
Element Table
This table shows all intensity elements assigned to the measurement n. You may
change the selection by clicking the Elements Button. The table contains the
following rows:
N Column
Sym. Column
The element symbol of the element is displayed in this column.
Name Column
Conc Column
Click on the check point in this column to select an element which concentrations
are to be determined for the selected measurement. Each element can be
selected for only one measurement. A number behind a check point indicates that
the choosen element is already selected by the measuremment with the
corresponding number.
Line Column
In this column you select the line to be used for the deconvolution in the drop-
down list box. The type of line that should be selected depends on the type of
excitation and the selected element. The following line types are available:
K-Alpha
K-Beta
L-Alpha
L-Beta
M-Alpha
M-Xi
Deconvolution Column
In this column you select the deconvolution strategy to be used for the
deconvolution in the drop-down list box. The following deconvolution strategies are
available:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 77 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Summation
The channel contents in the given deconvolution region are summed with this
method. The K-alpha line should be used for elements with an atomic number
> 21; the L-alpha line for elements with atomic numbers > 56. The lines are not
subtracted from the spectrum. This strategy should only be used when no peak
overlaps are expected.
Series Fit
This method is used when other methods cannot be used.
Line Fit
If the K-alpha or an L-alpha line (for elements with N > 56) is without overlaps, but
the secondary lines are overlapped with K-alpha or L-alpha lines from other
elements, then this overlap can be removed by determining the height of the lines
that are not overlapped using a model adjustment. The heights of the secondary
lines are calculated from the model spectrum and subtracted from the measured
spectrum. The energetically next highest main line remains, without overlaps, in
the spectrum. Main lines with more than 500 impulses are additionally used to
standardize the energy-channel relationship with this method.
Example:
Evaluation of a Cr-Mn-Fe-Spektrum. The Mn K-alpha line is overlapped by the Cr
K-beta line. The Fe K-alpha line is overlapped by the Mn K-beta line. Beginning
with Cr, all of the elements can be processed with this method.
Line Fit with Standard
This method is similar to the line fit method, however, main lines with more than
3000 impulses are used for a width-energy relationship standardization in addition
to an energy-channel relationship standardization.
Elements Button
Click on this command button to open the Select Elements dialog box. Select the
elements to be considered with the selected measurement in this dialog box.
These elements are selected as deconvolution elements for this individual
measurement. All of the elements that are to be expected for the samples to be
measured should be selected.
Deconvolution Region Button
Click on this command button to open the Select Deconvolution Regions dialog
box. The deconvolution regions for the respective measurement can be set in this
dialog box.
Background Region Button
Click on this command button to open the Select Background Regions dialog box.
The background regions for the respective measurement can be set in this dialog
box.
Normalization Region Button
Click on this command button to open the Select Normalization Regions dialog
box. The normalization regions for the respective measurement can be set in this
dialog box.
Iron Cobalt Corr. Check and Text Box
Mark this check box to activate the optional iron-cobalt correction. This is

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 78 of 397
X-LabPro 5
necessary when there is a high iron concentration and iron and cobalt are to be
deconvoluted in the same measurement. Enter the correction factor for the iron-
cobalt correction in the enabled text box.
Target Name Display Field
The name of the target selected for the measurement is displayed in this display
field.
Use Optimization Check Box
Mark this check box to enable the deconvolution optimization during the sample
evaluation.
Voltage Display Field
The voltage selected for the measurement is displayed in this display field.
Deconvolution cycles Text Box
In this text box you determine how often the deconvolution will be repeated.
See also:
Method Window
5.7.1 Limits for Background Spectra Switchovers Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to set the limits for the switchovers for the various possible
background spektra. The dialog box is opened with the Edit Limits command
button on the Deconvolution Page of the Method Window of the Method
Administration. The dialog box contains the following elements:
Scattering ratio for switchover to spectrum nText Boxes
Enter the the scattering ratio for which the nth background spectrum should be
used in the respctive text boxes. The switchover occurs from large to small values.
For 3 background spectra, the default entry is, for example, 4.1 for spectrum 2 and
1.5 for spectrum 3. In this way, samples with a scattering ration larger than 4.1 are
evaluated with the first background spectrum; samples with a scattering ratio
between 4.1 and 1.5 with the second background spectrum; and samples with
smaller scattering ratios with the third background spectrum.
OK Command Button
not stored.
5.8 Calibration Page

Use this page of the Method Window to do the settings of the calibration
parameters. The page contains the three following property pages:
The method administration offers the following calibration models:
 Mass Attenuation Coefficient
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 79 of 397
X-LabPro 5
 Extended Compton
 Fundamental Parameter Model
 Lucas Tooth/Price
 Spectro
 Compton/Rayleigh
 Layers
You will see different dialog elements depending on the selected calibration
model:
Standards Property Page
The Standards Property Page shows a table which contains the folloing columns:
N Column
The number in this column shows how often a standard sample was used for the
calibration. An empty field means that the standard sample was not used. You
may enter numbers between 1 and 5 to weigh the different standard samples.
Standard Column
The name of an assigned standard sample is displayed in this column.
Intensity Column
The value of the intensity determined from the measurement is displayed in this
column.
Given Column
The value of the given concentration/MAC is displayed in this column.
Calculated Column
The value of the calculated concentration/MAC is displayed in this column.
Difference Column
The value of the calculated difference (calculated - given) is displayed in this
column.
Parameters Property Page
This page displays a table with the assigned parameters. It contains the following
columns:
No. Column
The number of the parameter is displayed in this column.
Parameter Column
The name of the parameter is displayed in this column.
Value Column
The value of the parameter is displayed in this column.
Calibration Diagram Property Page
On this page you get two diagrams with the following meanings:
Upper Diagram
This diagram displays the calibration line and can be used to check the calibration.
Use the Context Menu to switch between different display formats. You get access
to this menu by clicking the right mouse button on the diagram.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 80 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Lower Diagram
This diagram shows the differences between the given and the measured values.
Double click on this double line to open the
diagram in a new window. The assigned context
menu is still available. Move the mouse to this
double line without clicking to get the information
about the statistics.
The diagram on this page shows the calibration line to check the calibration. To
enlarge sections of the diagram, left click the mouse and draw a rectangle on the
desired section. The section will zoom in when you release the left mouse button.
Click the right mouse button to get access to the context menu. This menu
contains the following menu point:
Grid
Select this option to display a grid on the diagram. This may simplify an
interpretation.
Print...
Click on this command button to print the diagramm. A printer dialog will prompt
you to do further settings.
Reset
Click on this command button to reset your changes.
Enable All Command Button
Click on this command button to include all standard samples in the calibration.
Disable All Command Button
Click on this command button to remove all standard samples from the calibration.
Click on this command button to undo the last calibration calculation.
Calculate Command Button
Click on this command button to calculate the mass attenuation coefficients
calibration.
Corrections Command Button
Click on this command button to open the Correction Values dialog box. This
dialog box is used to edit element dependent corrections.
Calibration Data Group Box
The Calibration Data Group Box contains the following elements:
Element Text Box and PTE Command Button
Select the element for which the calibration is to be conducted with this
combination. Either the respective atomic number can be entered in the text box or
the Select Element dialog box can be opened with the PTE command button. The
command buttons Element Change can be used to increase or decrease in single
steps the atomic number displayed. The name of the selected element is
displayed in the display field. Only elements that have been selected as
concentration elements in the deconvolution method may be selected.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 81 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Command Buttons
Click on this command button to calibrate the next element.
Click on this command button to select the standard sample in the
diagram that has the next, lower given concentration.
Click on this command button to select the standard sample in the
diagram that has the next, higher given concentration.
Lower Conc. [µg/g]: Text Box
Enter the lower limit for the concentration range in this text box.
Upper Conc. [µg/g]: Text Box
Enter the upper limit for the concentration range in this text box.
Calibration Weight Text Box
Enter a concentration with which the concentration of the element of interest is to
be weighted before the calculation of the calibration parameters.
Color Level [%] Text Box
Enter a color level which determines the deviation of given and calculated
concentrations in %. Deviations which are bigger than the entered level will be
colored red.
Hide non-certified samples Check Box
Select this option to show only the standard samples with given concentration and
intensity values. If this option is not selected all standard samples will be
displayed.
Output Unit Check Box
Select this option to switch to a defined output unit. The default unit is ppm.
Log. Term Check Box
Mark this check box to use a logarithmic term for a Compton model during the
calibration.
Comp./Ray. Ratio as Matrix Element Check Box
Mark this check box to use the Compton/Rayleigh ratio as a matrix element.
Ratio Limit Text Box
Enter a limiting value for the Compton/Rayleigh ratio in this text box. The ratio is
used as a matrix beginning with this limiting value. This text box is only active if the
check box described above is selected.
Compton Range Measurement Drop-down List Box
The measurement number for the backscatter region for the defined normalization
region is displayed in this text box.
Compton Range Region Drop-down List Box
The region number for the backscatter region for the defined normalization region
is displayed in this text box.
Calib. incl. overlapping elements Check Box
Mark this check box to do the calibration including the overlapping elements.
These elements are selected via the Overlapping Elements Command Button.
Overlapping Elements Command Button
Click on this command button to open the Intensity Elements dialog box. All
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 82 of 397
X-LabPro 5
elements that have been defined as concentration elements at the Deconvolution

Page can be selected as intensity elements.
Calibration with Offset Check Box
Select this option to calibrate with an offset value.
Secondary excitation via matrix element Check Box
Select this option if you want to assign the secondary excitation to the calibration.
Matrix Elements Command Button
Click on this command button to open the Matrix Elements dialog box. All
elements that have been defined as concentration elements at the Deconvolution
Page can be selected as matrix elements.
K-Shell Radio Button
Select this option to switch to the K-Shell.
L-Shell Radio Button
Select this option to switch to the L-Shell.
Thick sample extrapolation Check Box
Select this option to enable the thick sample extrapolation. This is necessary if you
want to measure a sample containing "heavier" elements than Fe.
Note:
Display of the calibration line and of the normalized impulse number enable you to
check the calibration of the instrument and whether or not the concentrations of
your samples are covered by the calibration.
During creation of user-defined methods, the diagrams allow you to check your
standard samples and the quality of the calibration.
5.9 Output Page

The Output Page of the Method Window is used to do settings for the printer
output. It contains the following elements.
General Group Box
The general output settings are displayed and can be changed with the dialog
Drop-down List Box
Select Standard or Cement Modules depending on the selected method. When
selecting cement modules, all other dialog items except the Cement Modules
button will be disabled.
Base Matrix for Output Text Field
The selected base matrix for the output of the present method is displayed in this
text field.
Select Button
Click on this button to select a base bond class for output. A dialog will open to
choose a matrix. Bond classes can be defined in the Configuration Editor =>
Bonds.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 83 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Edit Button
Click on this button to edit the chemical bond. The Edit Chemical Bond Dialog will
open to do the settings for the output bond format.
Output Unit Button
Click on this button to edit the output unit of the elements. A dialog will prompt you.
Print Form Group Box
In this group box you may choose the output form and the output destination. The
group box contains the following elements.
Drop-down List Box
Choose the output form in this Drop-down list box. There are three possibilities.
 By Sample (Elements in rows)
With this output form, each sample is printed on a new page, and the
respective element data is printed by row in a table format. This print form
allows the most adjustment.
 By Sample (Elements in columns)
With this output form, each sample is printed on a new page, and the
respective element data is printed in columns.
 By Elements
With this output form, the printout consists of a table in which the data for all
samples is sorted according to elements. This form is practical when the
element data for a series of samples is to be compared. To print statistics, this
selection is necessary.
Print to Printer Radio Button
Choose this option to print to a printer.
Print to File Radio Button
Choose this option to print to a file.
Print to Printer and File Radio Button
Choose this option to print to a printer and to a file.
File Settings Button
Click on this button to do special settings for the printing to a file. A dialog will
prompt you to do further settings. This Button is only enabled if you select the Print
to File Radio Button or the Print to Printer and File Radio Button.
Element Options Group Box
In this group box you choose which elements will be printed and the order of the
elements.
Elements Button
Click on this button to open the Select Elements Dialog Box where you can
choose which elements will be printed.
Sort Elements Check Box
Mark this check box if the elements by the print should be sorted with the order of
elements configuration.
Order Button
Click on this button to determinate the order of elements for the printer output. The
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 84 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Determinate Order of Elements Dialog Box will prompt you to do the configuration
settings.
Intensity Options Group Box
Do the settings for the intensity options in this group box. The box contains the
following elements.
Drop-down List Box
Select an entry of the list box.
 no counts: No intensity counts will be printed.
 net counts: The total number of intensity counts will be printed.
 normalized intensity: The normalized intensity counts will be printed.
 normalized intensity (compton): The normalized intensity counts by compton
will be printed.
Show C/F for intensities
Select this option to print the "F" for fundamental calculated results.
Special Options Group Box
Do special settings in this group box. The box contains the following elements
Short Sample Header Check Box
Mark this check box if a short description of the sample (sample name,
description, measurement and evaluation date) is desired, even on the first side of
the sample report.
MAC Check Box
Select this option to print the Mass Attenuation Coefficient.
Loss of Ignition Check Box
Mark this check box if the calculated loss of ignition should also be included in the
sample report.
Sum of Concentration Check Box
Select this option to print the sum of all concentrations of the elements
Overflow Calibration Range Check Box
If the calculated concentration is greater than the highest concentration in the
calibration this will be marked by a "~" character if this check box is marked. This
Check Box is only enabled if you select "by sample (elements in rows)" in the
drop-down list box of the Print Form Group Box.
Print Statistic Check Box
Select this option to print a statistic. This check box is only enabled if you select
"by elements" in the drop-down list box of the Print Form Group Box.
Cement Modules Button
Select this option to get a special printer form created for . A dialog will prompt you
to do further settings assigned to the output.
See also:
Method Window

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 85 of 397
X-LabPro 5
5.9.1 Determinate Order of Elements Dialog

Edit the order of the elements to print in this dialog. The dialog contains the
following elements.
Selected Elements List Box
All elements which should be printed out are displayed in this list box.
Insert Button
Select one element in the Selected Elemtents List Box and click on this button to
add this element into the Order of Output List Box.
Remove Button
Select one element in the Order of Output List Box and click on this button to
remove the element of the Order of output List Box.
Delete All Button
Click on this button to remove all elements from the Order of Output List Box.
Order of Output List Box
In this list box all elements to be printed are diplayed, in order of their output.
Up Button
Select an element of the Order of Output List Box and click on this button to move
it up one step in the order of output.
Down Button
Select an element of the Order of Output List Box and click on this button to move
it down one step in the order of output.
OK Button
Click on this button to confirm your selection and close the dialog.
Cancel Button
Click on this button to close the dialog without changes. Your selection won´t be
saved.
5.9.2 Edit Chemical Bond Dialog

This dialog is used to edit the chemical bonds you want to be displayed on the
printer output. You get the following elements.
Considered Bonds Group Box
The general output settings are displayed and can be changed with the dialog
Base Element
The selected element´s number is displayed in the text box. You may click on the
PTE-button to open a periodic table of elements and choose another element to
edit. Right of this button the name of the element is displayed. Click on the buttons
right of the name of the element to step through the periodic table of elements.
Bond Notation Text Box
The bond notation is displayed in this text box. You may edit the bond notation.
Name of Bond Text Box
You may enter a name of the bond in this text box.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 86 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Conversion Factor Text Field

The conversion factor is displayed in this text field.
Bond Elements Group Box
The bond elements and the assigned stoichiometric factors are displayed and can
be edited in this group box. The individual elements have the following meanings:
Element Column
In this column the selected element is displayed. Further the assigned bonds are
displayed. You may edit a bond by clicking on the PTE-button which opens the
periodic table of elements.
Stoichiometric Factor Column
The stoichiometric factor of the elements in the left column are displayed in this
column.
OK Button
Click on this button to close the dialog and confirm the changes. The changes will
be stored in the database.
Cancel Button
Click on this button to close the dialog without saving the changes.
5.10 Library of Standards Dialog Box
5.10.1 Select Standard Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to select a standard from the library of standards. This
dialog box can be opened by using the Library Of Standards menu point in the
Tools Menu of the Method Administration. The dialog box contains the following
elements:
Standard Name and Description Column
The names and short descriptions of the standard samples stored in the library of
standards are displayed in these columns
Dilution Column
A mark displays the use of a dilution in a standard sample.
New Command Button
Click on this command button to open the Library of Standards: Edit Standard
Data dialog box in order to enter the data for a new record in the Library of
standards . This command button is only active in the supervisor level.
Edit Command Button
Click on this command button to open the Library of Standards: Edit Standard
Data dialog box in order to change the data for an existing record in the Library of
standards . The standard sample to be changed must first be selected in the list
box. This command button is only active in the supervisor level.
Delete Command Button
Click on this command button to delete the standard sample currently selected in
the list box from the library of standards. This command button is only active in the
supervisor level.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 87 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Display Command Button

Click on this command button to open the Library of Standards: Display Standard
Data dialog box and view the data for the standard currently selected in the list
box.
OK Command Button
changed.
5.10.2 Library of Standards: Display Standard Data Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to display the data stored in the library of standards. The
dialog box contains the following elements:
Sample Name Display Field
The name of the standard sample is displayed in this display field.
The comment of the selected standard sample is displayed in this display field.
Sample Mass (g) Display Field
The sample mass of the standard sample is displayed in this display field.
Dilution Mass (g) Display Field
The dilution material mass of standard sample is displayed in this display field.
The dilution factor calculated from the given sample mass and the given dilution
material mass is automatically displayed in this display field.
This check box is marked if the selected standard sample is to be used for the
Average Atomic Number Calibration.
This check box is marked if the selected standard sample should be used for the
Mass Attenuation Coefficients Calibration.
Dilution Material Check Box
This check box is marked if the selected standard sample is to be used as a
dilution material.
The typical mass unit for entry of the given values for the standard sample. is
displayed in this drop-down list box.
Given concentration Group Box
In the Given concentration Group Box you find a table with the following columns:
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 88 of 397
X-LabPro 5
First Column
includes the loss of ignition .
Symbol Column
Element Column
Conc. Column
The given concentration of the selected element is displayed in this column.
Error Column
The absolute error of the given concentrations of the selected element is displayed
in this column.
Level Column
The certification level for the selected element for the standard sample is
displayed in this drop-down list box.
These options are marked if the standard sample should be used for the
calibration for the various evaluation methods for the selected element.
OK Command Button
Click on this command button to close the dialog.
5.10.3 Edit Standard Data Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to edit the data stored in the library of standards. The
dialog box contains the following elements:
Sample Name Text Box
Enter a name for the standard sample in this text box. The name should be in
compliance with accepted international nomenclature and may be up to 20
characters long.
The comment of the selected standard sample is displayed in this text box.
Sample Mass (g)Text Box
Enter the sample mass for the standard sample in this text box. Valid entries lie in
the range between 0 and 6.5 g.
Dilution Mass (g)Text Box
Enter the dilution material mass for the standard sample in this text box. Valid
entries lie in the range between 0 and 6.5 g.
The dilution factor calculated from the given sample mass and the given dilution
material mass is automatically displayed in this display field.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 89 of 397
X-LabPro 5

Mark this check box if the selected standard sample is to be used for the Average
Atomic Number Calibration.
Mark this check box if the selected standard sample should be used for the Mass
Attenuation Coefficients Calibration.
Dilution Material Check Box
Mark this check box if the selected standard sample is to be used as a dilution
material.
Select the typical mass unit for entry of the given values for the standard sample.
Given concentration Group Box
In the Given concentration Group Box you find a table with the following columns:
First Column
includes the loss of ignition .
Symbol Column
Element Column
Conc. Column
Enter the given concentration of the selected element in this column.
Error Column
Enter the absolute error of the given concentrations of the selected element in this
column.
Level Column
Select certification level for the selected element for the standard sample in this
drop-down list box.
Select this options by a left mouse click if the standard sample should be used for
the calibration for the various evaluation methods for the selected element. A
check mark appears in the field if the option is enabled.
OK Command Button
changed.
Click on this command button to close the dialog without storing changes to the
settings.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 90 of 397
X-LabPro 5
5.11 Menu Commands

 Method Wizard
Creates a new method. The X-LabPro Method Wizard will be opened to assist
you.
Toolbar:
 Close
Use the Close command to close an opened method.
 Print
Select the Print command to print one or more selected standard samples of
the method opened in the method window. You will be promted to select a
printer and do the printer settings.
Toolbar:
 Print Preview
Get a preview of the printer output of the standard sample(s) you want to
print.
 Subclass Methods
Select this option to sort the methods in the Tree Control. A check mark
appears next to the menu item as long as the option is enabled. After
enabling this option you can move the methods in the tree control via drag-
and-drop. You must first close all open method windows to make use of this
feature.
 Exit
Use this command to end the Method Administration session. You can also
use the Close command on the Application Control Menu.
See also:
Method Administration ( Tree control )
Method Window
Method Administration ( Toolbar )

 New...
Use this command to create a new standard sample in the selected method.
This command will open the Enter/Edit Sample Data Dialog.
 Edit...
Use this command to edit a selected standard sample. This command will
open the Enter/Edit Sample Data Dialog.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 91 of 397
X-LabPro 5
 Given Concentrations...
Use this commands to enter given concentrations for a standard sample. This
command will open the Given Concentrations Dialog Box.
 Copy
This command copies the selected standard sample(s) of the present method
to the X-LabPro-clipboard.
Toolbar:
 Paste
Use this command to paste standard samples from the X-LabPro-clipboard to
the present method. The data of the measurements will not be pasted.
Toolbar:
 Paste with Data
Use this command to paste standard samples from the X-LabPro-clipboard to
the present method. The data of the measurements will be pasted too.
 Clone
This command clones the selected standard sample(s) of the present
methods. This means it will copy and paste in one single step.
Toolbar:
 Delete
Use this command to delete the selected standard sample(s) from the
database.
Toolbar:
 Define As Background...
Use this command to create a copy of the selected standard sample(s) and
define it as background. A dialog will prompt you to choose one of six
possible backgrounds.
 Reset Measurements
This command resets the measurements of one or more selected standard
sample(s) .
 Reset Evaluation
This command resets the results of one or more selected standard sample(s)
. (Sample Status will be set from A to M).
 Import Standard Sample(s)...
This command imports standard samples from archive files into the selected
method. A dialog will prompt you to choose one or more archive files (*.smp).
 Export Standard Sample(s)...
Use this command to export and backup standard samples of the selected
method. You will be prompted to choose a directory where the archive files
(*.smp) will be created.
 Evaluate...
Use this command to evaluate the selected standard sample(s).

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 92 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Toolbar:
 Show Spectra...
Shows the spectra of one or more selected standard sample(s) via the X-
LabPro Spectra Viewer.
 Results...
This command shows the results of a standard sample in the Display Sample
Results Dialog.
 Properties...
This command shows the properties of a standard sample in the Sample
Properties Dialog.
See also:

 Toolbar
some of the most common commands in the Method Administration. A check
mark appears next to the menu item when the toolbar is displayed.
 Status Bar
 Update (Ctrl + F5)
have been made from X-LabPro. When using this command the tree will only
be reloaded from its temporary files.
 Rebuild
have been made from X-LabPro. When using this command the tree will
completely re-calculated from the database. This operation will take a few
seconds.
 Update Standards List (F5)
Use this command to update the standards list after valid database changes
have been made from X-LabPro. When using this command the standards
will be reloaded from the database.
See also:
Method Administration ( Tree Control )

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 93 of 397
X-LabPro 5
5.11.4 Commands in the Method Menu

 New
Select this menupoint to create a new method. There must be opened already
a method in the Method Administration, the new method will be copied from
the present one. Moreover, you can select if you want to copy standards from
the opened to the new method.
Note: Background samples and dilution materials will always be copied.
 Delete
Use this command to delete the opened method from the database.
 Import...
Import a method from an archive file (*.mar). You will be prompted to choose
the archive file.
 Export...
Select this menupoint to export and backup the selected method to an archive
file (*.mar). A dialog will prompt you to choose a folder where to export.
 Create Table of Standards...
Select this menupoint to create a text file containing a table of all standard
samples and backgrounds of the present method.
 Adopt Defaults...
Select this menupoint to open the Adopt Defaults dialog box in order to adjust
various settings for standard samples that have been imported or inserted into
the method.
See also:
Method Window
5.11.5 Commands in the Tools Menu

 Select X-LabPro Configuration...
Select this menupoint to define a X-LabPro configuration file (*.xcf) as your
standard configuration.
 Library Of Standards...
Select this menupoint to open the Library Of Standards: Select Standard
dialog box. Here you may create, edit or delete standard samples.
See also:
5.11.6 Commands in the Window Menu

This menu is used to switch between and arrange windows. The menu is
displayed in every open window. The following menupoints are available:
 Cascade
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 94 of 397
X-LabPro 5
 Tile
 Arrange Icons
5.11.7 Commands in the X-LabPro Menu

The X-LabPro menu contains the following commands to open other applications:
 Method Administration...
This command would open the Method Administration but is disabled
because the Method Administration is already running.
 Job Manager...
Use this command to open the Job Manager. You may also click on the
 Routine Dialog...
Use this command to open the Routine Dialog. You may also click on the
 Spectra Viewer...
Use this command to open the Spectra Viewer. You may also click on the
 Configuration Editor...
Use this command to open the Configuration Editor.
 Evaluation...
Use this command to open the Evaluation Tool.
See also:
Toolbar (Method Administration)

 Contents
X-LabPro program. In the help system, select the Contents command button
Select this menupoint to open the online-help of the Method Administration.
 Software

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 95 of 397
X-LabPro 5
 Shortcuts
Display the shortcuts.
 Periodic Table
Select this menupoint to display the periodic table of elements.
 About XLMethodAdmin
Show the version and copyrights of the Method Administration.
See also:
5.12 Other
5.12.1 Toolbar
bar. The toolbar provides quick mouse access to many functions used in the
Method Administration.
Click To
Create a new method. The X-LabPro Method Wizard will be opened to
assist you.
Copy the selected standard(s) to the X-LabPro clipboard.
Paste the standards from the X-LabPro clipboard to the opened method.
Clone the selected standard(s).
Delete the selected standard(s).
Evaluate the selected standard(s).

Show the spectra of the selected standard(s).
Show the results of the selected standard.
Print the selected standard(s).

Show information about the application.
Open the Method Administration.This button is disabled because the

Method Administration is already running.
Open the Job Manager.
Open the Routine Dialog.
Open the Spectra Viewer.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 96 of 397
X-LabPro 5
See also:
5.12.2 Title Bar
application and the opened method.
Exit button.
Maximize button.
Minimize button.
Name of the application.
Name of the spectra window
Applications icon.
6 Configuration Editor
6.1 Using the Configuration Editor
6.1.1 Menu Commands

The configuration editor XLCEdi is a module of the X-LabPro software package to
configure your X-LabPro system.
Menu overview
 File Menu
 Reset Menu
 View Menu
 Help Menu
 System Menu

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 97 of 397
X-LabPro 5

 Select X-LabPro Configuration
Use this command to select the standard configuration, which will be load at
X-LabPro start. This command will open a standard Windows File Dialog to
select a configuration file.
 Open
Use the open command to load an existing configuration file. This command
will open a standard Windows File Dialog to select the configuration file.
 Shortcuts:
Toolbar:
Keyboard: CTRL+O
 Save
Use this command to save the active document to its current name and
directory. When you save a document for the first time, XLCedi displays the
Save As dialog box so you can name your document. If you want to change
the name and directory of an existing document before you save it, choose
the Save As command.
Shortcuts
Toolbar:
Keys: CTRL+S
 Save as
Use this command to save and name the active document. XLCedi displays
the Save As dialog box so you can name your document.
 To save a document with its existing name and directory, use the Save
command.
 Print Configuration
Use this command to print out all configuration parameters.
 Exit
Use this command to end your XLCEdi session. You can also use the Close
command on the Application Control Menu. XLCEdi prompts you to save
documents with unsaved changes.
Shortcuts
Mouse: Double click the application's Control menu Icon.
Keys: ALT+F4

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 98 of 397
X-LabPro 5
6.1.3 Open Dialog Box

The following options allow you to specify which file to open:
Look in Drop-Down List Box
Select in this drop down list box the drive and the directory in which the
configuration file is saved. The list will be automatically updated.
File name Text Box
Type or select with your mouse the configuration file you want to open. The list
box shows all files with the extension you select in the Files of Type Drop-Down
List Box.
Files of Type Drop-Down List Box
Select the type of file you want to open:
XCF : X-LABPro Configuration File
Open Command Button
Click the open command button after you have selected a filename and location.
The box will be automatically closed. Double clicking on a file name in the list has
got the same effect.
Close the dialog box without any activity.
Command buttons in this dialog box:
Change to the higher directory
Create a new direktory
The list shows filenames only
The list shows filenames and additional details.
6.1.4 Save As Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to specify the name and location of the configuration
file you are about to save.
Save in Drop-Down List Box
Select in this drop down list box the drive and the directory in which you want to
store the configuration file. Existing files are be shown.
File name Text Box
Type a new filename to save the configuration file with a different name. XLCedi
adds the extension you specify in the Save as type drop down list box.
Save Command Button
Click the save command button after you have select filename and location.This
dialog box will be automatically closed. If you select an existing file name, a new
dialog box will ask you to overwride the file.
Close the dialog box without any activity.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 99 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Command buttons in this dialog box:

Change to the higher directory.
Make a new direktory.

The list shows filenames only.
The list shows filenames and additional details.
6.1.5 Commands in the Reset Menu

 ...to last saved
Resets the complete configuration to the settings in last saved version.

 Toolbar
some of the most common commands in XLCedi, such as File Open. A check
mark appears next to the menu item when the toolbar is displayed.
 See Toolbar for help on using the toolbar.
 Statusbar
 See Status Bar for help on using the status bar.
 Large Icons
Use this command to display the icons of the configuration editor in large icon
style.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 100 of 397
X-LabPro 5
 Small Icons
Use this command to display the icons of the configuration editor in small icon
style.

The help menu contents the following commands which will assist you by using
this application:
 Contents
X-LABPro program. In the help system, select the Contents command button
 Software
 Shortcuts
 About XLCedi
Show the version and copyrights of XLCedi.
6.1.8 Commands in the Control Menu

 Restore
Use this command to return the active window to its size and position before
you chose the Maximize or Minimize command.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 101 of 397
X-LabPro 5
 Move
Use this command to display a four-headed arrow so you can move the active
window or dialog box with the arrow keys.
Note: This command is unavailable if you maximize the window.

Size
Use this command to display a four-headed arrow so you can size the active
window with the arrow keys.
After the pointer changes to the four-headed arrow:

Press one of the DIRECTION keys (left, right, up, or down arrow key) to move the
pointer to the border you want to move.
Press a DIRECTION key to move the border.
Press ENTER when the window is the size you want.
Shortcut
Mouse: Drag the size bars at the corners or edges of the window.
 Minimize
Use this command to reduce the XLCedi window to an icon.
Shortcut
Mouse: Click the minimize icon on the title bar.
 Maximize
Use this command to enlarge the active window to fill the available space.
Shortcut
Mouse: Click the maximize icon on the title bar; or double-click the title bar.
 Close
Use this command to close the active window or dialog box.
 Clicking the Close icon and double-clicking the Control menu icon is the
same as choosing the Close command.
 Note: If you have multiple windows open for a single document, the Close
command on the document Control menu closes only one window at a time.
You can close all windows at once with the Close command on the File menu.
 Shortcuts
Keys: CTRL+F4 closes a document window

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 102 of 397
X-LabPro 5
6.2 Other
6.2.1 Toolbar
bar. The toolbar provides quick mouse access to many functions used in XLCedi.
Click To
Open an existing configuration file. XLCEdi displays the Open dialog box,
in which you can locate and open the desired file.
Save the active document or template with its current name. If you have
not named the document, XLCEdi displays the Save As dialog box.
Print the actually configuration.
Switch the representation to large icon style.
Switch the representation to small icon style.
Display the online help.
6.2.2 Title Bar
application and document.
Exit button
Maximize button
Minimize button
Name of the document
Applications icon. This icon shows your type of instrument or the
selected dialog.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 103 of 397
X-LabPro 5
6.2.3 Status Bar
The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the XLCedi window. To display or hide
the status bar, use the Status Bar command in the View menu.
the toolbar button. Moreover, during opening and closing a document, a progress
bar will show you the current status.
down:
6.2.4 Scroll bars

Displayed at the right and bottom edges of the document window. The scroll boxes
inside the scroll bars indicate your vertical and horizontal location in the document.
You can use the mouse to scroll to other parts of the document.
6.3 The Configuration Editor Dialog Boxes
6.3.1 Global Settings and Instrument Data Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to edit the customer- and instrument data. This dialog box
is opened with the Global Settings icon. The dialog box contains the following
elements:
Global Settings Group Box
Customer Name Display Field
The name of the customer (your company name) is shown in this diplay field.
Instrument Number Display Field
The instrument number is shown in this diplay field.
SPECTRO Job Number Text Box
Enter the SPECTRO Job Number for the respective instrument or update in text
box

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 104 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Generator Serial Number Text Box

Enter the generator serial number in this text box.
Generator Serial Number Text Box
Enter the X-Ray tube serial number in this text box.
Profile Drop Down List Box and Edit Command Button Combination
Select the profile for your type of computer in this drop down list box. Click the Edit
Command Button to change the timing values for your selection. In the opened
Dialog Box you can change the values for following parameters
Spectrum Read Interval
Generator Read Interval
Vacuum Read Interval
Intrument Type Group Box
Intrument Type Option Buttons
Select the option button witch corresponds to your intrument type (XEPOS or
SPECTRO iQ) in this selection field.
Optional Equipment Group Box (Service Mode only)
Powervar UPS
Select this check box if your intrument is equipped with an uninterruptible power
supply.
Hauppauge WinTV Video System Check Box
Select this check box if your intrument is equipped with a Hauppauge WinTV
Video System.
Matrox Cronos Video System Check Box
Select this check box if your intrument is equipped with a Matrox Cronos Video
System.
Spectro 4.4 Data Transmission Check Box
Select this check box if you want to use the Spectro 4.4 format for the data
transmission.
OK Command Button
Click on this command button to close the dialog box and store your changes.
not stored.
6.3.2 Targets/Filter Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to view and edit the configuration for the target drum. This
dialog box is opened with the Targets/Filter icon. The dialog box contains the
following elements:
Basic Settings Group Box
Number of Positions Drop-Down List Box
Select the number of target positions on the target drum in this drop down list box.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 105 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Valid entries are 4, 5, 6, and 8. If a number smaller than 8 is selected, the table in
the Target/Filter Parameters group box is adjusted accordingly.
Changer installed Check Box
Mark this check box if your intrument is equipped with a target changer. This
control is only enabled in service mode.
Always Initialize Changer Check Box
If this check box is marked, the target changer motor will be initialized before any
target movement.
Offset Text Box
In this text box you can enter the offset steps that the target changer motor moves
the target changer after initialisition. The unit is steps.
Target Parameters Group Box
Target Configuration Table
The configuration of the individual target positions are displayed in this table.
Double click on a target position to open the Target Position Parameters dialog
box to view a detailed description of the target position. Double clicking
corresponds to the function of the Display command button.
Display Command Button
Select this command button to open the Target Position Parameters dialog box in
order to view a detailed description of the currently selected target position.
Edit Command Button
Select this command button to open the Target Position Parameters dialog box in
order to change the detailed data for the currently selected target position.
Select this command button to delete the data for the currently selected target
position. This corresponds to an empty position on the target drum.
OK Command Button
not stored.
Target Position Parameters Dialog Box
This dialog box is used to view and/or edit the detailed data for a target position.
The dialog box contains the following elements:
Type Drop Down List Box
Select the target type in this drop-down list box. Valid entries are: Empty,
Secondary target (K), Secondary target (L), Compton/Secondary, Compton
scatter, Barkla scatter and Bragg Crystal. One of the two dialog elements for a
more detailed description of the target (explained below) is displayed, depending
on the values selected in this drop down list box.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 106 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Name Drop Down List Box

This drop down list box is displayed when the selected target type is: Barkla
scatter or Bragg Crystal. Select the name of the target in this drop down list box.
Valid entries for Barkla scatter are: Boron carbide, Aluminum oxide, Beryllium,
Beryllium oxide, Carbon and HOPG. The valid entry for Crystal is: HOPG.
Combination: Name Text Box, PTE Command Button and Display Field
This combination of dialog elements is displayed when the selected target type is:
Compton scatter or Secondary target. The element for the target material can be
chosen with this combination of dialog elements. Use either the text box to enter
the atomic number or the PTE command button to select an element using the
periodic table of elements. The Select Element dialog box is opened when the
PTE command button is chosen. The name of the selected element is displayed in
the display field.
Intensity Correction Factor Text Box
Enter the intensity correction factor in this text box. This factor can be used to
make adjustments after replacing the excitation unit, for example. The factor is
determined during the calibration of your instrument. Valid entries lie in the range
between 0 and 2.
Primary/Secondary Diaphragm Group Boxes
These group boxes describe the primary diaphragm and the secondary
diaphragm. Both group boxes have corresponding dialog elements. These are:
Material Text Box
Enter a description of the respective diaphragms material in this text box. The
description can be a maximum of 20 characters long.
Inner Diameter Text Box
Enter the inner diameter of the respective diaphragm in this text box. Valid entries
for the primary diaphragm lie in the range between 0 and 14 mm; in the range
between 0 and 12 mm for the secondary diaphragm.
Length Text Box
Enter the length for the respective diaphragm in this text box. Valid entries for the
primary diaphragm lie in the range between 0 and 10 mm; in the range between 0
and 6 mm for the secondary diaphragm.
Radiation Filter Group Boxes
These group boxes describe the filters for the target positions (Primary filter,
Primary filter 2, Secondary filter 1 and Secondary filter 2). The group boxes have
corresponding dialog elements. These are:
Combination: Name Text Box, PTE Command Button and Display Field
The element for the respective filter can be set with these dialog elements. Use
either the text box to enter the atomic number or the PTE command button to
select an element using the periodic table of elements. The Select Element dialog
box is opened with the PTE command button. The name of the selected element is
displayed in the display field.
Density Text Box
Enter the density of the filter material in this text box. Valid entries lie in the range
between 0 and 25 g/cm³.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 107 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Thickness Text Box

Enter the thickness of the filter material in this text box. Valid entries lie in the
range between 0 and 1000 µm.
OK Command Button
not stored.
6.3.3 X-Ray Tube Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to view and/or edit various settings for the X-Ray tube.
This dialog box is opened by clicking the X-Ray Tube icon.
Type Drop Down List Box
Select the type of tube used in this drop-down list box. Possible entries depent on
your instrument. Entries will be automatically placed in the Max. Power text box
and in the Characteristic Lines list box when a new type is selected in this drop
down list box.
Anode Text Box
This edit control contains the atomic number of the anode material. It is possible to
enter the atomic number in the edit control or to choose an atomic number from
the Periodic Table of Elements by clicking the PTE Button.
Characteristic Lines Group Box
Grid Control for Current and Voltage for the Tube Characteristic Lines
Up to 10 pairs of current and voltage pairs, whose fit points are not components of
the portion of the tube tube characteristic lines limited by the maximum power, are
shown in this list box. These values are used together with the value for the x-ray
tube's maximum power to check the user settings for current and voltage and to
adjust them if necessary. It is possible to edit the values directly in the grid control.
Options Group Box
Generator installed Ckeck Box
Mark this check box if your instrument is equiped with a generator.
Preset Standby Mode Ckeck Box
If this check box is activated, the generator will automatically change its mode to
standby mode after finishing a measurement.
Options Generator
Max. Power Text Box
Enter the maximum tube power in this text box. Valid entries lie in the range
between 100 and 3000 W. This value is used together with the values for the tube
characteristic lines to check the user settings for current and voltage and to adjust
them if necessary. There are no possible settings that do not lie within the limits
described in this dialog box.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 108 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Maximum Voltage (kV) Text Box

Enter the maximum value for the tube voltage in this text box. Valid entries lie in
the range between 1 and 100 kV.
Maximum Current (mA) Text Box
Enter the maximum value for the tube current in this text box.
Delta Voltage (kV) Text Box
Enter the size of the steps with which the tube voltage should be reduced before
turning off the x-ray tube. Small steps slow the reduction process; steps that are
too large may lead to an error during monitoring of the relative voltage for the x-ray
generator along with premature turning off of the x-ray tube. Valid entries lie in the
range between 1 and 10 kV.
Delta Current (mA) Text Box
Enter the size of the steps with which the tube current should be reduced before
turning off the x-ray tube. See above for further information. Valid entries lie in the
range between 1 and 10 mA.
Shutter Group Box
Motor Steps Text Box
Enter the number of steps for the shutter in this text box. Valid entries lie in the
range between 1 and 5000 Steps.
OK Command Button
not stored.
6.3.4 Instrument Control Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to view and edit various instrument control settings. This
dialog box is opened with the Instrument Control icon.
Standby Tab Control

Standby Voltage (kV) Text Box
This text box contains the generator voltage in standby mode. The unit is kV. Valid
ranges depent on the selected tube and the maximum tube power.
Standby Current (mA) Text Box
This text box contains the generator current in standby mode. The unit is mA.
Valid ranges depent on the selected tube and the maximum tube power.
Standby Target Drop Down List Box
In this drop down list box you can choose the target selected in standby mode.
Enable Vacuum Pump ... Check Box
If this checkbox is activated, the vacuum pump will be switched on when entering
standby mode after a cuvette measurmenent. The pump time cannot be entered
and is set to 5 seconds.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 109 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Vacuum Tab Control

Ventilation Time (s) Text Box
Enter the ventilation time in this text box. This is the time that is needed to
ventilate the evacuated sample chamber. Valid entries lie in the range between 10
and 100 s. The sample chamber may not be completely ventilated if the value here
is too small. It may, then, not be possible to open the cover for the sample
chamber.
Vacuum Pump Time (s) Text Box
Enter the vacuum pump time in this text box. This is the time that is needed to
produce a vacuum in the sample chamber. Valid entries lie in the range between
10 and 200 s. The sample chamber may not be completely evacuated before a
measurement is started if the value here is too small; this leads to erroneous
measurement values.
Postpump Time (s) Text Box
Enter the time for pumping after reaching the vacuum in this text box. This time is
needed to ensure the vacuum during the whole measurement.
Vacuum Pump Installed Check Box
Mark this checkbox if your intrument is equipped with a vacuum pump.
Vacuum Measurement Installed Check Box
Mark this checkbox if your intrument is equipped with the optional vacuum
measurement.
Measurement Tab Control
Optimum Dead Time (%) Text Box
Enter the optimum dead time in this text box. The calculation of the new tube
current is based on this time during current regulation. If the optimum dead time
cannot be achieved, despite current regulation, it is because the newly calculated
current lies outside of the tube characteristic line and, thus, cannot be set. Check
the excitation conditions for the measurement if this occurs.
Check Tube Cooling Check Box
If this check box is marked, the revolutions of the fan motor will be controlled. This
check box is only activated for the XEPOS.
Low Energy Cutoff [eV] Text Box
Enter the low energy level (in eV) in this text box. From this level onwards events
are shown in the spectral representation. This textbox is only enabled if your
instrument is epuiped with a DXP.
Hide Secure Message Boxes
If this check box is marked, the secure message boxes are will be hidden.
Gas Flush Tab Control
Prepump Time (s) Textbox
Enter the prepump time in this textbox. For this time, the air in the sample room
will be pumped out by the vacuum pump before the gas flush will be activated.
Valid entries lie in the range between 0 and 300 s. This textbox is enabled if the
Gas Flush with Vacuum option button is marked.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 110 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Waiting Time (s) Textbox

Enter the waiting time before the measurement in this text box. Valid entries lie in
the range between 0 and 300 s. This textbox is enabled if the Gas Flush with
Vacuum or Gas Flush without Vacuum option button is marked.
Minimum Gas Flow (l/h) Textbox
Enter the minimum gas flow in this textbox. Valid entries lie in the range between 0
and 1000 l/h. This textbox is enabled if the Gas Flush without Vacuum option
button is marked.
No Gas Flush / Gas Flush with Vacuum / Gas Flush without Vacuum Option
buttons
With this option buttons you are able to change between several gas flushes or no
gas flush, depended on which given flushes are installed in your instrument.
Switch off gas flush Check Box
Mark this check box to switch off the gas flush during the measurement. if this
check box is marked, you have to enter the gas flush times for the first and for the
repeated measurements.
Permanent pumping Check Box
If this check box is marked the vacuum pump will be pumping permanent.
OK Command Button
not stored.
6.3.5 Sample Plate Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to view and/or edit various settings for the sample plate.
This dialog box is opened with the Sample Plate icon. The dialog box contains the
following elements:
Allowed Sample Plate Sizes Group Box
List box with sample plate sizes and offsets
The possible sample plate size and the sample plate offsets for their
configurations are displayed in this list box.
Click on this command button to open the sample plate parameters dialog box. An
additional sample plate size can be inserted into the list with this dialog box.
Edit Command Button
Click on this command button to open the sample plate parameters dialog box.
The currently selected entry in the list box can be edited with this dialog box.
Click on this command button to delete the sample plate size currently selected in
the list box.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 111 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Sample Changer installed Check Box

Mark this check box if your instrument is equipped with an optionally available
sample changer.
Use Correction Values Check Box
Mark this check box to enable the usage of correction values for sample plates. In
the dialog box Enter the Sample Plate Parameters an additional command button
will be visible. Click this command button to edit the correction values.
Options Group Box
Stand-By Sample Plate installed
Mark this check box if your instrument is equiped with a standby plate.
Sample Rotation Installed Check Box
Mark this check box to make sample rotation available for use.
Target by Target Option Button
In this measuring mode, the samples on the sample plate are measured according
to the target. First the first measurements, then the second measurements, etc.
are conducted. The first results are obtained after the complete measurement of
the first sample in this measuring mode. This measuring mode enables the use of
methods with different settings for the options for vacuum and gas flush for the
individual measurements.
Sample by Sample Option Button
In this measuring mode, the samples on the sample plate are measured according
to sample. Each sample is completely measured and then directly evaluated. The
first results are obtained quicker than with the target by target mode. Only
methods for which all of the settings for the vacuum and gas flush options are the
same should be used together on one plate in this mode.
OK Command Button
not stored.
Enter the Sample Plate Parameters Dialog Box

This dialogbox is used to enter or change additional settings for the sample
plate.The dialog box contains following elements:
Sample Plate Parameters Group Box
Number of positions on the sample plate Text Box
Enter the number of sample position for a sample plate in this text box. Valid
entries lie in the range between 0 and 40. Standard sample plates delivered with
the instrument have 8, 12, 14, 18, 20 or 36 sample positionen.
Number of offset steps after initialization Text Box
Enter the number of steps that should be additionally driven to in order to correct
the position after an initialization in this text box. Valid entries lie in the range
between -20 und +20.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 112 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Additional Settings for Special Plate Group Box

This dialog elements will only be shown, if you mark the checkbox Extented
Sample Plate in the Sample Plate Parameters Group Box.
Number of positions (32 mm)Text Box
Enter the number of 32mm positions on the sample plate in this text box.
Number of positions (40 mm)Text Box
Enter the number of 40mm positions on the sample plate in this text box.
OK Command Button
not stored.
Correction... Command Button...
This command button is only visible if the check box Use Correction Values in the
dialog box Sample Plate is marked. Click this command button to open the
position correction dialog box. In the dialog box you can edit the correction values.
6.3.6 Detector Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to view and edit various settings for the detector. This
dialog box is opened with the Detector icon. The dialog box contains the following
elements:
Type of Detector Drop-Down List Box
Select the type of the detector in this drop down list box. Possible entries depend
on your instrument.
Type of Entrance Window Drop-Down List Box
Select the type of entrance window in this drop-down list box. Valid entries are:
Beryllium, Boron, Diamond, Glass, Mox Tex and Siliconnitride.
Colimator
Select the type of colimator, your detector is equipt with.
Beryllium Equivalent Thickness Text Box
Enter a value in this text box which gives the thickness of an equivalent beryllium
window in regards to absorption behavior. Valid entries lie in the range between 0
and 100 µm.
Thickness Gold Contact Layer Text Box
Enter a value for the thickness of the gold contact layer in this text box. Valid
entries lie in the range between 0 and 50 nm.
Thickness Silicon Dead Layer Text Box
Enter a value for the thickness of the silicon dead layer in this text box. Valid
entries lie in the range between 0 and 0.5 µm.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 113 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Thickness Active Layer Text Box

Enter a value for the thickness of the active layer in this text box. Valid entries lie
in the range between 0 and 5 mm.
Additional Parameters for Sirius Detectors
This dialog elements will only be visible if the Sirius detector is selected.
Regenerations Time[s] Text Box
The Sirius 10 detector needs a regeneration time after the measurement. During
this time the detector is switched of. Enter the timespan for the regeneration time
in this text box. The typical value is 60 s.
Stabilization Time[s] Text Box
After the regeneration is finished, the Sirius detector needs a stabilization time to
be able to show exact measurement results. Enter the timespan for the
stabilization time in this text box. The typical value is 180 s.
Stabilization before Measurement Check Box
The stabilization of the Sirius 10 can be done after the measurement of a sample
plate is finished or during the initialization of the next measurement.
Stabilization after the measurement:
Stabilization before the measurement
Activate the checkbox if you want the stabilization be started before the
measurement.
OK Command Button
not stored.
6.3.7 Filenames Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to view and enter the settings for file names for the data
tables used by the program. This dialog box is opened with the Filenames icon.
The dialogbox contains following elements:
Settings Group Box
Use Programm Directory Check Box
Mark this check box, if the data tables will be stored in the program directory of the
X-LABPro software.
Directory Text Box with Command Button
Click this command button to open the Select Directory dialog box. In this dialog
box you can select the directory in which the data tables will be stored. Only
existing directorys will be shown. Please use the windows explorer to create a new
subdirectory. The text field displays the selected directory. The program directory
from the X-LABPro software is the default directory.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 114 of 397
X-LabPro 5
This dialog elements will only be visible, if the Use Programm Directory check box
is not marked.
Database Group Box
Use DSN Name Radio Button / Drop Down List Box
Select this option if you want to use a SQL Database with X-LabPro software. In
the Microsoft Windows settings you can define one or more DSN Names for SQL
Databases. Select in the drop down list box the data source you want to use.
Use X-LabPro File Structure Radio Button
Select this option if you want to use the file structure as database for your X-
LabPro software.
OK Command Button
not stored.
6.3.8 Interface Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to view and edit the preset interfaces between the
spectrometer and the personal computer. The parameters for the following
interfaces can be set here:
Serial interface for instrument components and generator
Serial interface for detection electronics
The dialog box is opened with the Interfaces icon and contains the following
elements:
Serial Interface Drop Down List Box
Select the serial interface to be used to control the X-Ray generator
communication or the detection elektronics communication in this drop down list
box.
Baudrate Drop Down List Box
In this drop down list box you can choose the baud rate for the serial
communication. Typical value is 38400 for all intruments.
Serial Interface Parameters Text Box
This text box shows you the parameters for the serial interface. These parameters
are baud rate, parity, data bits, stop bits and Xon/Xoff
OK Command Button
not stored.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 115 of 397
X-LabPro 5
6.3.9 Artefacts Dialog Box

In this dialog box parameters depending on your instument will be shown. These
parameters can only be modified in service mode.
6.3.10 Geometry and Protection Foil Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to display the geometry data and to edit the parameters for
the detector protection foil and the target protection foil.
This dialog box is opened with the Geometry icon. The dialog box contains the
following elements:
Geometry Tab Control
Distance Sample  Detector [mm] Text Box
This text box displays the distance between sample and detector. This value can
only be changed in service mode.
Distance Target  Sample [mm] Text Box
This text box displays the distance between target and sample. This value can
only be changed in service mode.meth
Detector Protection Foil Tab Control
Foil Drop Down List Box
Select the used detector protection foil in this drop down list box.
Target Protection Foil Tab Control
Foil Drop Down List Box
Select the used target protection foil in this drop down list box .
Angles Tab Control
In this Dialog parameters depending on the used device type can be entered.
These parameters should not be modified.
OK Command Button
not stored.
6.3.11 User Dialog
6.3.12 Routine Dialog Settings Dialog Box

This dialog contains the settings for the Routine Dialog. This dialog is opens by
clicking on the Routine Dialog icon.
Presets Tab Control
Method Class Drop Down List Box
Use this drop down list box to select the method class that is used when opening a
new sample plate in the Routine Dialog.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 116 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Sample Plate Drop Down List Box

Use this drop down list box to select the type of sample plate that is used when
opening a new sample plate in the Routine Dialog.
Locked Positions Drop Down List Box
Use this drop down list box to select the sample plate positions that will be locked
when opening a new sample plate in the Routine Dialog. The lists of locked
positions can be configured in the Locked Positions tab control.
Default Job Number radio buttons
With these radio buttons you can you can decide how the job name will be created
automatically. You can choose between collective job as automatically used, a
daily generated job (e.g. 2001_06_05), a weekly generated job (e.g. 2001_23) or a
monthly generated job (e.g. 2001_06).
Open Last Sample Plate Automatically Check Box
Mark this check box if you want the Routine Dialog automatically load the last
document after starting and save the current used document at closing.
Method Classes Tab Control
Click this command button to generate a new method class. You will be prompted
by the Insert Method Class dialog box to enter the name of the new method class.
After enetring the name the new method class will be added to the list.
After prompting the selected method class will be deleted.
Method Assignment Tab Control
The dialog items on this tab control can be used to assign the different methods to
the method classes.
Available Methods List Box
This list box contains all methods of your X-LabPro system.
Selected Methods List Box
After selecting a method class by using the drop down list box at the top, the
methods assigned to this class will be shown in the list box below.
The selected method in the left list (Available Methods) will be added to the
selected method class on the right side.
After prompting a selected method in the method class (right list) will be deleted
from the list.
Columns Tab Control
The columns of the Routine Dialog sample table representation can be configured
by using the list on this tab control. The order of the columns can be defined and
the different columns can be defined as visible or hidden.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 117 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Up Command Button
Moves the selected column in the list to the previous position. Use the Up/Down
command buttons to define the order of the columns
Down Command Button
Moves the selected column in the list to the next position. Use the Up/Down
command buttons to define the order of the columns.
Double Click on the Column List
By double clicking a list item the item toggles from visible to hidden.
Locked Positions Tab Control
Generates a new list of locked positions and opens the Locked Positions dialog
box.
Edit Command Button
Opens the Locked Positions dialog box to edit the selected list of locked positions.
After prompting the selected list of locked positions will be deleted from the list.
OK Command Button
not stored.
6.3.13 Locked Positions Dialog Box

This dialog is used to define the locked positions of the sample plate. After
selecting the locked positions and confirming by clicking OK, the locked positions
will be included in the list. This dialog is opened by clicking the buttons Edit or
Insert from the group Lists of locked positions or by double-click on the locked
positions table.
Sample plate Group Box
By clicking the positions in the sample plate of the dialog box, the position status
toggles between locked/unlocked. Locked positions are displayed in dark gray and
the word Lock will be shown in this position. Every sample plate position will be
toggled (lock/unlock) by clicking into it.
Sample size Drop Down List Box
In this drop down list box, you can select the Sample Plate Size for which the
settings are valid.
OK Command Button
not stored.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 118 of 397
X-LabPro 5
6.3.14 Spectral Representation Settings Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to select the colors for the Spectra Viewer and the printer
output of the spectra as well as setting the parameters for the spectral
representation in the Routine Dialog. You can set the colors for the monitor and
the printer independently from one another. This dialog box is opened with double
click on the Spectra icon.
Colors for the Representation Group Box
Screen / Printer Register
In this tab you can select for which output device the various settings will be
shown. You can choose between screen and printer.
Box with Sample Diagram
This box shows how the spectral representation will appear by making usage of
the current settings. The example will automatically be updated by changing the
settings.
Drop Down List Box
Select a component of the example in order to change the color with this drop
down list box.
Red Scroll Bar and Text Box
Set the value of the color red with these dialog elements.
Blue Scroll Bar and Text Box
Set the value of the color blue with these dialog elements.
Green Scroll Bar and Text Box
Set the value of the color green with these dialog elements.
Windows Colors
Click on this command button if you want to use windows colors for the spectra
representation.
Fill Spectra Check Box
Mark this check box in order to fill the areas of the spectra underneath the spectral
lines. It is recommended to disable this check box for printer output.
Box with Sample Color
The appearance of the currently selected color is shown in this box.
Measurement Window Group Box
The settings made in this box affect the spectral representation during a
measurement in the Routine Dialog.
Grid Check Box
Mark this check box if a grid should be displayed.
R.O.I. Check Box
Mark this check box if the Regions Of Interest should be displayed.
Line Markers Check Box
Mark this check box if the line markers should be displayed. Select the line
markers after activating the Select Line Markers command button.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 119 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Select Line Markers Command Button

Click on this command button to open the Select Element dialog box. You can
select the elements for which the line markers will be displayed using the periodic
table of elements in this dialog box.
Automatic Range Switch Check Box
Mark this check box if you want the range automatically switched to smaller
number of channels. Enter the thresholds for the automatic range switch in the ½
Spectrum and ¼ Spectrum edit controls.
½ Spectrum Text Box
Enter the threshold for the automatic switch to half-spectrum-range in this text box.
¼ Spectrum Text Box
Enter the threshold for the automatic switch to quarter-spectrum-range in this text
box.
First Channel Text Box
Enter the first displayed channel of the spectral representation in this test box.
Valid entries lie in the range between 1 and 4031. The sum of this number and of
the selected number of channels must be less than or equal to 4097.
No. of Channels Drop-Down List Box
Select the number of channels in this drop-down list box. The entries are: 64, 128,
256, 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096. See First Channel text box for further restrictions.
Line Cursor Text Box
Enter the position of the line curser in this text box. The entry here must lie in the
range between the first channel and the last channel (first channal + number of
channels -1).
X-Axis Drop-Down List Box
Select the format of the X-Axis of the spectral representation in this drop-down list
box.Valid entries are: Channel Representation and Energy Representation.
Y-Axis Drop-Down List Box
Select the format of the Y-axis of the spectral representation in this drop-down list
box. Valid entries are: Logarithmic Representation, Linear Representation and
Square Root Representation.
OK Command Button
not stored.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 120 of 397
X-LabPro 5
6.3.15 Select Elements Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to select several elements or the respective line markers.
Click on the box for an element in order to select it. The different colors have the
following meanings:
This element can be analyzed with the spectrometer. The
element is not selected. Click on the element to select it.
element is selected. Click on the element to remove the
selection.
This element cannot be analyzed with the spectrometer. The
selection.
element cannot be selected at this time.
This element can be analyzed with the spectrometer.
However, the element cannot be selected at this time.
There is a blue triangle in the lower right corner of each box. Click on this triangle
and hold the mouse key pressed; detailed information about the selected element
is displayed in a dialog box.
Multiple elements can be selected in this dialog box. The current selections remain
until the selection is removed from them by clicking on them.
In addition to the periodic table this dialog box contains the following elements:
OK Command Button
Click on this command button to close the dialog box and accept the current
selection.
Click on this button to close the dialog box and cancel the procedure for selecting
multiple elements.
Suggest Command Button
This command button is only displayed when the dialog box is opened from the
dialogs for configuration of the printout. For print functions, all of the elements
between atomic number 1 and 92 can be selected. Click on this command button
to select the elements that have actually been calibrated in the respective method.
K-Shell Check Box
Mark this check box if the line markers for the K-shell for the last selected element
are to be displayed. The atomic number for the last selected element is displayed
in the Element text box.
L-Shell Check Box
Mark this check box if the line markers for the L-shell for the last selected element
M-Shell Check Box
Mark this check box if the line markers for the M-shell for the last selected element
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 121 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Element Text Box
Enter the atomic number for the element to be selected in this text box. Then click
on the Add or Remove command button to select or remove the selection from an
element.
Add Command Button
Click on this command button to add the element in the Element text box to the
selection.
Click on this command button to remove the element in the Element text box from
the selection.
Select All Command Button
Click on this command button to select all of the elements in the dialog box that
can be selected.
Delete All Command Button
Click on this command to remove all of the elements from the selection.
Help Command Button
Click on this command button to display this help text.
See also:
Spectral Representation Settings Dialog Box
Edit Deconvolution Method Dialog Box
Special Options for Standard Printing Dialog Box
Special Options for Multi List Dialog Box
Special Options for Special (Roche) DialogBox
Tools
6.3.16 Sample Settings Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to view and edit various settings for the samples. This
dialog box is opened with the Samples icon. The dialog box contains the following
elements:
Allowed Sample States Group Box
State and Sample Table
The possible sample states including its assignment to a sample type, diameter,
dilution material and the dilution factor is displayed in table.
Click on this command button to open the Sample State dialog box in order to
insert a new sample state into this list box.
Edit Command Button
Click on this command button to open the Sample State dialog box in order to
change the sample state currently selected in this list box.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 122 of 397
X-LabPro 5

Click on this command button to delete the sample state currently selected in the
list box.
OK Command Button
not stored.
6.3.17 Sample State Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to enter and edit a sample state and the assignment of a
state to a sample type. This dialog box is opened with the Insert or Edit command
button.
Sample State Name
Enter a name of the sample state in this text box.
Sample Type Drop-Down List Box
Select one of the sample type entries in order to assign your sample state to a
sample type. Valid sample types are: Pressed Tablet, Melt Tablet, Liquid, Layer,
Glass, Alloys, Other, Powder and Layer Thickness.
Sample Diameter Edit Field
Enter the sample diameter in mm in this edit field.
Dilution Material Drop-Down List Box
This list box contains all dilution materials from the library of standards. Select a
deilution material or "-" for no dilution material here.
Sample Mass Text Box
The sample mass (in g) can be changed in this text box.
Dilution Mass Text Box
The dilution mass (in g) can be changed in this text box.
Sum/Factor Text Box
The sum of the sample mass and the dilution factor can be changed in these text
boxes.
Edit sample mass and dilution mass Option Button
Select this option button in order to enter the sample and dilution masses. The
total mass and dilution factor will automatically be calculated.
Edit sum of mass and dilution factor Option Button
Select this option button in order to enter the total mass and dilution factor. The
sample and dilution masses will automatically be calculated.
OK Command Button
not stored.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 123 of 397
X-LabPro 5
6.3.18 Global Corrections Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to view and edit the standardization factors determined
during the global standardization. The calculation of the standardization factors is
normally performed automatically when a global standardization is conducted.
Target Drop-Down List Box
Select the target from which the intensity values will be displayed in the Intensities
table.
Intensities Group Box
The correction values for all elements in combination with the selected target is
shown in this table. This values can be edited in the edit fields in the ”correction”
column of the table.
In the both upper lines the correction factor for the coherent and the incoherent
back scatter intensities from the selected target position can be entered.
In the columns N, Symbol and Element the atomic numbers, atomic symbols and
the name of the element are displayed.
OK Command Button
not stored.
Click on this command button to set the correction values for the selected target to
the value "1".
6.3.19 MCA Recalibration Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to view and edit the settings for the detection electronics.
Selection Group Box
Peak Time and Gain Table
The possible combinations of peak time and gain are shown in this table. The
values are pre-setted and depend on the used instrument and detector.
Settings Group Box
Use Settings Check Box
This check box will only be available in service mode.
Max. Energy Difference Edit Control
The value in this edit control depends on the used instrument and will only be
available in service mode.
Resolution Limit Text Box

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 124 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Zero Peak Energy Text Box

Optimal Target Group Box
Secondary/Compton and Barkla/Crystall Option Buttons
Select with this option buttons the best target for the selected combination of peak
time and gain .
Name Drop-Down Listbox
This drop-down listbox will be shown, if you select Barkla/Crystal as optimal target.
Choose a target name in this drop-down list box.
Combinations: Element Text Box, PSE Command Button and Display Field
This combination of dialog elements will be shown, if you selected Barkla/Cristal
as optimal target. The element for the target material can be chosen with this
combination of dialog elements. Use either the text box to enter the atomic number
or the PTE command button to select an element using the periodic table of
elements. The Select Element dialog box is opened when the PTE command
button is chosen. The name of the selected element is displayed in the display
field.
Global Group Box
Dead Time Correction Text Box
This text box will be only available in service mode.
Processing an impulse in an energy dispersive spectrometer requires a certain
amount of time. During processing of the impulse, the measuring channel is
blocked for additional impulses; this results in a dead time.
The impulse processing capacity, limited by this, results in dead time effects that
must be taken into consideration during spectral evaluation.
In the SPECTRO X-LAB, the dead time is determined using the zero peak. The
zero peak is generated by opening a gate for noise impulses at the entrance to the
ADC. To do this, the amplifier input is scanned with a set clock frequency. The
gate at the ADC input is only opened when there is no impulse to be measured at
the time of scanning. The dead time can be calculated by comparing the number
of scans with the number of processed noise impulses.
An error of < 1% results for the correction of dead times up to 70% using this
method.
Min. Peak Height Text Box
Sigma Min. Peak Height Text Box
Max Energy Shift Edit Control

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 125 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Results Group Box

The values in this text boxes represent the results of a MCA Recalibration und will
be automatically updated after a new calibration.
Click on this command button, to reset the calibration constants to the standard
settings.
Calibration Peaks Group Box
Number of Calibration Peaks Drop-Down List
Select the number of calibration peaks in this drop-down list box. The same
number of element text boxes and channel text boxes will be editable.
Combinations: Element Text Box, PSE Command Button and Display Field
The element for the target material can be chosen with this combination of dialog
elements. Use either the text box to enter the atomic number or the PTE command
button to select an element using the periodic table of elements. The Select
Element dialog box is opened when the PTE command button is chosen. The
name of the selected element is displayed in the display field.
Channel Text Boxes
Enter the channel for the selected element in this text box.
OK Command Button
not stored.
6.3.20 Select Elements Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to select several elements or the respective line markers.
Click on the box for an element in order to select it. The different colors have the
following meanings:
selection.
selection.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 126 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Multiple elements can be selected in this dialog box. The current selections remain
until the selection is removed from them by clicking on them.
In addition to the periodic table this dialog box contains the following elements:
OK Command Button
selection.
multiple elements.
Suggest Command Button
This command button is only displayed when the dialog box is opened from the
dialogs for configuration of the printout. For print functions, all of the elements
between atomic number 1 and 92 can be selected. Click on this command button
to select the elements that have actually been calibrated in the respective method.
K-Shell Check Box
Mark this check box if the line markers for the K-shell for the last selected element
L-Shell Check Box
Mark this check box if the line markers for the L-shell for the last selected element
M-Shell Check Box
Mark this check box if the line markers for the M-shell for the last selected element
Element Text Box
Enter the atomic number for the element to be selected in this text box. Then click
on the Add or Remove command button to select or remove the selection from an
element.
Add Command Button
Click on this command button to add the element in the Element text box to the
selection.
Click on this command button to remove the element in the Element text box from
the selection.
Select All Command Button
Click on this command button to select all of the elements in the dialog box that
can be selected.
Delete All Command Button
Click on this command to remove all of the elements from the selection.
Help Command Button

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 127 of 397
X-LabPro 5
See also:
Spectral Representation Settings Dialog Box
Special Options for Standard Printing Dialog Box
Special Options for Multi List Dialog Box
Special Options for Special (Roche) DialogBox
Tools
6.3.21 Evaluation Dialog Box

In this dialog box parameters depending on your instument will be shown. These
parameters can only be changed in service mode.
6.3.22 Data Transmission Dialog Box

This dialog is only shown if the optionally available data transmission is activated
in service mode.
Format Drop-Down List Box:
Select the used data transmission protocol in this drop-down list box.
Data Path Text Box with Command Button
You can select a directory for the automatic data storage by clicking this command
button. The filename of the data can be edited in the specified method.
Transmission Program Text Box with Command Button
You can select a program sending the stored data by clicking this command
button.
OK Command Button
not stored.
6.3.23 Users and Passwords
6.3.24 User Management Dialog Box

This dialog box is used by the supervisor to manage user information. Up to 16
users with up to 4 different user levels can be entered here. The user
management function enables the control of access to the analytical system when
there are multiple users. The user levels can be setup so that the users assigned
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 128 of 397
X-LabPro 5
to the different user levels have access only to certain functions for the analytical
system. The dialog box is opened with the User management menupoint in the
Tools menu. The dialog box contains the following elements:
Users must enter a username and password to use X-LabPro Check Box
Activate this check box if you want the X-LabPro Login dialog box to be displayed
when the program is started. This enables access control to the system. If this
check box is deactivated, then the user does not need to login when the program
is started. The first user entered is automatically selected as the user. This user
then automatically has the same access rights as a supervisor.
Allow delete only in Supervisor Mode Check Box
Activate this check box if you want that deletion of sample or spectra data is only
possible in the supervisor mode. In all other modes in the job, routine and spectra
window it is not possible to delete any data of measured samples.
User data List Box
A list of all of the defined users is displayed in this list box. Up to 16 users can be
entered here. There must be at least one user entered and this must be in position
1. This user must be assigned to the supervisor user level even if user
management is deactivated. Additional users may be defined as required.
Add Command Button
Click on this command button to open the Edit User Data dialog box for creating a
new user.
Click on this command button to delete the currently selected user from the list.
Properties Command Button
Click on this command button to open the Edit User Data dialog box. The data for
an entered user can be changed, or if an empty position has been selected, a new
user can be entered.
Your User Data Group Box
The data for the currently logged in user is shown in this group box. This includes
the login name, the complete user name and the assigned user level.
Save + OK Command Button
not stored.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 129 of 397
X-LabPro 5
6.3.25 User Levels

The usage of the software contains of several user levels to do justice to the
demands of the different users and if necessary to restrict the access to some
functions.
Maximally 16 users can be subordinated with the following user levels:
Routine The routine user can only have access to the Routine Dialog, not
User to the main program. This is the lowest user level.
Level 3 The level 3 user can only have access to the routine window. He
User can create new amples, make measurements and analyze but not
delete them. For this user level can be fixed a password but it isn´t
necessary.
Level 2 The level 2 user can additionally to the possibilities of the level 3
User user also access to the job and the spectra window. He has the
possibility to delete samples and to print results in form of reports.
Level 1 The level 1 user has access to all windows but in the method
User window he can only edit non-protected samples or the ones he
creates himself.
Supervisor The supervisor has access to all windows and all options and
functions. Only the from Spectro delivered methods can´t be
edited by him.
6.3.26 Recalibration Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to define the sample plate settings for the different types of
recalibrations. The recalibration sample plates defined in this dialog will be used
as a default setting in the Routine Dialog.
When using the recalibration menu points in the Routine Dialog, the Routine
Dialog will create a new sample plate document containing automatically new
replicated recalibration sample data. E.g. the description of the MCA recalibration
will contain more details.
Recalibration Tab Control
The type of recalibration (e.g. global recalibration, MCA, intercept recalibration,
method recalibration) for which you want to define, edit or view the recalibration
sample plate data can be selected here.
Sample Plate Drop Down List Box
Select the sample plate size for the selected recalibration here.
Recalibration Sample Table
The table contains a representation of the sample plate.
If you want to define a new reclibration sample on the plate, click the button in
the line numbered as the sample position where you want to place the sample.
The Select Sample Dialog Box opens, pre-setted with the method you selected for
the respective recalibration sample plate. Select the sample you want to place.
Note: You must select the reference samples here. New recalibration samples will
automatically be created by the Routine Dialog like described above..
If you want to delete a recalibration sample from the selected recalibration plate,
use the button.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 130 of 397
X-LabPro 5
OK Command Button
not stored.
6.3.27 Bond Classes Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to view and edit bond classes. This dialog box is opened
with the Bonds icon.
Bond Classes Tab Control
Each page of this tab control contains a defined bond class. You can add, edit or
delete bond classes. The name of the page shows the name of the bond class.
The table that is displayed on a page contains the chemical bond data. Click on
the edit button in each row to open the edit chemical bond dialog box for editing a
bond class. In this dialog you can edit the chemical bond data.
New Command Button
Click on this command button to open the New Bond Class dialog box. In this
dialog you can enter a name for a new bond class. Use the Use Base check box to
derive your bond class from an existing one. The new register card with the bond
class name will be inserted into the tab control.
Edit Command Button
Click on this command button to open the New Bond Class dialog box. In this
dialog you can change the name for a new bond class. The name of the tab
control page will be changed.
Click on this command button to delete the currently selected bonds class. The
register card will be removed from the tab control.
OK Command Button
not stored.
6.3.28 Foils Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to view and edit the composition of different foils. This
dialog box is opened with the Foils icon.
Foils Table
This table contains all defined foil compositions.
New Command Button
Click on this command button to open the Edit foil dialog box in order to insert a
new foil composition.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 131 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Edit Command Button

Click on this command button to open the Edit foil dialog box in order to edit the
current selected foil composition.
Click on this command button to open the Edit foil dialog box in order to delete the
current selected foil composition.
OK Command Button
not stored.
7 Library of Atomic Data
7.1 Using the Library of Atomic Data
7.1.1 Items of the client area

The data stored in the library of atomic data is displayed in the Library of Atomic
Data. This data is used as the basis for evaluations.
The dialog box for display of the data stored in the library of atomic data is divided
into the following display regions:
General information about the selected element is displayed in this group box.
These parameters are: Atomic Number, Atomic mass, Name, Symbol, Melting
Point, Density, Valence, electronic Structure.
It is possible to select an element directly be entering the atomic number in the
atomic number edit control.
Mass Absorption Coefficient Group Box
The mass absorbtion coefficient depending on the absorbing element can be
calculated in this dialog box. To calculate the mass absorbtion coefficient, edit the
energy that will be absorbed and select the absorber element.
Line Energies Group Box
The line energies of the lines for the selected element are shown in a Spread table
in this group box. This data is not stored for all elements. To edit the current
selection in the supervisor level, click into the specific field to edit the values.
Coster-Kronig Rates Group Box
The Coster-Kronig rates for the selected element are shown in a spread table in
this group box. To edit the current selection in the supervisor level, click into the
specific field to edit the value.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 132 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Discontinuity Energies and Fluorescent Yields Group Box

The discontinuity energies, the discontinuity ratios and the fluorescent yields for
the selected element are shown in a spread table in this group box. To edit the
current selection in the supervisor level, double click into the specific field to edit
the value.
Scattering Group Box
This group box contains data for scattering
Atomic Form Factor, Scatter Amplitude, Coherent and Incoherent Collision
Cross Sectiones are physical values to quantify the scattering of X-rays on
matter.
7.1.2 Parameters Dialog Box

This dialog box shows the polymom parameters to calculate the mass absorption
coefficient. It will be opened by clicking the parameter command button and
contains the following dialog elements:
Parameters to calculate the Mass Absorption Coefficient Table
In this table you can edit seleted values.
OK Command Button
Click on this command button to close the dialog box. The element displayed in
the marked line of the list box will be selected.
Click on this button to closed the dialog box and cancel the search for lines.
7.1.3 Select Element Dialog Box

This dialog box is used to select an element. Click on the box for an element in
order to select it. The different colors have the following meanings:
selection.
selection.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 133 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Only one element can be selected in this dialog box. A previous selection is
automatically removed when a new element is selected.
In addition to the periodic table of elements, the dialog box contains the following
elements:
OK Command Button
selection.
an element.
Element Text Box
Enter the atomic number for the element to be selected then click on the Select
command button to confirm the selection.
Select Command Button
Click on this command button to select the element displayed in the element list
box or to remove the selection if it is already selected.
Help Command Button
See also:
Library of Atomic Data Dialog Box
Target Position Parameters Dialog Box
Absorption Discontinuity Dialog Box
Average Atomic Number Calibration Dialog Box
Calibration, Compton/Empirical Dialog Box
Calibration, Fundamental Parameters Dialog Box
Select Elements (Calibration) Dialog Box
Edit Element Bonds Dialogbox
Edit Method Data Dialog Box
Method Development (Calibration Line)
7.1.4 Search for Element Dialog Box

This dialog box enables you to select an element whose line energies lie within a
given energy range. Confirm the search to select the element in the marked line of
the list box which shows you the results of the search. This dialog box is opened
with the Search menupoint (Element menu) or with the button in the toolbar.
The dialog box contains the following elements.
Line Energy Text Box
Enter the energy value for any lines for which you want to search in this text box.
Valid entries lie in the range between 0 and 150 keV.
Search Range Text Box
Enter a value that defines the search range in this text box. All lines in the range of
the line energy ± the entered value are then displayed in the list box described
below.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 134 of 397
X-LabPro 5
List Box with the Located Lines

All of the lines that are stored in the library of atomic data for the selected range
are displayed in this list box. Double-Click (or click the OK button) on a line in
order to select the element for the XLAdLib representation.
Repeat Command Button
Click on this command button to repeat the search after making changes to the
settings for the line energy or the search range. The list box with the located lines
is updated.
OK Command Button
Click on this command button to close the dialog box. The element displayed in
the marked line of the list box will be selected.
Click on this button to closed the dialog box and cancel the search for lines.
7.2 Menu Commands
7.2.1 Library of atomic data

The library of atomic data XLAdLib is a new module of the X-LabPro 2.3 software
package to view the atomic data. The atomic data is the basis for evaluation on
your X-LabPro system.
Moreover, XLAdLib gives you the possibility to calculate the mass absorption
coefficient.
Menu overview
File Menu
Element Menu
View Menu
Help Menu

Exit
Use this command to end your XLAdLib session. You can also use the Close
command on the application Control menu.
Shortcuts
Mouse: Double-click the application's Control menu button.
Keys: ALT+F4

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 135 of 397
X-LabPro 5
7.2.3 Commands in the Element Menu

Next
Select the next element. The atomic number will be increased.
Previous
Select the previous element. The atomic number will be decreased.
Select
Opens the Periodic Table dialog box.
Search
Opens the Search for Element dialog box.

Toolbar
some of the most common commands in XLAdLib. A check mark appears next to
the menu item when the toolbar is displayed.
Statusbar
Use this command to display and hide the Status Bar, which describes the action
to be executed by the selected menu item or depressed toolbar button, and
keyboard latch state. A check mark appears next to the menu item when the
Status Bar is displayed.

The help menu contents the following commands which will assist you by using
this application:
Contents
Select this menupoint to display a table of contents for the help system for the X-
LABPro program. In the help system, select the Contents command button below
the menuline to show the table of contents.
Context Sensitive
Concept
Select this menupoint to display a table of contents for concepts. The physical and
technical principles for using the X-LAB energy dispersive x-ray fluorescence
spectrometer are described in this section.
Software
Select this menupoint to display a table of contents for the software description.
Use of the operation and control software for the X-LAB energy dispersive x-ray
fluorescence spectrometer is described in this section.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 136 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Procedures
Select this menupoint to display a table of contents for the procedures. Instructions
for commonly used procedures when working with the X-LAB energy dispersive x-
ray fluorescence spectrometer are given in this section.
Shortcuts
About XLAdLib
Show the version and copyrights of XLAdLib.
7.2.6 Commands in the Control Menu

Restore
Use this command to return the active window to its size and position before you
chose the Maximize or Minimize command.
Move
Use this command to display a four-headed arrow so you can move the active
window or dialog box with the arrow keys.

Size
Use this command to display a four-headed arrow so you can size the active
window with the arrow keys.
After the pointer changes to the four-headed arrow:

Press one of the DIRECTION keys (left, right, up, or down arrow key) to move the
pointer to the border you want to move.
Press a DIRECTION key to move the border.
Press ENTER when the window is the size you want.
Shortcut
Mouse: Drag the size bars at the corners or edges of the window.
Minimize
Use this command to reduce the XLCedi window to an icon.
Shortcut
Mouse: Click the minimize icon on the title bar.
Maximize
Use this command to enlarge the active window to fill the available space.
Shortcut
Mouse: Click the maximize icon on the title bar; or double-click the title bar.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 137 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Close
Use this command to close the active window or dialog box.
Clicking the Close icon and double-clicking the Control menu icon is the same
as choosing the Close command.
Note: If you have multiple windows open for a single document, the Close
command on the document Control menu closes only one window at a time. You
can close all windows at once with the Close command on the File menu.
Shortcuts
Keys: CTRL+F4 closes a document window
7.3 Other
7.3.1 Status Bar
The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the XLAdLib window. To display or
hide the status bar, use the Status Bar command in the View menu.
the toolbar button.
down:
7.3.2 Toolbar
bar. The toolbar provides quick mouse access to many tools used in XLAdLib.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 138 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Click To
Click on this toolbar button to view the information for the element with
the next lower atomic number. The last element is shown again once the
first element has been reached.
Click on this toolbar button to view the information for the element with
the next higher atomic number. The first element is shown again once the
last element (atomic number 105) has been reached.
Click on this command button to select an element using a representation
of the periodic table of elements. The Select Element dialog box opens.
Click on this command button to search an elementby entering a line
energy range. The Search for Element dialog box opens.
Display the online help.
7.3.3 Scroll bars

Displayed at the right and bottom edges of the document window. The scroll boxes
inside the scroll bars indicate your vertical and horizontal location in the document.
You can use the mouse to scroll to other parts of the document.
7.3.3.1 Title Bar
application.
The Titel Bar contains the following command buttons:
Exit command button
Maximize command button
Minimize command button

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 139 of 397
X-LabPro 5
8 Hot Keys
In the different windows, the program offers "hot keys". These enable some of the
program functions to be started directly with key combinations. The following hot
keys are available:
General Hot Keys
Special Hot Keys for Method Administration
See also:
Toolbar
8.1 General Hot Keys

The hot keys that can be used in X-LabPro 5 are listed in the following table:
Key(s) Description
F1 Display context sensitive help
F9 Activate/open Job window
F10 Activate/open the Routine Dialog
F11 Activate/open Spectra window
F12 Activate/open window for Method
Development
Alt+F4 Exit Program
Alt+F12 Open dialog box with periodic table
Ctrl+F4 Close window
Ctrl+F6 Next window
Shift+F1 Display Table of Contents for Help
Delete Delete sample(s)/sample position
Shift+Delete Cut sample(s) and copy to clipboard
Ctrl-Insert Copy sample(s) to clipboard
Shift-Insert Insert sample(s) from clipboard
Shift+F5 Cascade open windows
Shift+F6 Tile open windows
See also:
Hot Keys

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 140 of 397
X-LabPro 5
8.2 Job Manager Shortcuts

Shortcuts of the Job Manager window are listed in the following table:
Key(s) Description
Ctrl+A Mark all standard samples in the list
Ctrl+C Copy standard sample(s) into clipboard
Ctrl+Ins Copy standard sample(s) into clipboard
Ctrl+V Paste standard sample(s)
Shift+Ins Paste standard sample(s)
Ctrl+D Paste standard sample(s) with data
Shift+Ctrl+Ins Paste standard sample(s) with data
Del Delete selected standard sample(s)
Ctrl+P Print selected standard sample(s)
F1 Open the online help
F2 Edit standard sample
Ctrl+F4 Close active job window
Ctrl+Q Close active job window
Ctrl+O Open job
F7 Evaluate standard sample(s)
F11 Open selected standard sample(s) in the Spectra Viewer
8.3 Shortcuts
The following shortcuts can be used in the Routine Dialog:
Key Description
F1 Shows help topics for the Routine Dialog.
Alt + F4 Closes the active document.
Ctrl + N Opens a new document.
Ctrl + F6 Switches to the next document window.
Del Deletes the selected area of the table.
Ctrl + X or Cuts the selected elements from the table and adds them to
Shift + Del the clipboard.
Ctrl + C Copies the selected elements of the table to the clipboard.
Ctrl + V or Pastes the contents of the clipboard to the table.
Shift + Ins
Ctrl + Left Navigate in table cell (only if activated).
Ctrl + Right

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 141 of 397
X-LabPro 5
8.4 Method Administration Shortcuts

Shortcuts of the Method Administration window are listed in the following table:
Key(s) Description
Ctrl+A Mark all standard samples in the list
Ctrl+C Copy standard sample(s) into clipboard
Ctrl+Ins Copy standard sample(s) into clipboard
Ctrl+V Paste standard sample(s)
Shift+Ins Paste standard sample(s)
Ctrl+D Paste standard sample(s) with data
Shift+Ctrl+Ins Paste standard sample(s) with data
Del Delete selected standard sample(s)
Ctrl+P Print selected standard sample(s)
F1 Open the online help
F2 Edit standard sample
Ctrl+F4 Close active method window
F5 Update standards list
Ctrl+F5 Update tree
F7 Evaluate standard sample(s)
F11 Open selected standard sample(s) in the Spectra Viewer

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 142 of 397
X-LabPro 5
X-LABPro 5 General Tutorial

9 Application guide
Additives in oil/lubricants
Application: Check for the elements Na – Zn in oil
Sample prep.: Pouring liquid into sample cup
Precision: 1-3 %
LOD: Depends on elements
Quantification: Fundamental parameters
Fuels
Application: Check for S
Sample prep.: Pouring liquid into sample cup
Precision: 1-3 %
LOD: < 1 ppm
Minerals/Geology/Slags/Ceramics
Application: Check for main components
Sample prep.: Fusions
Precision: 0.2 %
LOD: Depends on elements
Fundamental parameters or alpha
Quantification:
coefficients
Application: Check for trace elements

Sample prep.: Pellets
Precision: 1-10 %
LOD: > 0.2 ppm
Fundamental parameters or empirical
Quantification:
method
Metals
Analysis of metals of a defined matrix
Application:
(like brass, steel...)
Sample prep.: Polishing surface
Precision: 1-3 %
LOD: > 100 ppm

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 143 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Ferro alloys
Application: Check for main components
Sample prep.: Pellets
Precision: 1-3 %
LOD: > 100 ppm
Quantification: Empirical calibration
Remark: Ferroalloys show strong particle size effects. Therefore, standards must
represent the same grain size effects as the samples do.
Caused to that no international standards can be used for calibration.
Food
Na, Mg, P, Cl, K, Ca, Fe, Zn in
Application:
milkpowder
Sample prep.: Pellets, powders in sample cups
Precision: 1-5 %
LOD: > 0.5 ppm
Fundamental parameters or empirical
Quantification:
methods

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 144 of 397
X-LabPro 5
10 Sample Preparation
10.1 Sample Preparation for Liquids

If a homogenous liquid sample like water or oil / gasoline should be measured, it
can be poured into a cuvette.
Important note:
The weights are approximated values! It is not necessary to reach exactly 4.000 g.
It is sufficient to weigh between 3.8 g and 4.2 g (5 % deviation) and to enter the
correct weight in the Routine Dialog.
To analyze polyphased liquids (liquid/liquid or solid/liquid) or high volatile liquids
it is recommended to use 4 g (plus-minus 5 %) of a homogenized mixture,
prepared taking 6 g sample and 2 g charcoal (Merck)
(weights = plus-minus 5 %).
This mixture can be measured in the next step.
10.2 Sample Preparation for Powder Samples

Prepare a sample cup with powder.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 145 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Approx. 4 g of a powder ground down to e.g.< 63 µm is poured into a cuvette.

The bottom of the cuvette is covered by a 4 µm Prolene foil.
After pouring the powder will be slightly pressed with a pistil to form a good
surface to avoid any cavities or pores at the bottom.
Important note:
The weights are approximated weights! It is not necessary to reach exactly 4.000
g.
It is sufficient to weigh between 3.8 g and 4.2 g (5 % deviation) and to enter the
exact weight in the Routine Dialog.
10.3 Sample Preparation for Liquids / Powders

Sample type: Liquids / Powders
Additives: None
Preparation utilities: Sample cup (outer diameter 32 mm), Prolene foil (4 µm
thickness)
Most sample cups are built from

three parts: snap-on-ring (1), lid (2)
and cell (3).
Cover cell (3) with film.

Recommendation: 4µm
Polypropylene film.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 146 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Click snap-on-ring (1) over the

prolene foil and cell (3). Surface
should be flat and smooth (no
wrinkles). After placing the snap-
on-ring never overstretch the foil,
because this would change the
thickness.
Cut foil.
Place the sample cup on a

balance. 4 g of liquid is poured into
the sample cup.
Please use a weighing paper, to

prevent contamination.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 147 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Close the sample cup with the lid

(2). Label the sample. Leave the
sample for some time (1 minute
minimum is recommended) on a
sheet of clean paper to check for
leakage.
10.4 Sample Preparation for Pellets

The most common sample preparation for solid samples is a pressed pellet.
Approx. 4 g of a powder (e.g. < 63 µm) is homogenized with approx. 0.9 g of

Hoechst Wax C and pressed to a 32 mm pellet or a 40 mm pellet.
Sample: Powder
Additives: Hoechst Wax C, Binder Licowax C
Preparation Mill
Utilities: Container for grinding and mixing
Die (diameter 32 or 40 mm)
Important note:
The weights are approximated values (3.8 g - 4.2 g and 0.85 g - 0.95 g,
respectively)! Enter the exact values in the Routine Dialog.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 148 of 397
X-LabPro 5
10.5 Preparation of Pressed Powder Pellets in Rings

Some powders may require pressing to insure that the bulk density of the samples
is reproducible. If elements like Na and Mg need to be analyzed with highest
sensitivity, the powdered samples need to be prepared as pressed pellets or as
fused beads.
In case of a pressed pellet the powder can either be pressed directly or a binding
material is added.
To achieve highest stability of the pressed pellets and to get best possible
precision of the sample preparation procedure it is recommended to press the
samples into 40 mm (1.57”) steel rings.
Weigh 5 (± 0.1) g of pulverized
sample material (optimum grain
size < 60 µm) into a mixing
beaker and add 1 (±0.05) g of
binder Clariant Licowax C
(HWC). Note all weighs because
these have to be entered into the
software when analysing the
sample.
Add two Polyamide balls

(diameter 7-10 mm) into the
mixing vessel.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 149 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Use a blender or mixer mill at

40- 60 % speed for 3 (±0.5)
minutes to create a
homogeneous mixture.
Prepare all parts of the die and

make sure, that all parts are
clean and dry.
Put the outer part of the die on

the bottom part of the die.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 150 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Press the outer part down as

much as possible.
Insert of the pressing plate

(shining side to the top) into the
die and make sure that this has
moved to the bottom of the inner
hole.
Insert a reusable steel ring into

the die and make sure, that this
has moved to the top of the
pressing plate.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 151 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Insert the longer steel-tube into

the die and onto the steel ring.
Remove the two Polyamide balls

out of the mixing beaker.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 152 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Fill the sample-mixture carefully

into the die and make sure, that
a relatively plane surface is
achieved on the top side.
Hold the steel tube with two

fingers and insert the pressing
cylinder into the die carefully.
Put the die into a press and

press the content into a pellet at
a pressure of 10 - 25 t.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 153 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Hold the pressure for 20 - 30 s.
Release the pressure and

remove the die from the press.
Remove the bottom of the die

and press the die to the table as
long as the pressing plate and
the sample steel ring become
visible.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 154 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Remove the pressing plate, the

steel ring with the pressed pellet.
Take out the steel tube and the

pressing cylinder as well.
Clean all parts of the die
carefully else with Iso-Propanol
or a mixture of cleaning agent.
Dry all parts carefully after
cleaning and store them in a dry,
dust-free environment.
Place the pressed pellet with the

steel ring on the precision
sample tray.
The combination of this sample
preparation technique together
with the precision plate offers the
highest grade of stable,
reproducible sample preparation
for pressed pellets with highest
accuracy of sample positioning
in the analyzer.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 155 of 397
X-LabPro 5
10.6 Sample Preparation for Fused Beads
After the mixture is prepared and possible additives like nitrates for preoxidations
were added prepare a bead as shown in the following picture.
Sample: Powder
Additives: Lithiumtetraborate or other borates, wetting agent
Preparation Utilities: Platinum/Gold crucible and mould
Fusion machine or furnace
The sample material must be dried and milled to a grain size below e.g. 63 µm.
Approx. 0.7 g of the powder is homogenized with around 6.0 g of
Lithiumtetraborate and then fused at 1100 °C to form a bead. As standard
procedure 10 minutes fusion time should be sufficient.
Depending on the material and the fusion machine time and temperature may
vary.
Also, for some materials a preoxidation can be necessary. Especially Sulfur
present in sulfidic form is very sensitive against too high temperatures and it tends
to evaporate. To avoid this, a preoxidation (for example with Nitrates) can help.
Another possibility is the use of different borate like Tetraborate-Metaborate-
Mixture, which melts at around 950 °C.
In some cases it is obligatory to reduce the sample amount down to 0.2 g. If a lot
of fusion remains in the crucible the use of a wetting agent (e.g. NH4I) can be
necessary.
Note: There are some materials which may destroy your Pt/Au crucible.
The most dangerous ones are all kind of metals, especially elemental silicon,
boron or iron.
Also, carbides are dangerous.
Important note:
The weights are approximated values! It is not necessary to reach exactly 0.70 g
and 6.00 g, respectively.
It is enough to weigh between 0.65 g and 0.75 g (5 % deviation) and 5.7 g - 6.3 g,
respectively, and to enter the exact weight in the Routine Dialog.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 156 of 397
X-LabPro 5
11 Measuring a sample - The Routine Dialog

All measurements are initialized from the routine dialog. To
open the Routine Dialog
select the following symbol in the icon bar or use the X-
LabPro Communication Server.
As an example the foregoing picture shows the Routine Dialog for the SPECTRO
iQII comprising three different parts:
- The left part of the screen shows either a spectum.
- The right part shows a table presenting the results of the measured sample or,
as shown in the screenshot above, the sample plate as spreadsheet.
- The bottom part shows the control buttons to start or stop the measurement and
a presentation of the actual logfile.
To configure the Routine Dialog, use the section Routine Dialog in the
Configuration Editor.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 157 of 397
X-LabPro 5
11.1 Configure Routine Dialog

The Routine Diakog is the user interface to use the X-LabPro software for daily
work.
The configuration of the Routine Dialog is handled from the Configuration Editor.
Start the Configuration Editor from the X-LabPro Communication Server.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 158 of 397
X-LabPro 5
If a Supervisor is logged-in, the settings for the Routine Dialog can be reached
with the corresponding icon.
The first tab (Presets) allows to define some parameters like:
- Preset Method Class
- Sample Plate (number of samples - if available)
- Locked Positions (of a sample tray)
- The suggested Job Name (Job Number)
Several Method Classes can be created using the second tab:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 159 of 397
X-LabPro 5
A method can be assigned to a method class (third tab).

That's an important step, because only methods belong to a method class can
be used in Routine Dialog!
For other instruments, which use a table instead of the result screen, the Columns
can be selected:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 160 of 397
X-LabPro 5
On a sample tray some positions can be locked (right tab).

This can be done to ensure that no liquid sample in position 1 can be forgotten in
the instrument.
11.2 Routine Dialog

All measurements are initialized from the Routine Dialog.
To open the Routine Dialog select the following symbol in the icon bar
or use the X-LabPro Communication Server.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 161 of 397
X-LabPro 5
As described before, the Routine Dialog comprises three different parts:

- At the left the presentation of the spectra of the actual measurement is shown.
- The right part shows the sample information.
- At the bottom the control buttons to start or stop the measurement are placed,
together with a presentation of the actual logfile.
To create a new sample define a sample name and a related job name and select
a method.
Normally, all settings (like available methods) are defined in the right way.
Whether a job can be selected depends on the configuration of the software,
because there are different options:
A job name will be created automatically by the software (e.g. the actual week) or
the name of the job can be edited.
If a method is missing, please ask your supervisor to adjust it, using the
Each sample needs a name, a method and a job as a description. The name does
not have to be unique but it should help identifying the samples. By selecting a
method the measurement conditions and the sample type are preset to the default
settings of this method. To change the selected Method or Job use the respective
drop-down menu.
Jobs are the different sub-directories for your database. Similar to folders on your
hard disk they help you to organize your measurements.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 162 of 397
X-LabPro 5
By selecting a method the default values of the Method will be displayed. The
details like sample weightes and diameter can be edited if needed.
Now it is possible to create additional samples on different positions or to start the
measurement. To start the measurement click Start.
Depending on the selected method, the samples will be measured in vacuum, with
gas flush or in air. Whenever the samples shall be measured either with vacuum
or gas flush a warning message will pop up on the screen to inform you about this
measurement condition. Never run liquids in vacuum to prevent harm to your
instrument. If you are sure about the measurement conditions confirm with Yes
and the measurement will begin. Selecting No will cancel the entire measurement.
An additional message will inform about a protection foil, if the last one is defined
in the selected method.
While the measurement is running, the screen looks like the following one.
It is possible to use the Spectra Viewer Tool-Box, e.g. to identify peaks in the
spectrum.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 163 of 397
X-LabPro 5
At the end of the measurement

(depending, whether a sample
cup for liquids or powders was
used or not), an additional
message will appear:
After the measurement is completed, the results will be shown (two pictures
above). To start a new measurement, use New (right side of the sample name) or
paste the sample from Job/Method using the clipboard.
The SPECTRO iQ also allows the use of a Easy user interface, which is even
easier to handle:
Simulation Mode
There are two situations, when software starts the Simulation Mode:
1. If no instrument could be detected (Instrument off or not connected)
2. If the Simulation Mode ist selected manually.
The Simulation Mode allows to simulate a measurement without an instrument

(e.g. on exhibitions). Doing this a set of stored spectra will grow in the Routine
Dialog and it looks like a real measurement. Please note that these spectra are
just simulated and do not show the samples placed into the instrument. Therefore,
a messagebox will inform you during the start of the Routine Dialog, if the
Simulation Mode is activated.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 164 of 397
X-LabPro 5
12 Printing results
The layout of the output is defined in the method.
To print results select the Print... option from the pull-down menu File or select the
printer symbol in the icon bar or enable the Direct Print option in the lower left part
of Routine.
Various printing options can be selected as shown in the screen below.
In the same window it is possible to change the layout for the selected print job.
Modifications will not affect the default settings of the method.
To get a first impression, it is

possible to display a preview
before printing by selecting Print
Preview in the file pull-down
menu.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 165 of 397
X-LabPro 5
12.1 Output
The tab Output is used to select the elements, which should be printed / shown on
the screen.
In addition, that's the place to define, whether bonds should be used, whether the
elements should have a special Order, and to select the Output Units for each
element separately.
12.2 Print Preview

The feature Print Preview as part of the file menu allows getting an impression of
the printout before printing.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 166 of 397
X-LabPro 5

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 167 of 397
X-LabPro 5
13 Working with jobs

The Job Manager is a tool to organize the measured samples. The jobs are
comparable to subdirectories or folders. In each job the software can handle up to
1000 samples. How to sort the samples in different jobs is up to the user.
To work with jobs select the Job Manager... option from the X-LabPro menu.
In the left part, all available jobs are shown and you have access to the general
information for each job.
At the right side, a list of all samples in the selected job is shown.
To create a new job select the New... button in the Job menu.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 168 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Whenever a new job is created, a window will pop up to edit the name and other
information for the new job.
As default entries for the new job the settings of the job selected before will be
used as template.
Change the Name of Job to the desired new name.
In addition to the Name of Job and Description, further information can be edited.
This additional information might be the address of a customer (especially if only
samples for a specific customer are stored in a specific job) and a comment. If you
select the coversheet option in the print options dialogue the coversheet will
contain this information.
Confirm the settings of the new job by selecting the OK button.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 169 of 397
X-LabPro 5
14 The Recycle Bin

An additional feature in X-LabPro is the Recycle Bin.
It allows to "undelete" samples, which were erased
before.
If a sample is deleted, it will not be erased completely. Instead of erasing, the
sample is moved into a special job - the Recycle Bin.
If the deleting was made by mistake, the sample can be moved back to its orignal
place, where it was stored before deleting.
This only works, if the respective method still exists!
15 Configuration Editor
The Configuration Editor can be used to edit a lot of parameters of X-Labpro.
Several of them describe SPECTRO inhouse instrument details and therefore they
are write-protected.
15.1 User Management

To restrict the access on data and methods by unauthorized persons, it is possible
to equip the software with a login procedure.
The user names, user rights and passwords are handled by the User
Management, which can be entered in the Configuration Editor by Users and
Passwords.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 170 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Up to 16 users with individual authorization levels are possible. The limitations of

the different user levels are listed at the end of this page.
With the Properties... button it is possible to change the settings for an existing
user.
New users are inserted by using the Add... button. Then the Login Name, the
Name (not necessary) and the Password can be edited. The password has to be
confirmed by retyping under Retype Password. Finally the User Level has to be
assigned.
Non-supervisors have no access to the User Management.
The limitations of the different user levels:

A maximum of 16 users can be subordinated with the following user levels:
Routine User The Routine User has only access to the Routine Dialog and not to
the main program. This is the lowest user level
Level 3 User The Level 3 User has only access to the Routine window. He can
create new samples, make measurements and analyze samples,
but cannot delete them. For this user level a password can be fixed
but it isn´t necessary.
Level 2 User Additionally to the possibilities of the Level 3 user, the Level 2 User
also has access to the job and the spectra window. He has the
possibility to delete samples and to print results in form of reports.
Level 1 User The Level 1 user has access to all windows. But in the method
window he can only edit non-protected samples or the ones he
created himself.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 171 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Supervisor The Supervisor has access to all windows and all options and
functions. Only methods delivered from SPECTRO can´t be edited.
15.2 Definition of Foils

At the general tab in the method window several foils can be selected; the first film
for the sample cup (for liquids or powders) and a second film to protect the
instrument.
The place to define these foils is the Configuration Editor:
A new type can be added. Existing foils can be deleted or modified:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 172 of 397
X-LabPro 5
15.3 Definition of Bonds

The use of bonds (e.g. as printout option) can be enabled at the method tabs
General and Output.
At the general tab in the method window Bonds can be selected or defined to
describe the kind of sample:
If the calculation of concentrations will be done using Fundamental Parameters it
can be helpfull/necessary to "tell" the software the chemical state of the elements
in the samples: pure elements, oxides, ...
This selection has a big influence on the calculation and its results. Therefore, it is
important!
At the Output tab in the method window the option Bond is used to define a factor
for the presentation of results. Modifications in these bonds will have no influence
on the mathematical part: It is only a factor, which is used to calculate the bond,
based on the calculatd element concentration.
But, at both tabs (General and Output) only a pre-defined type of bonds can be
selected.
The place to define these bonds and classes of bonds is the Configuration Editor:
The icon Bonds gets access to the Bond Classes:
New classes can be added, existing types of bonds can be deleted or modified.
To modifiy them, use the Edit button right to each line:
At this screen a new kind of bond can be defined or an existing one can be
modified.
To create a new class, decide between starting with an empty class or a copy of
an old class.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 173 of 397
X-LabPro 5
15.4 Definition of Recalibration Samples and Methods

At the General tab in the method window it can be defined, if a method is an
analytical one or a special one for recalibration.
If a method is designed as recalibration method it can be used for Global
recalibration, Method recalibration, Intercept recalibration or for the Energy-
Channel recalibration (MCA).
For each of the named methods/procedures a card exists to define the details:
For both MCA-recalibrations an automatic start of the measurements can be

defined.
Therefore, an additional icon Edit Time can be found on the card:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 174 of 397
X-LabPro 5
15.5 Definition of Samples

At the General tab in the method window Sample Type and Sample State are
important details to describe a sample. Using the General tab, these parameters
are defined as the template for all future samples.
In the list of standards the Sample Type and Sample State can be edited for each
sample individually. This can be done, using either the right mouse button and
selecting Edit... or by selecting Adopt Defaults from the Method menu.
The available types/states are pre-defined in the Configuration Editor. Click on the
icon Samples to get access to the following screen:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 175 of 397
X-LabPro 5
A new Sample State/Sample Type can be inserted or edited/deleted (see below):

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 176 of 397
X-LabPro 5
16 General
This tab is the main tab in the method window. It allows to edit the most important
parameters of a method:
The parameters in this screen are:

Global Settings:
In this section some global settings can be defined, like name of the method or
sample state.
One of the most important parameters is called Mathematics. It describes the
mathematical procedure used for calibration and evaluation.
The parameter Option is used to define, whether a method will be used as an
analytical method (Standard) or for recalibrations (e.g. MCA).
Dilution:
It describes the default settings for a new sample, which will be created during
routine use of this method.
The dilution material and the masses defined here will be used later.
Additional Settings:
This section contains the diameter of the sample, information about foils and the
standard for comparison.
Normalization:
Here, the different possible normalization options can be selected:
- Normalize results: The results will be normalized e.g. to 100%.
- MSK: The Mass Attenuation Coefficient is used to calculate the "non-visible part"
(elements with atomic number < 10) of the sample.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 177 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Accordingly, the results can be normalized to the "visible part".

- Difference element: This can be used to tell the mathematical procedure, what's
the "non-visible" part of the sample.This can be e.g. CH2 for an oil sample, H2O
for a water sample or Oxygen for a slag...
16.1 Recalibration
An existing calibration is based on the relation between a known concentration
and a measured count rate. Whenever this count rate is changing with time, it is
necessary to either calibrate the instrument again or to recalibrate it. The number
of standards to run a recalibration is much less than for an initial calibration.
A recalibration is necessary, if the count rates change or if the excitation geometry
of the instrument was modified. During a recalibration the ratio of the original count
rates (at the moment of the calibration) to the actual count rates are calculated.
This ratio is used as a correction factor for the original calibration.
Recently measured count rates are multiplied by the correction factor and then the
old calibration curves can be used. The X-LabPro software supports three different
kinds of correction factors:
· target correction factors
· global correction factors
· method correction factors
If the correction factor for all elements, analyzed with a specific target, is the same,
a target correction factor is used. If the difference between the correction factors is
too large, an individual global correction factor for each element has to be used.
Global and target correction factors affect all methods, so if only a specific method
should be recalibrated, method correction factors must be used.
A recalibration is automatically in use from the instant of running it. With the
exception of target correction factors, the correction factors are even used, when
old measurements are reevaluated.
Two different recalibration procedures exist.
· Global recalibration
· Method recalibration
The global recalibration can be used to correct influences that are affecting all
methods in the same way. This includes a drift correction due to aging of
components (e.g. x-ray tube, detection system) or changes in the geometry or
excitation conditions (e.g. changed protection film material).
The method recalibration is only affecting the selected method and therefore has a
completely different application. The method recalibration should be used when
the modification of the geometry is only affecting a specific method. This can be a
modified purge gas (nitrogen instead of helium) or a different foil for the
preparation of cuvettes.
For both types of recalibration the software offers special routines to simplify these
procedures. They can be adjusted in the Configuration Editor.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 178 of 397
X-LabPro 5
16.2 Global Recalibration

To correct for global effects that are affecting all methods in the same way the
global recalibration must be used. The easiest way to do this is to use a special
set of glass beads. The method containing the glass samples is typically called
Global.
To do the Global Recalibration select Prepare Global Recalibration from the menu
Recalibration.
The recalibration procedure starts by selecting the Start button.

After the measurements and evaluations are finished, the software automatically
calculates the correction factors.
These are written in the instrument configuration file. Additionally, the results of the
recalibration are stored in a text file named "GlobalRecalibration.txt" in the
directory C:\Xlabpro\LogFiles.
The calculated correction may be the target correction factors or element specific
global correction factors.
Both are stored in the configuration file of the instrument, but at different places.
Target correction factors can be found in the configuration editor under
Targets/Filter,
while the global correction factors are strored under Global Corrections.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 179 of 397
X-LabPro 5
To view the target correction factors, the appropriate target has to be selected
and then the Display button has to be used.
An alternative way is to double click on the desired target.
The target correction factor is named Intensity Correction Factor.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 180 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The global correction factors can be shown for each of the installed targets of an
instrument by selecting "Global corrections" in the configuration editor. After
selecting a target, the correction factors are shown in the table.
16.3 Method Recalibration

In comparison to the global recalibration, that is used to correct influences
affecting all methods in a similar way,
the Method Recalibration is used to adjust a specific method without affecting the
other methods.
This can be necessary, when the measurement conditions of a method have been
changed (e.g. if a different purge gas or protection foil are used).
To do the Method Recalibration select minimum one sample from the method as
recalibration sample.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 181 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Define the elements, which you want to use from this sample by marking the tick
box for Std. at the given concentrations of this sample.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 182 of 397
X-LabPro 5
In the routine dialog select the Prepare Method Recalibration from the menu
Recalibration.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 183 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The recalibration procedure is started by selecting the Start button.

After the measurements and evaluations are finished, the software automatically
calculates correction factors. Additionally, the results of the recalibration are
stored in a text file named "MethodRecalibration.txt" in the directory
C:\Xlabpro\LogFiles. Please note that the according method needs to be closed
during evaluation progress!

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 184 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The correction factors are automatically stored in the method. To check or adjust
them manually, the Method Administration must be selected in the sub-module
Elements. In the last column one can find the correction factors (Corr.factor).
16.4 Intercept Recalibration

A special kind of recalibration can be used, if analysis very close to detection limit
will be done.
This Intercept Recalibration is especially created for the Low-Sulfur-Application.
Running this, recalibration the offset of the Sulfur calibration will be recalculated to
adjust the instrument after a long time of using.
To do the Intercept Recalibration select minimum one sample from the method as
recalibration sample.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 185 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Define the element(s), which you want to use from this sample by clicking the
ticking the tick box for Std. at the given concentrations of this sample.
To do the Intercept Recalibration the recalibration sample(s) have to be in the

defined positions of the sample plate.
Select the Prepare Intercept Recalibration from the menu Recalibration.
Please note that the respective method needs to be closed during evaluation
progress!

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 186 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The recalibration procedure is started by selecting the Start button.
After the measurements and evaluations are finished, the software calculates
automatically the new offset.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 187 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The offset is automatically stored in the method. To check or adjust it manually the
method must be selected in the sub-module Calibration of the Method
Administration module.
After selecting the tab Parameters the offset is displayed as the first parameter,
called "Offset" (in this example 4.0035).
16.5 Run MCA Calibration

The energy channel calibration, also known as MCA (Multi Channel Analyzer)
calibration should be performed once a week.
The first MCA calibration is done in Kleve measuring a glass bead and calculating
several parameters.
To check this calibration (once a week), this glass bead has to be measured
again.
To do this, select the Prepare MCA Calibration (glas tablet) from the menu
Recalibration:
A sample with a new extension is created, automatically.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 188 of 397
X-LabPro 5
To start the MCA calibration, select the Start button (with enabled Evaluation box
right hand of the Start button).
To configure it, use the Configuration Editor.
This MCA can also be used in combination with a Global Recalibration.
16.6 Standards
The method comprises the calibration standards. These can be edited at the tab
Standards.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 189 of 397
X-LabPro 5
It contains different columns which can be used to change the order of

presentation.
Using the right mouse button a context menu gives
access to all important functions regarding standard
samples.
One of them is the given concentrations, which are
necessary for calibration.
Especially for the non-empirical procedures like
Fundamental Parameter Models or Spectro
procedure, it is important to tell the software all
available informations, because these mathematical
procedures require a 100%-knowledge.
E.g. we cannot determine Oxygen. But, if you know,
that elements in a sample are bonded as oxides,
you should edit the Oxygen concentration -
independent from the fact, that it will not be
calibrated.
In addition some shortcuts are introduced like "Show
Spectra...". Without using the clipboard the selected
sample will be copied into the Spectra Viewer.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 190 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Given Concentrations:
This window is to define the given concentrations - the goal of the calibration.
As mentioned before, it can be necessary for FPM to describe the sample 100 %
(if all these concentrations are of interest or not!).
The first details, which should fit to the sample and its given concentrations should
be the Typical Unit.
This should be the right one before entering concentrations. It can be changed at
each time, but BEFORE entering a number. Changes of the unit afterwards will
have no influence to "old" concentrations.
To make it more comfortable, if bonds like Oxides are to define, the feature
"Bonds" can be used. A sum is counting all defined concentrations as additional
control option.
In the list in the lower part of this screen all elements ALL elements - (independent
from selections) are visible. A concentration, the error of this concentration and the
level of cerification can be defined.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 191 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The last 5 columns are not really important, because there's another location to
get access to the informations stored here.
Dilution Material:
If the sample should be a new Dilution material, that can be selected for new
routine samples, this should be selected.
Std-. Lib.:
The Standard-Library (or Library of Standards) is a tool to
accelerate the definition of the given concentrations, if a well-
known, certified standard is used:
Many of these Certified Reference Materials (CRM) are pre-
defined in the Library of Standards and own standards can be
added.
To use the stored data or to add the actual sample into this library,
these buttons can be used.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 192 of 397
X-LabPro 5
17 Data Storage
The User of the Spectro X-LabPro software is fully responsible for data storage and
backup copies!!!
We - as SPECTRO - have prepared a backup of your instrument specific data
before shipment of the instrument, but we are not able to store / to archive the
data you have measured after delivery / installation.
Therefore, it is your responsibility to assure a regular data storage.

We suggest to copy the complete c:\xlabpro directory to a CD.
If you need to restore your data, please do not hesitate to contact
us for details on how to restore.
In addition to such a complete backup, there are different storage options:
The software offers tools to export measurements, methods or jobs from the
database structure to allow data storage and data transmission.
The motivation to store methods, jobs and samples is quite different:
· Methods do not change very often so the main motivation is to get some
backup copies.
· If a new method will not work properly and will need some assistance from us,
the method can be transmitted to us.
· A new method was developed on another computer. After finishing the
calibration, it can be copied to the instrument computer.
Export Methods Import Methods
· Jobs contain the routine measurements and here the archiving is the main
reason.
Export Jobs Import Jobs
· Single samples are exported to make them available to other users (e.g.
SPECTRO).
Export Samples Import Samples

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 193 of 397
X-LabPro 5
18 Import/Export
18.1 Export Methods

Methods are stored from the sub-module Method Development. At first, the
method to store should be selected. In the pull-down menu Method is a function
called Export Method...
This function opens a box to select the directory for the data storage. To change
the directory double-click on the corresponding drive or directory.
The name of the method is used automatically as name of this new subdirectory.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 194 of 397
X-LabPro 5
If the method was stored before (the directory still exists ), a message will inform
you before overwriting the old export files.
The progress of storing (e.g. the just stored sample) is shown on the screen and
at the end of the archiving a message box is shown.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 195 of 397
X-LabPro 5
18.2 Import Methods

In the X-LabPro software only the methods in the database structure can be used.
Therefore, methods can be exported (for data storage or to transfer methods to
other computers) and imported.
To load a method into the database the sub-module Method Administration has to
be selected. In the pull-down menu Method is a function Import Method... to load a
method.
In the following selection box the method archive file (with the extension .mar if
using software version 2.5 or older) of the specific method has to be selected.
This method archive file is generated automatically when a method is stored. It
contains a list of all samples that are part of this method. Without this .mar file, the
method can not be restored.
In the line above the selection field, the just selected directory is shown.
To change this directory, a double-click on the target directory is necessary.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 196 of 397
X-LabPro 5
When the directory is selected, only the methodname.mar file will be shown.
This file should be selected and the selection confirmed by OK.
In the next window the name for the method can be modified. The default name is
the old name of the method.
The software needs unique method names: If the name of the method already
exists, please rename the new method.
After the confirmation or modification of the Method Name, the files will be loaded.
The progress of this task is shown in a message box.
The end of the restoring procedure is displayed in a message box.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 197 of 397
X-LabPro 5
18.3 Export Jobs

Jobs are stored from the submodule Job Manager. The job to store must be
selected and then the function Export... from the pull-down menu Job must be
activated.
A selection box opens to choose the target directory. The software is automatically
creating a subdirectory, so only the directory to store all jobs should be selected.
The default setting is the archive subdirectory in the program directory (X-LabPro).
The selected directory is shown above the selection window. To change the
directory, double-click on the corresponding drive or directory.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 198 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The selection of a specific directory is confirmed by clicking on the OK button. The

completed storage is indicated by a message box.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 199 of 397
X-LabPro 5
18.4 Import Jobs

To reload archived jobs, the function Import... from the pull-down menu Job must
be selected.
The following selection box shows the subdirectory where the samples are
archived. If the directory is correct, this path has to be confirmed.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 200 of 397
X-LabPro 5
After selecting a Job, there's the possiblity to change the name of the re-imported
job.
A message box shows the end of the restoring process.
The samples are restored automatically. It is essential that the Method that was
used for the samples still exists.
18.5 Export Samples

Sometimes it is necessary to export single samples instead of entire methods or
jobs; e.g. to transfer them to another computer or to transmit them to Spectro or
just to store them. In addition to the Store Job and Store Method functions the
software offers the Export (Standard) Samples... function in the submodules Job
Manager and Method Administration.
The samples must be selected. To export the selected samples the function
Export (Standard) Samples... from the pull-down menu Job (or Method) has to be
selected.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 201 of 397
X-LabPro 5
In the following box the sub-directory for the stored samples can be selected.
The default sub-directory for exporting samples is Xlabpro\Archive. After the first
data exchange, the last used directory will be the default for the next action.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 202 of 397
X-LabPro 5
18.6 Import Samples

Samples can be imported into the database structure even without being part of a
stored Job or Method. It is possible to load samples into Jobs or Methods by quite
similar procedures.
At first the method (or job) in which the samples should be imported must be
selected.
The following example is demonstrating the import of samples as standards to an
existing method.
In the pull-down menu Edit the function Import (Standard) Samples... must be
selected.
After selecting the directory, a sample (or samples) can be selected.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 203 of 397
X-LabPro 5
When samples are imported it is necessary to select the dilution material (if
necessary) for the samples.
18.7 Protocol File for Recalibrations

During a Global Recalibration a protocol file is created. This allows to check
whether the recalibration was successful and logical!
Hints to control the calculated factors:
 The factors should be around 1.000. Please check, if the range of these
factors is between 0.90 and 1.10 (that means 10 % difference to 1.000) and
no factor like 1,234.5 is calculated (because a wrong sample was used...).
 The run of the curve of the factors against the atomic numbers should be
controlled, whether jumps or discontinuities occur. The only known
discontinuity is for the HOPG target between the elements Chlorine and
Potassium.
 The heavier the neighbouring elements the smaller is the difference of their
factors. Especially for elements heavier than Iron (Atomic Number > 26),
there is very often only one factor for the whole sub-measurement (Target).
For each target the average and the standard deviation for all factors are
calculated at the end of the summary.
If the standard deviation for the Average Target Value is small enough, one
"Target-factor" is used instead of individual factors.
In the following, a part of this document is shown:
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 204 of 397
X-LabPro 5

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 205 of 397
X-LabPro 5
19 Literature
Basics
P. Hahn-Weinheimer, Grundlagen und praktische Anwendung der
Röntgenfluoreszenzanalyse, Vieweg Braunschweig-Wiesbaden (1984), german.
Polarisation
J. Heckel, M. Brumme, A. Weinert, K. Irmer, Multi-Element Trace Analysis of
Rocks and Soils by EDXRF Using Polarized Radiation, X-Ray Spectrom. 20, 287-
292 (1991).
B. Kanngiesser, B. Beckhoff, J. Scheer and W. Swoboda, Comparison of Highly
Oriented Pyrolytic and ordinary Graphite as Polarizers of Mo K Radition in
EDXRF, X-Ray Spectrom. 20, 331 (1991).
R. Schramm, Untersuchungen zur Optimierung der Energiedispersiven
Röntgenfluoreszenzanalyse als Methode der Instrumentellen Analytik,
Diplomathesis, Gerhard-Mercator-Universität Duisburg (1995), german.
T.G. Dzubay, B.V. Jarrett, J.M. Jaklevic, Nucl. Instrum. Methods 115, 297 (1974).
E. J. Taggart, Adv. X-Ray Anal. 28, 17 (1985).
J. Heckel, M. Haschke, M. Brumme, R. Schindler, Principles and Applications of
Energy-dispersive X-ray Fluorescence Analysis With Polarized Radiation, J. Anal.
Atom. Spectrom. 7, 281 (1992).
J. Heckel, Using Barkla polarized X-ray radiation in energy dispersive X-Ray
fluorescence analysis (EDXRF), J. Trace Microprobe Tech., 13(2) (1995) 97.
Matrixcorrection
G. Andermann and J.W. Kemp, Scattered X-Rays as Internal Standard in X-Ray
Emission Spectroscopy, Anal. Chem. 30, 1306 (1958).
R.C. Reynolds, Matrix Corrections In Trace Element Analysis by X-Ray
Fluorescence: Estimation of the Mass Absorption Coefficient by Compton
Scattering, Jr. Am. Mineral. 48, 1133 (1963).
C.E. Feather and J.P. Willis, A Simple Method for Background and Matrix
Correction of Spectral Peaks in Trace Element Determination by X-Ray
Fluorescence Spectrometry, X-Ray Spectrom. 5, 41 (1976).
Methods for Quantification
H.J. Lucas-Tooth, B.J. Price, A Mathematical Method for the Investigation of
Interelement Effects in X-Ray Fluorescence Analysis, Metallurgia 64, 149 (1961).
J. Sherman, A Theoretical Derivation of the Composition of Mixable Specimens
from Fluorescent X-Ray Intensities, Adv. X-Ray Anal., 1 (1958) 231.
Tables
J. H. Hubbell, W. J. Veigele, E. A. Briggs, R. T. Brown, D. T. Cromer, R. J.
Howerton, Atomic Form Factors, Incoherent Scattering Functions, and Photon
Scattering Cross Sections, J. Phys. Chem. Ref. Data, Vol. 4, No. 3 (1975).

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 206 of 397
X-LabPro 5
P.A. Russell, R. James, Journal of Analytical Atomic Spectrometry, 12, 25 (1997).

B.L. Henke, P. Lee, J. Tanaka, R.L. Shimabukuro and B.K. Fujikawa, At. Data
Nucl. Data Tables 27, 1 (1982).
Applications
R. Schramm, J. Heckel, Contrôle d’entrée de rejets organiques et d’hydrocarbures
halogénés par EDXRF, Spectra Analyse 196, May - June (1997).
K. Norrish and J.T. Hutton, An accurate X-ray spectrographic method for the
analysis of a wide range of geological samples, Geochim. Cosmochim Acta 33,
431 (1969).
R. Schramm, J. Heckel, Fast Analysis of Traces and Major Elements with
ED(P)XRF Using Polarized X-Rays: TURBOQUANT, J. Phys. IV France 8, 335-
342 (1998).

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 207 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Spectro Midex Easy GUI

20 How to start
To start the X-LabPro Easy Routine Dialog right-click on the Communication
Server symbol. In the upcoming menu select Easy Routine Dialog.
Figure 1: Using the ComServer

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 208 of 397
X-LabPro 5
21 Starting up
21.1 Log in
When the Easy Routine dialog starts up, first you have to provide your login and
password.
Figure 2: Log in
21.2 Standby mode

As next you are asked whether to go into standby mode. If you do not want to go
into standby mode right now, you can switch it on later by using the Standby
button.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 209 of 397
X-LabPro 5
22 Using Easy Routine
22.1 Introducing the dialog

When the start up procedure is finished the dialog will look like in Figure 3.
Figure 3: Easy Routine Dialog
In the upper part of the main dialog you can see the Parameter Bar stating the
actual measurement parameters. While measuring, the bar will be updated
continually.
Right next to the Parameter Bar is the Close Button.
On both sides of the dialog are several Function Buttons.
Below the buttons are three State Icons.
In the center you can see the Sample View. The Sample View is shown by default
on start up. By using the buttons below the center view you can switch between
Sample View, Spectrum View and Video.
While measuring the Spectrum View shows the measured spectrum.
After a measurement is completed the Sample View shows the analysis results.
Video shows a live picture of the measured sample to adjust the manual sample
table.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 210 of 397
X-LabPro 5
22.1.1 Sample view
Figure 4: Sample View
The Sample View contains all needed controls to prepare a measurement.

In the first four rows you can edit the sample name and select the method class,
method and job.
Below is the Result List where the measurement results are shown. After
performing a Validation the list contains an additional row with the validation result.
The progress controls show the remaining measurement time; separated into
 Sample time: the time remaining for measuring the current sample.
 Plate time: the time remaining for the complete measuring process
( incl. time for preparing a measurement with gas flush or vacuum).
The two buttons below let you switch between Sample View and Spectrum View.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 211 of 397
X-LabPro 5
22.1.2 Selecting a Method class

Press the Select button next to the edit field. A dialog ( Figure 5 ) opens and you
can select the desired method class.
22.1.3 Selecting a Method

can select the desired method.
The dialog only shows methods which are in the current method class.
Figure 5: Select dialog
22.1.3.1 Selecting a Job

At start up the job is preset according to the setting from the Configuration Editor.
To select a different job press the Select button next to the edit field. A dialog
( Figure 5 ) opens and you can select the desired job.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 212 of 397
X-LabPro 5
22.1.3.2 Editing a Job

To edit the job press the Edit button next to the edit field. A Virtual Keyboard
( Figure 6 ) appears. Type in the new job and press OK to accept it.
22.1.3.3 Editing the sample name

At start up the sample name is preset with 'NewSample'.
To edit the sample name press the Edit button next to the edit field. A Virtual
Keyboard ( Figure 6 ) appears. Type in the new sample name and press OK to
accept it.
22.1.3.4 Pasting a sample

Click here, to paste a sample from the Job Manager into Easy Routine Dialog.
It is not possible to paste a standard. For pasting standards, please use the
Routine Dialog. Further on, the method to which the sample belongs must not be
hidden or finalized.
It is possible to resume the measurement of a not completely measured sample.
For example: if your sample contains 6 measurements and 5 of these are already
measured, you can paste the sample and start measuring the last one.
It is not possible to paste a completely measured sample.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 213 of 397
X-LabPro 5
22.1.3.5 Using the virtual keyboard
Figure 6: Virtual keyboard
The Virtual Keyboard can be used like a normal keyboard. Shift and Caps Lock
work in the expected way. Selecting characters with Shift is not possible.
To move the cursor in the edit field use the Arrow buttons left to the edit field.
To delete the character left to the cursor use the Delete button on the right side of
the edit field.
Press OK to accept the name or Cancel to close the dialog.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 214 of 397
X-LabPro 5
22.1.4 Spectrum view
Figure 7: Spectrum View
During a measurement the Spectrum View displays the currently measured

spectrum.
The Spectrum View can be enabled / disabled in the Settings dialog.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 215 of 397
X-LabPro 5
22.1.5 Close Button
Figure 8: Close button
Clicking the Close button exits the Easy Routine Dialog. You will have to confirm
exiting. If the high voltage is switched on, it will be powered down before the dialog
is closed.
22.2 Function Buttons
22.2.1.1 Start
Figure 9: Start button
The Start button is active only when no measurement is performed.

Clicking the Start button starts a new measurement.
It will change into the Stop button while measuring.
22.2.1.2 Stop
Figure 10: Stop button
The Stop button appears only during measurements.

Clicking the Stop button stops the actual measurement. The high voltage will stay
switched on. When the measurement is stopped, the Start button is shown again.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 216 of 397
X-LabPro 5
22.2.1.3 Off
Figure 11: Off button
The Off button is active only when the x-ray tube is on.
Clicking the Off button ends the Standby mode.
22.2.1.4 Standby
Figure 12: Standby button
The Standby button is active only when the x-ray tube is off.
Clicking the Standby button switches the instrument into Standby mode.
22.2.1.5 Settings
Figure 13: Settings button
The Settings button is active only when no measurement is performed.

Clicking the Settings button opens the Settings dialog ( see chapter Settings
dialog for more details ).

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 217 of 397
X-LabPro 5
22.2.1.6 Recalibration
Figure 14: Recalibration button
The Recalibration button is active only when no measurement is performed.

Clicking the Recalibration button opens the Recalibration dialog ( see chapter
Recalibration dialog for more details ).
22.2.1.7 Validate
Figure 15: Validate button
The Validate button is active only when no measurement is performed.

Clicking the Validate button to prepare a validation. In the upcoming dialog you
have to select which method contains the needed Validation Sample. After
successfully selecting the method, click Start to perform the validation.
22.2.1.8 Print
Figure 16: Print button
The Print button is active only when no measurement is performed.

Clicking the Print button will print the actual measurement results directly to the
default printer. When no results are present nothing is printed.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 218 of 397
X-LabPro 5
22.2.2 Set Video
Figure 17: Set Video button
The Set Video button helps to adjust different parameters of the video display
(Brightness, Contrast, Hue, Saturation), of the crosshair (X-Pos, Y-Pos, Size) and
light and laser intensity:
Figure 18: Set Video button

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 219 of 397
X-LabPro 5
22.2.3 Light
Figure 19: Light button
With the Light button the light can be switched on and off.
22.2.4 Laser
Figure 20: Laser button
With the Laser button the laser can be switched on and off.
22.2.5 Parameter Bar
Figure 21: Parameter Bar
The Parameter bar states the actual measurement parameters:

 the part measurement of the actual sample.
 the gas flow in liters per hour.
 the voltage in kilovolts.
 the current in milliampere.
 the maximum measurement time for the part measurement of the sample in
seconds.
 the measurement time for the part measurement of the sample in seconds.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 220 of 397
X-LabPro 5
22.2.6 State Icons

The State icons reflect the actual instrument state. Therefore each icon has two
different states.
22.2.6.1 Lock/Unlock
Figure 22: Sample chamber locked
The sample chamber is locked.
Figure 23: Sample chamber accessible
The sample chamber is accessible.
22.2.6.2 X-Ray on/off
Figure 24: X-Ray on
The x-ray tube is switched on.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 221 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Figure 25: X-Ray off
The x-ray tube is switched off.
22.2.7 Settings dialog
Figure 26: Settings dialog

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 222 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The Settings dialog lets you configure some parts of the Easy Routine dialog.
 enable / disable the Spectrum view.
 enable / disable printing directly after evaluation of the measurement.
 enable / disable Full screen mode. The Full screen mode is suitable only
when a touch screen monitor is used because in Full screen mode the
mouse pointer is hidden.
 enable / disable the question for an inserted protection foil.
22.2.8 Recalibration dialog
Figure 27: Recalibration dialog
With the Recalibration dialog you can prepare the instrument calibration.
Click one of the Recalibration method buttons to prepare the recalibration.
For information about the different calibration methods click the Help button next to
the Recalibration method button.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 223 of 397
X-LabPro 5
22.3 Recalibration
In this chapter the application flow of the different recalibration methods is
explained.
For information about the different calibration methods open Recalibration dialog
and click the Help button next to the Recalibration method you are interested in.
22.3.1 MCA
To perform a MCA Recalibration, open the Recalibration dialog and click the
MCA button. The recalibration is then prepared. If the actual method does not
contain any MCA sample you will be noticed.
If a MCA sample was found, the Easy Routine Dialog then switches into
Recalibration Mode: only the Start button and the New Sample button are active.
To perform the recalibration click Start. To cancel the recalibration click New
Sample.
When the recalibration is complete the results are shown in the Result List. The
Easy Routine Dialog switches back to Normal Mode.
22.3.2 Global
To perform a Global Recalibration, open the Recalibration dialog and click the
Global Recalibration button. The recalibration is then prepared. If the actual
method does not contain any Global sample you will be noticed.
If a Global sample was found, the Easy Routine Dialog then switches into
Sample.
Depending on the settings in the Configuration Editor the Global Recalibration
is performed with one or more samples.
If more than one sample is calibrated, a message box advises you when to insert
the next sample into the Sample Chamber.
When the recalibration is complete the results are shown in the Result List. If more
than one sample was measured, the results are only written to file and nothing will
be shown in the Result List. The Easy Routine Dialog switches back to Normal
Mode.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 224 of 397
X-LabPro 5
22.3.3 Intercept
To perform a Intercept Recalibration, open the Recalibration dialog and click the
Intercept Recalibration button. A Select Dialog opens and you can choose a
method for calibration. The method must contain an Intercept Sample. After
successfully selecting a method, the recalibration is then prepared.
The Easy Routine Dialog then switches into Recalibration Mode: only the Start
button and the New Sample button are active. To perform the recalibration click
Start. To cancel the recalibration click New Sample.
Depending on the settings in the Method Configuration the Intercept
Recalibration is performed with one or more samples.
Mode.
22.3.4 Method
To perform a Method Recalibration, open the Recalibration dialog and click the
Method Recalibration button. A Select Dialog opens and you can choose a method
for calibration. The method must contain a Method Sample. After successfully
selecting a method, the recalibration is then prepared.
When the recalibration is complete the results are shown in the Result List. In an
additional column in the Result List the recalibration factors are shown.
The Easy Routine Dialog switches back to Normal Mode.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 225 of 397
X-LabPro 5
22.4 Validation
In this chapter the application flow of the validation is explained.
To perform a Validation, click the Validation button. A Select Dialog opens and
you can choose a method for validation. The method must contain a Validation
Sample against which the new sample is validated. After successfully selecting a
method, the Validation is then started.
When the Validation is complete the results are shown in the Result List. In an
additional column in the Result List the validation result is shown:
 a marks a valid result, the measured concentration was within limits.
 a marks an invalid result, the measured concentration was out of range.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 226 of 397
X-LabPro 5
SPECTRO MIDEX Tutorials

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 227 of 397
X-LabPro 5
23 About this Manual

This manual describes the operation of a MIDEX device. Unlike the older versions
of the MIDEX device the new version does not use the common X-LabPro Routine
Dialog for setup and operation. All options and controls appear as the user needs
them, not before. This makes it easy to get started using the Spectro MIDEX. Even
complex scan scenarios can be configured fast and clear.
Conventions
Throughout this document, a set of typographical conventions is used to define
elements and references to the application items. Familiarity with these
conventions will help your understanding of the topics covered.
Colored Identifies a text you will find in the current dialog, view or application
Text (e.g. title of a dialog box or the entries of a combo box).
This symbol is used for a Note, for general instructions and advices.
This symbol is used for a Tip, for special instructions for optimal use of
the system.
This symbol is used for a Warning (instructions to avoid dangerous
situations).
24 Getting started
24.1 Application Requirements
24.1.1 Starting the Application

The Routine Dialog is started through the X-LabPro Com server application running
in the system tray:
Right click the icon to open the X-LabPro application launcher (Com Server) and
choose the menu item MIDEX – Routine Dialog. This will launch the application
and require authorization as first step.
It is possible to create a shortcut to the application on the desktop. Right click on
the desktop and select Create shortcut. Choose
C:\XLabPro\Bin32\XLRoutineDlgMII.exe as target path. Then enter Routine
Dialog Midex II as shortcut name.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 228 of 397
X-LabPro 5
24.1.2 Shutting down the Application

When the Routine Dialog is running the application can be closed like any typical
window using the button in the top right corner of the main application
window. Another option is to use the main menu of the application (Routine 
Exit) or the windows taskbar (right click on the window item and select close). The
application will shut down the device if necessary which can take some time.
Review the measurement parameters bar for the shutdown status.
Never, under any circumstances use the windows task manager to

terminate the application process! The high voltage of the device
would not be shut down properly.
In case of an abnormal termination of the application process start the

application again. The MIDEX Routine Dialog will detect the device
state after launch and shut down the high voltage of the device if
needed.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 229 of 397
X-LabPro 5
24.2 Quick Scan Guide

Welcome Page Stage Setup Page
- (Configure the application) - Put the sample onto the sample

- Click start to begin the configuration stage
and move it to the center crosshair
Click Start - Move the stage up until the
maximum
position is reached (2mm below roof)
- Lock the Z-Position
Click Next
Preview Scan Page (PnS) Preview Scan Page (Raster)
- Click onto the area to scan - Select segments for preview

- In the live video click on the center - Click Scan selected
spot for exact positioning - Wait for the scan to finish
- Click on Capture to accept
Switch between Modes
Click Next Click Next
Scan Setup Page
- Choose Mode (Mapping, Linescan or Pointscan)

- Add one or more Scans (Add button on toolbar and click on
preview)
- Select method class
- Choose a Method for each scan (if necessary) and edit the scan
duration for each spot
Note: Only the scans on the active tab (Mapping, Linescan,

Pointscan) will be executed during scan
Click Next
Verify Setup Page
- Review scan setup

- Choose evaluation mode
Click Start
This is where the scanning starts!
Scan Results Page

Scan Progress Page
- Review the scan results
- Relax and watch the scan being - Select color maps view or
executed automatically - Select threshold colors view or
- Select threshold mix view or
Switches automatically
- Select Spectrum/List (for Pointscans)
when finished
Congratulations!
Your scan is done!

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 230 of 397
X-LabPro 5
25 Routine Dialog
The Routine Dialog for the Midex was developed to simplify the scan process. It
will assist the user from the beginning at setting up a scan and supports all
required actions at the moment they are needed.
25.1 Wizard Style

The user interface of the MIDEX Routine Dialog implements a wizard style
workflow. The user is directed through the device setup, scan configuration and
scan processes step by step
The process of setting up a scan, scanning and reviewing results can be done in
some very easy steps:
 Place the sample onto the stage inside the test chamber
 Move the sample into the center of the camera (using live video)
 Move the sample to the highest possible position and lock it (protects the
sample from damaging the detection system)
 Capture a preview image of the sample (combining one or more camera
images)
 Select the spots to scan on the preview image
 Multiple spots, rectangular = Mapping or
 Multiple spots, linear = Linescan or
 Single spots = Pointscan
 Select scan method and scan duration
 Start the scan (executes automatically, shows progress)
 Review the scan results (multiple result presentations available)
25.2 Integration into X-LabPro 5

The MIDEX Routine Dialog is one component of X-LabPro 5.0.
X-LabPro 5.0 consists of several components used to configure and manage the
device and the scan methods, to execute evaluations and to review scan results.
The following table lists all components of X-LabPro 5.0 for use with the MIDEX
device. For detailed information or help on the component please consult its
Online Help:
Method The Method Administration is used to manage and develop

Administration scan methods. Methods listed here can be used for scanning
using the MIDEX Routine Dialog. See chapter “Method
class and method selection” for more information

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 231 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Job Manager The Job Manager combines multiple Pointscans to

jobs. MIDEX Routine Dialog supports jobs only for
Pointscans. Mappings
and Linescans use their own archive file format. See
chapter
“Setup Pointscans” for more information on jobs.
Spectra Viewer The Spectra Viewer displays results of scans either as

spectra, for Mappings and Linescans also as color
maps
or threshold maps.
Configuration Editor The Configuration Editor manages all settings of the

X-LabPro application and the device.
Library of Atomic This library contains all atomic data for use within the
Data evaluation process.
25.3 Login and Authorization

After starting the application it requires to authorize with X-LabPro 5.0. If there is
already a component of X-LabPro authorized and running, the credentials of that
component will be used and no further login is required.
The Log-In dialog will be shown as follows:
User accounts and passwords can be created and edited using the Configuration
Editor.
Enter a username and password and click on OK to authorize. If the authorization
succeeds, the login dialog disappears and the initialization sequence of MIDEX
Routine Dialog continues.
If the login details are not correct a message is shown. Click OK and try again.
Username and password fields are not case sensitive.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 232 of 397
X-LabPro 5
If you click on Cancel the authorization process will be aborted. In this case the
MIDEX Routine Dialog will be closed and the application will shut down.
MIDEX Routine Dialog cannot be used without authorization!
25.4 Connecting to the Device

After authorizing the application attempts to connect to the MIDEX device
connected to your computer. If the system is set up to run in simulation mode a
connection will only be simulated (see Chapter 4.2.3 Simulation Mode).
The status of the connection process will be shown in the device control log
window (see Chapter 4.3.6 Device Control Log Window). This window is part of
the main application window and will automatically pop up until the initialization
process finished.
The interface provides a status icon to verify a device was successfully connected
and initialized. This status icon is described below in Chapter 4.2.2 Testing the
connection.
25.4.1 Connection Setup

To setup a connection the device must be connected to the computer running the
MIDEX Routine Dialog application. The connection options can be edited using the
Configuration Editor. Please consult the Configuration Editor Online Help for
more information.
25.4.2 Testing the Connection

There are two ways to verify a successful connection:
 Review the device control log
The device control log window displays status messages generated during
the initialization of the application/device. It lists all instrument components

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 233 of 397
X-LabPro 5
found and the device connected. If the device was detected the connection
was successful.
 Notice the status icon in the bottom bar
The bottom bar of the application window contains several status icons. The
second is showing the connection status of the device. The following list
shows the meaning of the different status icons:
The device is connected successfully and ready for use
A device is not connected or not yet initialized
The application is busy connecting to the device
Move the mouse pointer over the status icon and leave it there; a
popup window will open and display a notification regarding the
current status. Move the mouse pointer outside of the icon and the
popup window disappears immediately.
25.4.3 Simulation Mode

Without a connected device the application can still be started. The application has
to be started in simulation mode. This setting can be set in the options dialog of
the X-LabPro Com Server (launcher in the system tray). Right click on the tray
icon and choose Options. The following dialog will show up:
Mark the simulation mode checkbox to enable it. Click OK to save the new setting.
This setting will get active when the MIDEX Routine Dialog is restarted.
When started in simulation mode all actions and reactions of the interface are just
simulated. The application will not connect to a device, even if it is connected. The
last (right) status bar icon shows a simulation mode symbol if it is active:
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 234 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Simulation mode is activated
In simulation mode all spectra generated are simulated and do not contain
measurement information!
25.5 Routine Dialog Main Window
1 Main Menu See chapter 4.3.1
2 Measurement Parameters Bar See chapter 4.3.2
3 Wizard Page Area See chapter 4.4
4 Tool Windows Toggle Buttons See chapter 4.3.5 – 4.3.7

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 235 of 397
X-LabPro 5
5 Status and Notification Area See chapter 4.3.3 & 4.3.4
6 Wizard Navigation Area See chapter 4.3.8
25.5.1 Main Menu Items

The MIDEX Routine Dialog main menu contains general items which are not
directly required for device operation. The main menu provides additional
functionality like shutting down the application, switching the device on/off,
launching this help file, etc.
The following list shows all available menu items and describes their functionality:
Routine Contains menu items affecting the routine

application
------- Exit Shuts the application down.

If high voltage of the device is active, the routine
shuts the device down first. This may take some
time. The measurement parameters bar informs
about the current state of the device generator
values.
Edit Contains menu items affecting the data in the

Routine Dialog.
Sub items get only active when it is possible to use
them.
------- Paste Standard Pastes a standard to the Pointscan list on Scan

setup Page
(see chapter 4.4.5.11.2)
View Switches toolbars/windows and sets view options
Pro
------- X-LabPro 5 Bar Toggles the visibility of the X-Lab Bar (see
chapter 4.3.5)
------- Device Control Toggles the tool window for device messages (see
chapter 4.3.6)
Tools Device operations and service menu items
------- Instrument Test Allows controlling the device components manually

Window (Supervisor only)
------- Test Measurement Allows starting a measurement for testing purposes

(Supervisor only)
------- Init Sample Stage Moves the sample stage back to its root position

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 236 of 397
X-LabPro 5
------- Reload Methods Reloads the Method buffer and reads newly added
methods
------- Switch Instrument Off Shuts the device down
------- Enter Standby Mode Activates the standby state of the device (holding
voltage)
Pro Pro
X-Lab Contains items to launch other X-Lab
components (same items like
Pro
X-Lab Bar)
------- Method Pro

Launches the Method administration of X-Lab
Administration
Pro
------- Spectra Viewer Launches the Spectra Viewer of X-Lab
Pro
------- Job Manager Launches the Job Manager of X-Lab
Pro
------- Atomic Library Launches the Library of atomic data of X-Lab
Pro
------- Configuration Editor Launches the Configuration Editor of X-Lab
Pro
------- Evaluation Launches the Evaluation of X-Lab
------- Routine Help Opens this Help Manual
Help Help and information about MIDEX Routine Dialog
------- Help Manual Opens this manual
------- About MIDEX Routine Shows a dialog containing application and version
information
25.5.2 Measurement Parameters and Information Bar

Below the main menu the interface presents the measurement parameters bar.
This bar is always visible and contains essential information about the state of the
device and the progress of the measurement.
The following table describes the values shown in the parameters bar:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 237 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Smp. Pos/Meas. Shows the current scan id and sub measurement id (Pointscan
only)
Pressure [Pa] (reserved for use with vacuum option)
Voltage [kV] Shows the current voltage produced by the X-ray generator
Current [mA] Shows the current mA value produced by the X-ray generator
Maximum Time [s] Presents the time span in seconds scheduled for the active scan
Remaining time [s] Presents the remaining time of the current scan in seconds
(not overall time)
25.5.3 Status Icons

The bottom bar of the main application window contains 5 bubble icons presenting
the current device/application status.
The first icon shows the status of the X-ray tube. Is the icon grayed out the X-ray
generator is not active. The status icon turns yellow when X-ray gets active:
X-ray is inactive
X-ray is active.
The second icon displays the connection status to the MIDEX device. If the icon is
grayed out there is no device connected:
There is no device connected (at least not yet)
The application is busy connecting to the MIDEX device.
The application successfully connected to the MIDEX device
The third icon shows the state of the device power supply. The icon will be grayed
out if no status was detected. This can happen if the optional UPS (uninterruptible
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 238 of 397
X-LabPro 5
power supply) is not installed. A UPS is recommended to support a soft shutdown

of the x-ray tube if the main power was interrupted.
The power status of the device could not be detected.
The main power line was interrupted. The Routine Dialog will
shutdown the device safely and close the MIDEX routine
dialog application.
The main power line is connected and supplying the device

with power.
The fourth icon presents the state of the sample chamber door lock. If the icon is
red, the chamber is locked and cannot be opened.
The chamber door is unlocked and can be

opened at any time.
The door to the chamber is locked and cannot be opened.
The fifth and last icon is usually empty (gray). It will change if the application is
launched using the simulation mode flag (see 4.2.3). It will also show if the device
is transmitting data to the computer or if the detector I regenerating.
This is the default state of the icon. There is nothing wrong

about it.
The simulation mode is activated. All actions and device

responses are only simulated. There is no real device
communication.
The device is busy transmitting data from the device to the

computer.
The detector is regenerating. (not yet used)

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 239 of 397
X-LabPro 5
25.5.4 Popup Notifications

To clarify the meaning of the displayed status icons the interface provides popup
notifications. These notifications appear immediately as you move the mouse
pointer over the status icon. If you move the mouse pointer outside of the icon or
notification area it will disappear. The notification displays the state of the
corresponding icon as simple text. Here are some examples of these notifications:
25.5.5 X-LabPro Bar

The bottom bar of the main application window contains 3 buttons which can be
used to toggle tool and notification windows. The first button can be used to switch
the X-LabPro Bar on and off.
The X-LabPro Bar lists the commonly used components of X-LabPro to make them
easy to access from the MIDEX Routine Dialog interface. Available options are:
Spectra Viewer

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 240 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Job Manager
Library of Atomic Data
Configuration Editor
Evaluation
Help
(for MIDEX Routine Dialog)
Simply click on the button to launch the corresponding X-LabPro component. As

you are already authorized by logging into a MIDEX equipped with xyz
stages Routine Dialog it is not required to log into the started component again.
Please note that instead of the buttons in the X-LabPro Bar you can use the X-
LabPro menu item in the application main menu.
25.5.6 Device Control Log Window

The bottom bar of the main application window contains three buttons which can
be used to toggle tool and notification windows. The second button can be used to
switch the device control log window on and off.
The Device Control Log lists all notifications related to the device operation. During
connection the device control log window is shown automatically. It will be hidden
if the connection process has finished.
On the right side of the window you can find three tool buttons. These buttons can
be used to clear the log, save to a file or copy the listed text into the Windows
clipboard.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 241 of 397
X-LabPro 5
25.5.7 Device Communication Log Window

The bottom bar of the main application window contains 3 buttons which can be
used to toggle tool and notification windows. The third button can be used to
switch the device communication log window on and off.
This information is required for service purposes only.
25.5.8 Wizard Navigation

The right side of the window bottom bar contains the navigation buttons. These
buttons allow switching between the wizard pages.
The button state depends on the current state of the wizard page. For example the
process can only advance to the scan setup page if there is a preview image
available. Because of that the next button in the preview scan page gets enabled
after the preview image was scanned correctly.
The navigation buttons will switch to a special state if the following step executes
an action. For example on the setup verification page the next button switches to a
Start button to clarify that the click on it will launch the scan process.
25.6 Wizard Pages and Device Operation

This chapter will describe the application workflow in detail. Every major step
during the scan process is represented by a wizard page. It is easy to navigate
back and forth through the steps/pages using the navigation buttons (see chapter
4.3.8)
When launching the application it always shows the same state: The welcome
page. This is where the process starts.
25.6.1 Wizard Workflow

Chapter 2.4 Quick Scan Gide gave a brief introduction on the workflow of the
Routine Dialog. The following list shows how the wizard style Routine Dialog
advances through the process of scanning a sample step by step:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 242 of 397
X-LabPro 5
ID Page Task
Start page of the application shown after login and

1 Welcome Page
connecting
Define the maximum Z position (height) of the stage/

2 Stage Setup Page sample, set camera properties (e.g. zoom level), define
light intensity, calibration tasks
Scan a preview image of the stage/sample. This preview

3 Preview Scan Page will be used to define the scan positions. There are two
scan modes available: Raster Scan and Point and Shoot.
Easily navigate over the preview image and define the

4 Scan Setup Page spots to scan using Mapping mode, Linescan mode or
Pointscan mode.
Review your setup and select an evaluation mode (fast or

5 Verification Page
advanced)
During the scan the Scan Progress page shows

Scan Progress intermediate results and the remaining time until the scan
6
Page is finished. When finished the Page automatically switches
to the next page:
Review the results of the scan using Color

7 Scan Results Page Maps View, Spectra View (Pointscan only) or Results List
View (Pointscan only)

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 243 of 397
X-LabPro 5
25.6.2 Welcome Page
The Welcome Page is shown after the application is launched and initialized. This
page is meant to give an overview of the initial state of the device before entering
the scan process.
Use this dialog to check if the device is connected properly (see chapter 4.2
Connecting the Device); check if the simulation mode is deactivated (unless you
want it to be active) and if the device parameters are correct.
When the application initializes there may be some messages notifying about
required actions. For instance if the high voltage of the X-ray generator is active at
launch a message will ask to shut the voltage down.
In case of errors during the connection initialization of the application (e.g. if no
device could be found) an error message is displayed. The application will exit
after closing the message box.
After successful connection another message will ask if the standby mode of the
device should be activated (see chapter 4.4.2.1 Entering Standby Mode for more
information).
When the application initialization sequence has finished, the device was
connected properly and a choice about the standby mode was made, the Start
button of the wizard navigation gets enabled.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 244 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Click the Start button to begin the scan process using your MIDEX device and the
MIDEX Routine Dialog. The wizard switches to the Stage Setup Page (see chapter
4.4.3)
25.6.2.1 Entering Standby Mode

When standby is activated the X-ray generator runs on a level defined in the
X-LabPro configuration editor. The shutter, protecting the sample chamber from
X-rays, remains closed. It is safe to open the chamber and place a sample on the
stage.
The device remains in standby until a scan is started. After the scan has finished,
the standby mode will be reactivated.
The standby mode becomes active after every scan, even if it was not activated before.
Never switch off a device running in standby mode using the hardware switch. This could
drastically reduce the lifetime of the X-ray tube or cause direct damage to it. The X-ray tube
requires to be shut down softly by the MIDEX Routine Dialog to ensure a maximum lifetime
25.6.3 Instrument Setup Page

The Instrument Setup dialog is used to prepare the device, the stage and the
sample for the scan setup. It is suggested to process the following task remaining
their order:
Place the sample onto the center position of the stage
When the sample stage initializes it moves to the lowest possible position. This
makes it easy to place the desired sample onto it. It is recommended to put it into
the middle of the stage. Leave the door to the sample chamber open for now.
Move the sample to the center position of the camera live image
Use the stage navigation controls (see 4.4.3.2) to move the sample to the middle
position of the live image. Use the crosshair displayed on the screen as point of
reference.
Lift the stage carefully to the top of the sample chamber

This step needs to be handled very carefully! Lifting the stage too high can push
the sample into the detection system and cause damage to the device. Use the
stage navigation controls (see 4.4.3.2) to lift the stage to the top of the chamber
without touching it. If your device uses 2 mm distance for measurement, be sure
to have the sample at least at that distance. Move the last centimeters using the
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 245 of 397
X-LabPro 5
fine adjustment buttons.
Lock the maximum stage position

After reaching the desired position click the Lock Z Position button. This position
of the Z-axis will be written to the hardware controller of the MIDEX device. During
all following steps the stage cannot be lifted higher than the locked position.
If you put another sample into the chamber the position must be
defined again.
Set the camera preferences

You are free to set a camera zoom level and the intensity of the lights inside the
chamber.The following image shows the Stage Setup page. The table below
describes its components. For details about these controls see the following
chapters starting at chapter 4.4.3.1 Live Video:
1 Live Video Image See chapter 4.4.3.1

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 246 of 397
X-LabPro 5
2 Stage Navigation Controls See chapter 4.4.3.2
3 Camera Controls See chapter 4.4.3.3
4 Maximum Z-Lock Switch See chapter 4.4.3.4
25.6.3.1 Live Video

The live video control displays a realtime video image of the stage. The center of
the live video displays a crosshair. This crosshair can be used as a point of
orientation. The crosshair can also be used when calibrating the device or defining
the right distance for measurement (see 4.4.3.4.1 Finding the right distance for
measurement).
The crosshair marks the center of the image captured by the camera. This point is not equal to
the point of the X-ray beam. The offset may vary for each device and was calibrated during
production.
25.6.3.1.1 Live Video Settings

The video image color settings can be dynamically adjusted. To modify these
settings and save a current image of the sample stage the Routine Dialog offers a
context menu on the live video control. Right click on any part of the live video to
open the context menu and choose the desired option.
The color settings of the camera applied at startup are defined in the device
configuration file (.xcf). The default settings can be modified using another context
menu item.
The following functions are available:
Video Color Settings – opens a dialog to modify the color options of the camera. See
1
4.4.3.2
2 Reset Color Settings – resets the color settings to default as defined in the

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 247 of 397
X-LabPro 5
configuration file.
Save Color Settings to Config – changes the default settings in the configuration file
3
to the current settings
Capture Image – opens a Save Image Dialog Box to save a snapshot of the current
4
camera image
25.6.3.2 Stage Control

The MIDEX Routine Dialog allows moving the sample plate into 3 directions:
left/right, back/forth and up/down. The navigation left/right and back/forth can be
controlled like moving over a street map using north, east, south and west
directions. The MIDEX Routine Dialog offers a navigation wheel for intuitive
navigation in these directions:
Push the button leading into the desired direction to move the stage. The button
can be pushed and hold to move continuous. Leave the button to immediately stop
the movement. The faster the button is hit and left, the smaller is the distance the
sample stage moved.
Similar to these navigation buttons the interface provides buttons to move the
sample plate up and down:
The lift and lower buttons work like the navigation wheel buttons. Holding the
button moves the sample plate continuously into the corresponding direction.
These buttons should only be used as long as the distance to the detection area at
the roof of the sample chamber is large enough. If the distance gets lower use the

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 248 of 397
X-LabPro 5
fine adjustment buttons supporting movement of the sample plate in very small
steps:
These fine adjustment buttons move the sample plate up or down like the former
buttons but they behave differently. If a button is pushed the stage moves a
defined length. If the button is held down, the plate does not move continuously, it
moves a pre-defined amount of motorsteps. There are three different (but small)
distances to move the stage. It is recommended to test the movement using the
fine adjustment buttons in a safe distance to get a feeling for the distance moved.
For easier and faster handling of the stage the MIDEX Routine Dialog supports navigating
by keyboard. Every navigation button of the Routine Dialog has a corresponding keyboard
button:
Cursor Keys Navigate North, East, South and West like using the Navigation
(Up/Down/Left/Right) wheel
Lift or lower the sample plate like the lift and lower buttons of the
Page Up/PageDown Keys
interface
Lift the stage in small steps like the fine adjustment lift buttons
Num Pad 7, 8, 9 (number on the button matches the key on the number pad of the
keyboard)
Lower the stage in small steps like the fine adjustment lower buttons
Num Pad 1, 2, 3 (number on the button matches the key on the number pad of the
keyboard)
Num Pad / Switch the light on/off

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 249 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Num Pad * Switch the laser on/off
25.6.3.2.1 Point and Shoot Navigation

Another option to navigate north/east/south/west directions is Point and Shoot
mode, named after the MIDEX Routine Dialog fast preview scan mechanism (see
4.4.4.3 Point and Shoot Scan). The functionality of this navigation option is very
intuitive and fast to use. By clicking into any part of the live image, the clicked spot
will be moved to the center of the crosshair.
Very easy: Left-click onto the position you whish to be the center of the live image
and the stage moves it automatically to the center.
Before:
2. The spot is moved to

the center
1. Click the
desired spot
After:
25.6.3.3 Camera Control

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 250 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The camera controls can be used to define the zoom level of the camera image,
adjust the brightness of the light inside the sample chamber and to set the
intensity of the laser.
The Zoom level of the camera image can be chosen from a dropdown box
provided by the stage setup page. The available zoom factors are configured in
the device configuration file. The values can be edited using the X-LabPro
When selecting a different zoom level it is immediately applied to the camera.
Zoom levels in the dropdown list are relative to the initial setting (1x) and may not be equal to
the real measurements of the sample.
25.6.3.3.1 Light Level
The light level (brightness) inside the sample chamber can be adjusted using the
slider of the dropdown area of the light button. Clicking the other part of the button
toggle the light on/off.
Move the slider to increase or decrease the brightness level until the desired result
is reached. Then just click outside of the button area to close the slider.
A glowing bulb signals the light is switched on, a gray bulb shows the light is
switched off. If the light is switched off and on again, the former brightness level is
restored.
25.6.3.3.2 Laser Intensity

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 251 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The laser intensity can be adjusted similar to the light adjustment

button. Click the button to toggle the laser on/off. Open the slider and move it to
increase or decrease the laser intensity.
Review the state of the laser in the live video image.
The laser is calibrated to match one defined zoom level and because of that the
laser can not be used in any other defined zoom level. In this case the Laser
button is disabled.
25.6.3.4 Define the Maximum Z-Position of the Stage

Defining the maximum position means also defining the measurement distance.
The distance required for measurement depends on your device. Possible
distances are 2mm and 20mm. As stated before, this step requires to move the
sample to the center of the video image and to lift the sample plate up to the
measurement (or maximum) position.
The following chapter 4.4.3.4.1 describes in detail how this position can be
determined using the MIDEX Routine Dialog.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 252 of 397
X-LabPro 5
If this position is reached click the Lock Z-Position button to define the distance.
Now the position of the Z axis is written to the device what makes it impossible to
lift it higher during further processes.
If the position needs to be readjusted click the Unlock Z-Position button to do so.
Now the movement options are available again until the Lock Z-Position button is
clicked again.
If the maximum position was defined, the Next button of the wizard navigation gets
active and it is possible to proceed to the next wizard page Preview Scan. See
chapter 4.4.4 for more information on scanning a preview image.
25.6.3.4.1 Finding the right distance for measurement

The right position can be determined using the laser. The laser is configured to be
exactly at the center (crosshair) position of the live video if the right distance for
measurement is reached.
This setup is used to support samples of variable height. The following process is
the same as described in chapter 4.4.3 but this time it includes the laser to
determine the right measurement position:
1. Place the sample to the center position of the stage

Move the sample to the center position of the camera live image
Be sure to move the highest part of the sample into the center. This prevents from
touching the sample chamber roof and damage the detection area.
Lift the stage carefully to the top of the sample chamber

a. Turn the laser on and choose the optimal intensity
(Lower intensities are better for reflecting surfaces)
b. Lift the stage up until the sample is near the roof of the chamber.
c. Stop movement in a safe distance before the roof.
d. Review the live video image and step upwards using the fine
adjustment buttons. Remember to take care of the distance between
roof and sample.
e. If the laser dot is exactly in the center of the crosshair the
measurement position is reached. Adjust by stepping up and down until that
position is reached.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 253 of 397
X-LabPro 5
2. Lock the maximum stage position
3. Set the camera preferences and proceed to the next wizard page
25.6.4 Preview Scan Page

The MIDEX Routine Dialog supports two different modes to scan a preview image:
Raster Scan and Point and Shoot.
It is recommended to close the chamber door at this point. Best preview

scan results are reached using the internal illumination of the device
25.6.4.1 Scan Modes

Both scan modes support the creation of a preview image taken from the sample
inside the sample stage. In most cases a single capture of the camera is not
sufficient, for instance to create large Mappings across the sample. In this case
the whole sample plate can be scanned by moving a piece of the sample plate
below the camera and creating a snapshot, then moving to the next piece (or
segment) and so on. All segments are combined to a big (raster) image.
Another, faster option is Point and Shoot. It supports moving the stage quickly to a
desired position and capturing the segment. Then it can be directed to the next
desired segment and so on. This mode is recommended for small parts of the
sample to be scanned (e.g. Pointscans)
25.6.4.2 Raster Scan

The Raster Scan page shows a representation of the stage (as black plate)
separated into segments. The amount of segments is defined in the device
configuration file and can be edited using the X-LabPro Configuration Editor.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 254 of 397
X-LabPro 5
At this point there is no preview scanned and no segment selected for scanning,
all segments are black. The next step is to define which segments to scan. Every
combination is possible. If it is sure that a segment does not contain a part of the
sample or if there is no spot to scan, the segment does not need to be selected.
To select a segment just click it. The segment changes its color. To deselect an
already selected segment click it again. The segment will turn black again. To
quickly select all segments click the All button, to deselect everything click the
None button.
When every desired segment is selected, the selection may look like this:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 255 of 397
X-LabPro 5
To scan the preview, click the Scan Selected button and wait until the scan
process has finished. The MIDEX Routine Dialog application will move the sample
plate and capture all segments of the sample fully automated. It is not possible to
perform any tasks during this process.
If you wish to abort the operation click the Abort Scan button (Scan Selected has
changed). The scan will stop and the partly created preview image will be deleted.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 256 of 397
X-LabPro 5
25.6.4.3 Point and Shoot Scan

The Point and Shoot Scan mode, like the Raster Scan (see previous chapter)
displays a black presentation of the stage. But here the stage is not separated into
segments. The Point and Shoot page displays a single segment as a red
rectangle. This segment can be dynamically moved across the sample plate.
To define the exact position of the segment on the sample plate click into an area
near the desired position on the black field. The stage will be moved to display the
clicked spot in the center (crosshair) of the live video image on the right side of the
Point and Shoot page.
You can use Point and Shoot navigation on the miniature live video image as
described in chapter 4.4.3.2.2. This allows defining the position exactly. Click the
part of the sample you wish to be in the center of the live video. The application
will move the stage there automatically to the target position.
Verify the desired part of the sample is visible in the live video image, then click
Capture to add this segment the preview image. Repeat these steps until all parts
of the sample needed for scanning are visible.
The best results can be received if the segments scanned do not

overlap.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 257 of 397
X-LabPro 5
If the preview image fits your needs (and you have at least one segment
captured), click Next to go to the Scan Setup Page.
25.6.5 Scan Setup Page

The Scan Setup page is the most important page of the scan setup process. This
is where you can define the spots or parts of the sample to scan. You can define
method and scan duration for each scan. This is what the page looks like:
1 Scan type selection tab
2 Toolbar for edit modes

- Add Mode: Allows adding entries
- Delete Mode: Allows removing entries
- Grab Mode: Grab and move the
preview image
- Zoom Mode: Draw a rectangle on the preview to zoom in to the
rectangle area
and
- Full screen: Shows the complete preview
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 258 of 397
X-LabPro 5
image inside the preview area

- Options: Opens an options tool window
3 Toolbar for saving and loading list entries to/from a file.
4 Preview area
5 Thumbnail preview
6 Zoom selector
7 Mapping Entry – a table entry presented in the preview window
8 Information Fields – Shows coordinates of the cursor position on the

preview.
9 Setup properties – Choose Method Class for scanning and define the units
to show
10 Table with scan entries – one entry is one Mapping, Linescan or Pointscan.
Table values (method, duration, coordinates, etc.) can be edited.
25.6.5.1 Toolbars
The scan setup page offers two different toolbars. The first is used to switch edit
modes, the second offers options to save or load from/to the current table setup.
Add Mode
Toggles the ability to add Mappings by drawing them into the preview image.
Delete Mode
Toggles the ability to remove entries from the table

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 259 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Grab mode (enabled by default)

Toggles the ability to click and hold inside the preview and drag the preview
image. This moves the visible section of the preview image the amount the mouse
cursor was dragged.
Zoom Mode
Toggles the ability to zoom into a smaller area of the preview image by drawing a
rectangle around the desired region.
Fullscreen
Switches the zoom slider to show 100% of the scanned image inside the preview
area.
Options
Opens a window to adjust the color of the Mapping presentation on the preview
image and to save the preview (full stage image) as image file.
Load Table
Opens a dialog box to load a previously saved list of Mapping, Linescan or
Pointscan entries. (depends on scan type, see chapter 4.4.5.8)
Save Table
Opens a dialog box to save the current list of Mapping, Linescan or Pointscan
(depends on scan type, see chapter 4.4.5.8) entries into a file.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 260 of 397
X-LabPro 5
25.6.5.2 Preview Image

The Preview area of the scan setup page is divided into two controls. The larger
main preview is used to perform actions like adding Mappings, the smaller
thumbnail preview is used to show which section of the complete image is
currently visible in the main preview (see next chapter 4.4.5.2.1 for more
information on the thumbnail preview).
The main preview area shows the scanned image generated in the previous
wizard page (Raster Scan or Point and Shoot). The zoom level and the portion of
the image visible in the preview area can be defined dynamically using the zoom
and navigation tools provided on the scan setup page. See chapter 4.4.5.3 for
more information on zooming and chapter 4.4.5.4 for more information on moving
the image to display a desired region of the preview.
If there are entries in the table, the preview shows these Mappings, Linescans or
Pointscans as crosses or as lines/rectangles if the zoom level is too small to
display crosses. The color of the crosses can be defined in the options tool
window. Each cross represents a point to scan. See chapter 4.4.5.9 for more
information on scan positions and how they are defined.
The main preview displays only entries of the current scan mode (Mapping,
Linescan, Pointscan) defined by the activated tab on top of the scan setup
page (see 4.4.5.8)
If an entry is not visible in the main preview this be caused by wrong

coordinates (e.g. outside the preview), too low resolutions (0 or 1) or a mark
color similar to the background of the sample (e.g. black on black).

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 261 of 397
X-LabPro 5
25.6.5.2.1 Thumbnail Preview
The thumbnail preview area shows a miniature version of the full image scanned
before. It marks the region of the image which is currently presented in the main
preview area. The thumbnail preview can be used to navigate over the full stage
preview image by dragging the section rectangle. Short clicking inside the
thumbnail preview area moves the center of the section rectangle to the clicked
spot. The main preview is updated immediately.
25.6.5.3 Zooming the preview

The scan setup dialog supports zooming in and out of the preview image. Using
image zoom you can easily define a position on the image exactly (up to one
pixel). On the other side it is easy to have an overview of the whole image or large
areas of it (by zooming out).
To completely zoom out use the Fullscreen button of the toolbar or simply right
click into the main preview area. The main preview updates to show the complete
image scanned before. If there is a portion of the main preview area left (e.g.
because of the aspect ratio) this part is filled using black color. The zoom level
cannot be set lower than this.
To zoom in using the preview image there are two possibilities:
The Zoom Slider
+ -
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 262 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Below the thumbnail preview area a zoom slider control is displayed. Moving the
slider increases/decreases the zoom level. Moving the zoom slider to the right
decreases the zoom level, the segment of the picture shown in the main preview
area gets larger.
Moving the zoom slider to the left increases the zoom level, the segment of the
preview displayed in the main preview area gets smaller.
The maximum Zoom level (slider fully left) is reached if the main preview area
displays a segment of 5% of the full preview image.
The view will not be interpolated; upscaling increases the pixel size of the image.
1. The Zoom Mode

Zoom mode offers the ability to define the rectangle to be displayed directly in the
main preview area. Zoom mode is activated using the toolbar button Zoom.
Proceed as follows:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 263 of 397
X-LabPro 5
1. Click on a spot inside the main preview area as start point and hold the left
mouse button down.
Drag the mouse cursor to the desired end point. Notice that the selection keeps
the aspect ration automatically. Release the left mouse button to finish.
3. The main preview now shows the contents of the selection using proper scaling
and moving.
Zoom mode remains active until it is deactivated or another mode was activated. It
is possible to zoom in until the maximum zoom level is reached.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 264 of 397
X-LabPro 5
To restart the zooming process, simply right click into the main preview. The
whole image is now visible and a new region to be zoomed in to can be
selected.
25.6.5.4 Navigating through the preview

If the zoom level is higher than the minimum, the preview image is not completely
visible. During creation of Mapping, Linescan or Pointscan setups it may be
necessary to move the visible area of the preview image in the preview area of the
scan setup page to another position. This can be established using the grab mode
or the thumbnail preview.
Grab Mode
The grab mode can be used to easily move the sample preview image. It works
using drag and drop. In grab mode the cursor becomes a hand when moving over
the preview area. Click on any spot inside the preview area and hold the mouse
button down. The hand cursor grabs the picture. Now move the mouse cursor in
any desired direction, the image moves the same amount. To apply the new
position just leave the left mouse button.
1. Click (and hold) a spot

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 265 of 397
X-LabPro 5
2. Drag to the desired position

3. Leave mouse button
Thumbnail Preview
Click anywhere into the thumbnail preview image and the clicked spot will become the
center of the main preview area. The zoom level will not be altered. Click, hold and
drag the rectangle to review the movement and the resulting display in the preview
area.
1. Click and hold a spot

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 266 of 397
X-LabPro 5
2. Drag the rectangle until the

preview area shows the desired part
of the sample
25.6.5.5 Preview Options

Click the Options button in the toolbar to open the View Options tool window.
The tool window can be opened while working inside the scan setup page. It does
not block input or progress on that page.
The Mapping Color region allows modifying the color used to mark the Mapping,
Linescan or Pointscan display (crosses, lines or rectangles) in the main preview
area.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 267 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The display color in the preview area will immediately change after selecting a new
color. This allows checking if the color meets the requirements (high contrast to
background).
Click the color drop down button to choose a different color. Choose one from the
predefined set or define a new color by clicking the More Colors button.
The default button color is restored, if the application is restarted. If you wish to
define a new default color select it and click the Set as default color button. This
action will write the color value into the configuration file and restore it after each
restart.
The Save Current View region offers possibilities to save the preview image (the
complete image, not just the preview area) into a file. There are two options:
Saves the image including the presentations of Mappings, Linescans or

Pointscans.
Saves the original image (without marks).
After clicking a button a Save Image File dialog box appears offering to save the
image as jpg, gif, png and bmp.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 268 of 397
X-LabPro 5
25.6.5.6 Method Class and Method Selection
It is recommended to choose a method class before adding Mappings.
Method classes can be configured in the X-LabPro Configuration Editor. By defining

method classes and assigning methods to it.
A Method class is a container for multiple methods of a similar type or for a similar purpose.
Choose a method class from the list of available method classes. The method list
that can be selected for an entry in the tables will be replaced with the method list
of the newly selected method class. If there are already entries in any table, a
warning will be displayed. If a new method class is selected the method selection
of all entries is reset to the first item of the new list.
For proceeding confirm the message, otherwise cancel it. After canceling the
method class will be set back to the former setting. The table entries will not be
changed.
The method lists for Mappings and Linescans contain only those methods marked as Mapping
compatible in the method administration of X-LabPro
25.6.5.6.1 Scan Duration
When a method is selected from a dropdown item in the table (see chapter
4.4.5.9), the scan duration is automatically set to the value defined in the
respective method. This default value can be edited using the method
administration of X-LabPro. The value displayed in the table can be modified and
applies only to the corresponding item. If the method selection changes, the value
will be reset to the value configured in the method.
The scan duration will also be reset if a new method class was selected and the method has
changed.
25.6.5.7 Saving and Loading Setup Lists

To load a scan setup file activate the tab for the corresponding scan type,
Mapping, Linescan or Pointscan). Click the Load Table button in the Load/Save
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 269 of 397
X-LabPro 5
toolbar. An Open File Dialog Box pops up requesting to choose a setup file.
Choose a compatible file from your file system. The following list shows the file
formats available for import:
*. mml MIDEXapping List – contains a list of Mappings
*.mll Midex Linescan List – contains a list of Linescans
*.mpl Midex Pointscan List – contains a list of Pointscans.
After selecting a file the list entries inside will be read and imported into the table
for the corresponding scan type.
If a file is loaded all existing table entries will be replaced by the imported
entries.
To save the list has to contain at least one item. Select the tab page for the
corresponding scan type (Mapping, Linescan or Pointscan) and click the Save
Table button. A File Save Dialog Box appears and offers to save the file as the
format matching the currently selected scan type.
25.6.5.8 Switching Scan Types (Mapping, Linescan or Pointscan)

The scan setup page of the MIDEX Routine Dialog offers three different scan
types:
Rectangular area on the sample

Configurable resolution, max. 128x128 (amount of
scan points horizontal and vertical evenly
distributed over the area)
Short scan duration for each point
Mapping
Simple evaluation mode only (see 4.4.6.3)
Result view as color maps, threshold maps or
threshold mix
Management as Mapping file
Line on the sample defined by start and end point

Configurable resolution, max 128 (amount of scan
points evenly distributed along the line)
Short scan duration for each point
Linescan
Simple evaluation mode only (see 4.4.6.3)
Result view as graph (XY-chart)
Management as Linescan file

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 270 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Single Point on the sample

Longer scan duration than Mapping and Linescan
Advanced evaluation mode
Pointscan Result view as spectrum or element listing
Management using Job Manager of X-LabPro
Select the scan type using the tab control at the top of the scan setup page.
Activate the desired tab to switch the view of the scan setup page to the
corresponding table. The table columns differ for every scan type. The following
chapter describes how the setup of a scan entry can be done.
25.6.5.9 Setup Mappings
If the Mapping scan type is activated the scan setup page shows the table for
Mapping scan entries.
The following list describes the columns of the table and their properties:
A name for the Mapping entry, unique in this list.

Mapping Name Text value If a new Mapping is created, the application assigns a default name
which can be edited afterwards.
List of methods according to the currently selected method class

Method Drop down list (see 4.4.5.6) changing the method causes a reload of the duration
cell and recalculation of the resolution.
Duration for scanning one point (usually millseconds for Mappings

Duration Numeric value
and Linescans, seconds for Pointscans).

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 271 of 397
X-LabPro 5
X coordinate of the start point (units here and below as selected,

X Numeric value
see 4.4.5.12).
Y Numeric value Y coordinate of the start point.
Width of the Mapping (base value to distribute horizontal scan

Width Numeric value
points).
Height Numeric Value Height of the Mapping (base value to distribute vertical scan points).
Numeric value
Res. X < 128
Count of scan points to distribute along the width of the Mapping.
Numeric value
Res. Y < 128
Count of scan points to distribute along the height of the Mapping.
Checked to do a Z axis auto correction before each scan point

Autofocus Checkbox
(automatic adjustment of measurement distance).
Selector to choose which visualization to show during scan

Visualization Drop down list
progress.
25.6.5.9.1 Adding, Deleting and Modifying Mappings
To add a Mapping first make sure the Mapping tab is activated at the top of the
scan setup page. Next use the zoom and navigation tools of the scan setup page
to set up the preview area. Ensure the complete area required for the Mapping is
visible. Then enter Add Mode by clicking the Add button of the toolbar.
In add mode click the first point of the Mapping (top left corner) inside the preview
area and drag a rectangle until the desired area of the Mapping is enclosed
exactly. Then leave the mouse button.
1. Click and hold

the start point
2. Drag the rectangle to

the end point
The Mapping is now added to the table at the bottom and displayed in the preview
area. If the position of the Mapping is not correct and needs to be modified, this
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 272 of 397
X-LabPro 5
can be done using the values in the table. Adjust a coordinate value and the
change will immediately be applied to the preview. If the positioning is done
choose a method from the method list in the new row of the Mapping table.
Changing the method will load the default duration for one scan point from the
method data and change the duration cell of the new row. The resolution values
will also be calculated after a change of the method. This calculation is based on
the size of the collimator. The application calculates how many points fit into the
width of the Mapping. After the method was defined, the values for duration and
resolution can be edited as required.
It is recommended to only lower the values for the resolution because a higher resolution could
lead to unexpected results due to overlapping scan points.
Deleting Mappings is done using delete mode. First make sure the Mapping tab is
activated and there are Mappings defined you wish to delete. Next enter Delete
Mode by clicking the Delete button in the toolbar.
The border of the preview area turns red to warn that you have entered delete
mode. It is important to be aware delete mode is activated to not accidentally
delete a Mapping. A new column is added at the beginning of the table containing
a button X. This is the delete button. To delete a Mapping in delete mode click on
the delete button of the corresponding table ro

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 273 of 397
X-LabPro 5
A message box is displayed requesting to confirm the deletion of the Mapping.

Click Yes to do so or No to cancel.
If you click Yes, the Mapping is removed from the list. The delete mode remains
active after a Mapping was deleted. If the last Mapping was deleted and the table
is empty, delete mode is deactivated automatically.
25.6.5.10 Setup Linescans

If the Linescan type is activated the scan setup page shows the table for Linescan
scan entries.
A name for the Linescan entry, unique in this list.

Linescan Name Text value If a new Linescan is created, the application assigns a
default name which can be edited afterwards.
List of methods according to the currently selected

method class (see 4.4.5.6) Changing the method causes
Method Drop down list
a reload of the duration cell and recalculation of the
resolution.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 274 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Duration for scanning one point (usually millseconds for

Mappings and Linescans, seconds for Pointscans).
X coordinate of the start point (units here and below as

StartX Numeric value
selected, see 4.4.5.12).
StarttY Numeric value Y coordinate of the start point.
EndX Numeric value X coordinate of the end point.
EndY Numeric Value Y coordinate of the end point.
Numeric value Count of scan points to distribute along the line defined
Res. X < 128 by the start and end coordinates.
Checked to do a Z-Axis auto correction before each

Autofocus Checkbox scan point (automatic adjustment of measurement
distance).
Selector to choose which visualization to show during

Visualization Drop down list
scan progress.
25.6.5.10.1 Adding, Deleting and Modifying Linescans

To add a Linescan first make sure the Linescan tab is activated at the top of the
to set up the preview area. Ensure the complete area required for the Linescan is
visible. Then enter Add mode by clicking the Add button of the toolbar.
In add mode click the first point of the Linescan inside the preview area and drag a
line until the desired end point of the Linescan is reached. Then leave the mouse
button.
1. Click and hold

the start point
2. Drag the line to the

end point

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 275 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The Linescan is now added to the table at the bottom and displayed in the preview
area. If the position of the Linescan is not correct and needs to be modified, this
can be done using the values in the table. Adjust a coordinate value and the
change will immediately be applied to the preview. If the positioning is done
choose a method from the method list in the new row of the Linescan table.
method data and change the duration cell of the new row. The resolution value will
also be calculated after a change of the method. This calculation is based on the
size of the collimator. The application calculates how many points fit into the length
of the Linescan. After the method was defined, the values for duration and
Deleting Linescans works similar to deleting Mappings, see chapter “Adding,
Deleting and Modifying Mappings” for more information on deleting table entries
using delete mode.
25.6.5.11 Setup Pointscans

If the Pointscan scan type is activated the table at the bottom of the scan setup
page shows the table for Pointscan entries.
A name for the Pointscan entry, unique in this list.

Pointscan Name Text value If a new Pointscan is created, the application assigns a default name
which can be edited afterwards.
List of methods according to the currently selected method class (see

Method Drop down list 4.4.5.6) changing the method causes a reload of the duration cell and
recalculation of the resolution.
Duration for scanning one point (usually millseconds for Mappings and
Linescans, seconds for Pointscans).
Drop down list

Job extendable The Job the Pointscan will be added to (see 4.4.5.11.4).
X coordinate of the scan point (units here and below as selected, see
X Numeric value
4.4.5.12).
Y Numeric value Y coordinate of the scan point.
Z Numeric value Z coordinate of the scan point.
Define Z Button Opens a window to define the Z-coordinate for the selected Pointscan.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 276 of 397
X-LabPro 5
25.6.5.11.1 Adding, Deleting and Modifying Pointscans

To add a Pointscan first make sure the Pointscan tab is activated at the top of the
to set up the preview area. Ensure the spot required for the Pointscan is visible.
Then enter Add mode by clicking the Add button of the toolbar.
In add mode click the point inside the preview area to set the coordinate for
scanning. To exactly adjust the point, click and hold the mouse button inside the
preview area and drag the point to the right position. Then leave the mouse button.
The Pointscan is now added to the table at the bottom and displayed in the
preview area. If the position of the Pointscan is not correct and needs to be
modified, this can be done using the values in the table. Adjust any coordinate
value and the change will immediately be applied to the preview. If the positioning
is done choose a method from the method list in the new row of the Pointscan
table.
method data and change the duration cell of the new row. The resolution value will
also be calculated after a change of the method. This calculation is based on the
size of the collimator. The application calculates how many points fit into the length
of the Pointscan. After the method was defined, the values for duration and
Deleting Pointscans works similar to deleting Mappings, see chapter 4.4.5.9.1 for
more information on deleting table entries using delete mode.
25.6.5.11.2 Defining The Z-Coordinate for one Pointscan

To specify a different Z-coordinate for each Pointscan in the table, the Table entry
contains a Define Z Button. The default Z-coordinate is equal to the maximum Z-
Position. The maximum Z position is also the highest position to define for any
Pointscan. The lowest position is the 0 position of the Z-stage.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 277 of 397
X-LabPro 5
To define the Z-coordinate click the Define Z button in the corresponding row of
the pointscan table. A tool window opens showing a live video image of the
sample stage. The window allows moving the stage in Z-direction and to define
camera option like it was already possible in the Instrument Setup Page.
The position defined by the corresponding pointscan row is automatically moved to

the center of the crosshair. Use the laser and the Z-adjustment controls to specify
the desired distance for measurement.
If the laser spot exactly hits the center of the crosshair click apply to save the Z-
coordinate. This value will be set as Z-coordinate for the pointscan after the tool
window was closed.
25.6.5.11.3 Pasting Pointscans from Standards
To scan standards defined in a method use the copy and paste feature of
X-LabPro. The following procedure describes how to copy standards from a
method and paste them into the Pointscan list:
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 278 of 397
X-LabPro 5
1. Start the X-LabPro Method Administration

2. Open the desired method and choose the Standards tab.
3. Select the standards to scan by highlighting them in the list (use shift+click or
ctrl+click to select multiple entries)
4. Right click any selected standard and select copy from the context menu.
(alternatively choose Edit->Copy from the main menu or push Ctrl+C)
5. Open the MIDEX Routine Dialog, follow the instructions to perform the instrument
setup and the sample scan and proceed to the Pointscan setup.
6. Add Pointscans to the list maintaining the order from the standards list in the
Method Administration.
7. Mark the first list item by clicking in the name field. Standards will be pasted
starting from the selected list item. This allows scanning standards and default
samples from one list.
8. Choose Edit ->Paste Standards from the main menu
9. The standards are pasted to the list. All values except the coordinates are write-
protected for standards. The coordinates can be changed to redefine the position
of the sample on the stage.
25.6.5.11.4 About Jobs
A job is a collection of scans (one or more). Jobs can be managed using the X-
LabPro Job Manager. Please consult the online help of the Job Manager for more
information on managing jobs.
To select a job for a Pointscan entry use the dropdown control in the Jobs column.
By default the selection is set using a default naming pattern configurable in X-
LabPro Configuration Editor (e.g. current date, week of the year, etc). This pattern
is applied to the first Pointscan entry in the list. Every following item will have the
job selection of its predecessor as default setting.
To change the job select another list item from the drop down list or add a new Job
name by selecting the first list item < New Job >.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 279 of 397
X-LabPro 5
After choosing to add a new job a window opens requesting to enter a name for
the new job. Enter a job name and click OK. The job name will be added to the
dropdown list and selected for the current Pointscan.
The job name will only be assigned to the scan; it is not created in the Job
Manager. The job will be created when the first item using that job name is
scanned.
25.6.5.12 Stage Coordinates and Units

The MIDEX Routine Dialog allows using different units to display and configure
stage coordinates. The used units can be switched using the drop down list
Display Units on the right side of the scan setup page.
The coordinate values used in files and background processes are always handled
as absolute amount motorsteps of the XYZ-stage motors starting at the
initialization position of each motor.
The MIDEX Routine Dialog uses a different coordinate interpretation. Values
displayed in the Mapping, Linescan and Pointscan tables are defined as distance
to the top left corner of the stage (which is identical to the top left corner of the
displayed preview image.
All coordinate values displayed in the MIDEX Routine Dialog base on the top left corner
of the stage (preview image)
25.6.5.13 Repro Scans

To perform repro scans first activate the Allow Repro setting in the Configuration
Editor of X-LabPro. This setting can be fount in the MIDEX Settings Dialog.
With repro scans enabled the pointscan tab of the scan setup page displays a
dropdown field to choose a number from 1 – 20. If 1 is selected the list is scanned
only once (default mode). The selections from 2 – 20 define the number of times

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 280 of 397
X-LabPro 5
the scan list will be processed. Selecting 5 means every pointscan in the list will be
scanned 5 times. The Scan Verification page will display the full list including all
repetitions. The routine dialog allows repeating a maximum of 10 pointscans up to
20 times.
The MIDEX Routine Dialog allows recalibration using Global or MCA. To define a
recalibration use the pointscan tab of the Scan Setup page. Add the appropriate
number of pointscans and place them on the standards on the stage.
Choose Edit->Recalibration->Global or Edit->Recalibration->MCA in the main
menu. The Routine Dialog will switch to recalibration mode. Continue the
recalibration lie a usual scan.
To reset the Routine Dialog to default scan mode use Edit->Reset Table in the
main menu.
25.6.6 Verification Page

After all Mappings, Linescans or Pointscans and the scan details (method,
duration, etc.) are set up in the scan setup page, set the desired scan mode for the
following scan. This can be done by selecting the tab on top of the scan setup
page. Then click Next to proceed to the Scan Verification Page.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 281 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The Scan Verification Page displays the selected scan mode and the setup
created before. On the right side it displays evaluation options.
Notice that the Next button of the wizard navigation changed to Start. This means
finishing the tasks on this page and advancing in the process will finally start the
measurement of the selected spots.
25.6.6.1 Review the Scan Setup

The preview area of the verification page shows the full preview image including
the defined Mappings, Linescans or Pointscans. Review your scan setup as
follows:
Make sure the desired scan type is selected. This is the only tab left at top of the
page. If it does not match go back to the previous page, activate the desired tab
and click Next to return to the scan verification page.
Visually check the preview image and ensure the Mappings, Linescans and
Pointscans are at the right positions
 Check the contents of the table:

 Names correct?
 Correct methods selected?
o Coordinates matching desired positions?

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 282 of 397
X-LabPro 5
o Right Job(s) selected (Pointscan only)?

o Visualization set correct?
25.6.6.2 Select an Evaluation Mode

On the right side of the scan verification page select an evaluation mode:
Only available for Mappings and Linescans. Performs a quick

evaluation of the
Simple evaluation mode
detector information without using advances evaluation algorithms.
The results will be displayed as relative intensities only.
Only available for Pointscans. Performs a slow but very reliable

evaluation
Advanced evaluation mode using advanced algorithms. The results will be displayed in
concentration
values.
No evaluation Saves the detector information and does not run any evaluation.
The Direct Print option is available for Pointscans only. If this option is checked,
the results are sent to the printer after a measurement has finished.
After choosing an evaluation mode and selecting the Direct Print option (if desired)
everything is set up for measurement.
25.6.6.3 Start the Scan
After verification of the scan setup click the Start button to start the scan and
switch to the scan progress view.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 283 of 397
X-LabPro 5
25.6.7 Scan Progress Page

The measurement is started while switching to the scan progress dialog and will
be executed automatically. No user interaction other than reviewing intermediate
results is required.
During scan progress the view may switch to another result presentation as
configured in your scan configuration. For more information on scan results view
see chapter 4.4.7.3 Visualization of Results.
During measurement the scan progress and the remaining time is displayed in the
parameters bar (see chapter 4.3.2). The X-ray generator will be active and the
shutter will be opened for each scan point. The voltage of the X-ray generator will
also be displayed in the parameters bar.
25.6.7.1 Display of Scan Progress

The scan progress will be displayed as remaining time of the current scan and as
the amount of scans remaining to scan.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 284 of 397
X-LabPro 5
25.6.7.2 Intermediate Results View

The results displayed during measurement are not reliable. These results will be
refreshed every time the detection system delivers new data. The longer the
measurement process is running, the more reliable the intermediate result.
The display of intermediate results is identical to the final results view. Please see
chapter 4.4.8.1 Visualization on more information.
25.6.7.3 Aborting the Scan

The measurement can be aborted while it is active. To abort the measurement,
click the Abort Scan button in the wizard navigation. All measurement data and
results will be lost and the wizard will switch back to the scan setup page. Here
you can correct the scan setup or go back for instance to change the sample.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 285 of 397
X-LabPro 5
25.6.8 Scan Results Page

After the automated measurement process has finished, the
MIDEX Routine Dialog automatically switches to the Scan Results page. This
page is identical to the scan progress page but it does not display progress
information.
25.6.8.1 Visualization
The available visualizations depend on the scan type (Mapping, Linescan or
Pointscan). Mappings can be visualized as color maps. Linescans offer Linescan
view only. Pointscan results can be displayed as a list of elements or as a single
spectrum. The following chapters describe these visualizations.
25.6.8.1.1 Selecting an Element
Mappings can display multiple elements in one view. These elements can be
configured in the method using the X-LabPro Method Administration.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 286 of 397
X-LabPro 5
To display a single element the MIDEX Routine Dialog allows switching to a single
element view. To select an element use the drop down list on the right side of the
scan results page.
The All elements list item displays all elements configured in the method. Select
an element from the drop down list and the view switches to display only the
selected element.
25.6.8.1.2 Lossless Zooming of Results
A single element view can be zoomed using the Zoom Selection drop down list.
Choose a zoom factor and the view is updated immediately. The zoom of the
image is lossless, there is no interpolation. Each pixel of the Mapping will be
multiplied by the zoom factor.
1x
3x
25.6.8.1.3 Color Maps
Color maps are views of the intensity of an element at a scan point (one pixel).
The higher the intensity of the element, the higher gets the intensity of the color.
Every element is displayed as a rectangular image with its own colors.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 287 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The base color is black, which means if the intensity gets lower, then the color of
the pixel gets darker. A black pixel means the element does not exist (or the
intensity is extremely low).
Here some examples from different scans:
25.6.8.1.4 Linescan View
For Linescans there is only one view available. The view shows an XY graph
listing the points and their relative intensity side by side. Every element is shown in
a separate graph and may have a different color.
This view can be very useful to analyze the homogeneity of elements across a line
on the sample. The more linear the line is displayed on the graph, the more
homogeny is the element on the line.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 288 of 397
X-LabPro 5
25.6.8.1.5 Result List
The result list is only available for Pointscans. It displays a list of elements and
their concentrations and intensities.
25.6.8.1.6 Spectrum View
The spectrum view is only available for Pointscans. It displays the detailed
spectrum received during measurement.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 289 of 397
X-LabPro 5
25.6.8.2 Result Files and Jobs
When the measurement has finished, the results are saved for later use. This is
where the functionality of the MIDEX Routine Dialog ends. For further evaluation
and review of results the Spectra Viewer of X-LabPro is required.
The results of Mappings and Linescans are saved as file archives to the file
system of the computer running the MIDEX Routine Dialog. Pointscans are added
to Jobs and available in the X-LabPro Job Manager.
25.7 After measurement

If the measurement was finished and the results are available, the wizard
navigation displays a Finish button.
To finish the scan process and continue operating the MIDEX device click Finish.
A message box will be displayed and offer different options how to continue:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 290 of 397
X-LabPro 5
25.8 Evaluating of mappings measured with SPECTRO MIDEX
The mapping images displayed in the spectrum viewer show the intensities in
regions of interest of the spectrum. In addition to this the software also allows to
evaluate mapping files to get concentrations calculated and displayed in the
mapping file. For this the minimum measurement time is 3 s per spectrum!
If the analytical method is already appropriate for the evaluation (for example of
alloy applications) the procedure is fairly easy
Open the evaluation tool, then click on the folder symbol to start the file open
dialog.
In the following dialog select the file which shall be evaluated.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 291 of 397
X-LabPro 5
And confirm with Open. To start the evaluation click Go.
After the evaluation is finished the intensities in the mapping file will be replaced
by concentration values. When opening again the mapping file in the spectrum
viewer do not activate the fast evaluation when asked.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 292 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The display not contains mapping images based on concentrations. The

concentrations can be exported in ASCII format with commands in the spectrum
viewer window.
If the method is not appropriate to evaluate the mapping file or the calibration
needs to be adapted the easiest way may be to create some “virtual samples”
from the mapping. For this display the mapping file in the spectrum viewer.
Then select the method, with which the mapping was created.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 293 of 397
X-LabPro 5
In the mapping select a single point and with a right mouse click it is possible to
create a virtual sample from this single measured spectrum.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 294 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The virtual samples are stored automatically in a job with the name of the mapping
file.
From here those sample files can be copied into the method.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 295 of 397
X-LabPro 5
In the method the virtual samples can be handled as “regular” samples. The
calibration of the method can be changed based on the measurements of the
samples.
When this procedure is finished the evaluation of the mapping file can be started
as described above.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 296 of 397
X-LabPro 5
SPECTRO iQ II Easy GUI

26 How to start
To start the X-LabPro Easy Routine Dialog right-click on the Communication
Server symbol. In the upcoming menu select Easy Routine Dialog.
Figure 17: Using the ComServer

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 297 of 397
X-LabPro 5
27 Starting up
27.1 Log in
When the Easy Routine dialog starts up, first you have to provide your login and
password.
Figure 18: Log in
27.2 Interlock check

On every start up you have to perform an interlock check.
Please open the lid and close it again when you are asked for. Then press OK.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 298 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Figure 19: Interlock check
27.3 Standby mode

As next you are asked whether to go into standby mode. If you do not want to go
into standby mode right now, you can switch it on later by using the Standby
button.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 299 of 397
X-LabPro 5
28 Using Easy Routine
28.1 Introducing the dialog

When the start up procedure is finished the dialog will look like in Figure 4.
Figure 20: Easy Routine Dialog
In the upper part of the main dialog you can see the Parameter Bar stating the
actual measurement parameters. While measuring, the bar will be updated
continually.
Right next to the Parameter Bar is the Close Button.
On both sides of the dialog are several Function Buttons.
Below the buttons are two State Icons.
In the center you can see the Sample View. The Sample View is shown by default
on start up. By using the buttons below the center view you can switch between
Sample View and Spectrum View.
While measuring the Spectrum View shows the measured spectrum.
After a measurement is completed the Sample View shows the analysis results.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 300 of 397
X-LabPro 5
28.1.1 Sample view
Figure 21: Sample View
The Sample View contains all needed controls to prepare a measurement.

In the first four rows you can edit the sample name and select the method class,
method and job.
Below is the Result List where the measurement results are shown. After
performing a Validation the list contains an additional row with the validation result.
The progress controls show the remaining measurement time; separated into
 Sample time: the time remaining for measuring the current sample.
 Plate time: the time remaining for the complete measuring process
( incl. time for preparing a measurement with gas flush or vacuum).
The two buttons below let you switch between Sample View and Spectrum View.
28.1.2 Selecting a Method class

can select the desired method class.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 301 of 397
X-LabPro 5
28.1.3 Selecting a Method

can select the desired method.
The dialog only shows methods which are in the current method class.
Figure 22: Select dialog
28.1.3.1 Selecting a Job

At start up the job is preset according to the setting from the Configuration Editor.
To select a different job press the Select button next to the edit field. A dialog
( Figure 6 ) opens and you can select the desired job.
28.1.3.2 Editing a Job

To edit the job press the Edit button next to the edit field. A Virtual Keyboard
( Figure 7 ) appears. Type in the new job and press OK to accept it.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 302 of 397
X-LabPro 5
28.1.3.3 Editing the sample name

At start up the sample name is preset with 'NewSample'.
To edit the sample name press the Edit button next to the edit field. A Virtual
Keyboard ( Figure 7 ) appears. Type in the new sample name and press OK to
accept it.
28.1.3.4 Pasting a sample

Click here, to paste a sample from the Job Manager into Easy Routine Dialog.
It is not possible to paste a standard. For pasting standards, please use the
Routine Dialog. Further on, the method to which the sample belongs must not be
hidden or finalized.
It is possible to resume the measurement of a not completely measured sample.
For example: if your sample contains 6 measurements and 5 of these are already
measured, you can paste the sample and start measuring the last one.
It is not possible to paste a completely measured sample.
28.1.3.5 Using the virtual keyboard
Figure 23: Virtual keyboard
The Virtual Keyboard can be used like a normal keyboard. Shift and Caps Lock
work in the expected way. Selecting characters with Shift is not possible.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 303 of 397
X-LabPro 5
To move the cursor in the edit field use the Arrow buttons left to the edit field.
To delete the character left to the cursor use the Delete button on the right side of
the edit field.
Press OK to accept the name or Cancel to close the dialog.
28.1.4 Spectrum view
Figure 24: Spectrum View
During a measurement the Spectrum View displays the currently measured

spectrum.
The Spectrum View can be enabled / disabled in the Settings dialog.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 304 of 397
X-LabPro 5
28.1.5 Close Button
Figure 25: Close button
Clicking the Close button exits the Easy Routine Dialog. You will have to confirm
exiting. If the high voltage is switched on, it will be powered down before the dialog
is closed.
28.2 Function Buttons
28.2.1.1 Start
Figure 26: Start button
The Start button is active only when no measurement is performed.

Clicking the Start button starts a new measurement.
It will change into the Stop button while measuring.
28.2.1.2 Stop
Figure 27: Stop button
The Stop button appears only during measurements.

Clicking the Stop button stops the actual measurement. The high voltage will stay
switched on. When the measurement is stopped, the Start button is shown again.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 305 of 397
X-LabPro 5
28.2.1.3 Pause
Figure 28: Pause button
The Pause button is active only during a measurement.

Clicking the Pause button will pause the measurement.
It will then change into the Continue button.
28.2.1.4 Continue
Figure 29: Continue button
The Continue button appears only during paused measurements.

Clicking the Continue button will continue a paused measurement. When the
measurement is continued the Pause button is shown again.
28.2.1.5 Off
Figure 30: Off button
The Off button is active only when the x-ray tube is on.
Clicking the Off button ends the Standby mode.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 306 of 397
X-LabPro 5
28.2.1.6 Standby
Figure 31: Standby button
The Standby button is active only when the x-ray tube is off.
Clicking the Standby button switches the instrument into Standby mode.
28.2.1.7 Settings
Figure 32: Settings button
The Settings button is active only when no measurement is performed.

Clicking the Settings button opens the Settings dialog ( see chapter Settings
dialog for more details ).
Figure 33: Recalibration button
The Recalibration button is active only when no measurement is performed.

Clicking the Recalibration button opens the Recalibration dialog ( see chapter
Recalibration dialog for more details ).

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 307 of 397
X-LabPro 5
28.2.1.9 Validate
Figure 34: Validate button
The Validate button is active only when no measurement is performed.

Clicking the Validate button to prepare a validation. In the upcoming dialog you
have to select which method contains the needed Validation Sample. After
successfully selecting the method, click Start to perform the validation.
28.2.1.10 Print
Figure 35: Print button
The Print button is active only when no measurement is performed.

Clicking the Print button will print the actual measurement results directly to the
default printer. When no results are present nothing is printed.
28.2.2 Parameter Bar
Figure 36: Parameter Bar
The Parameter bar states the actual measurement parameters:

 the part measurement of the actual sample.
 the gas flow in liters per hour.
 the voltage in kilovolts.
 the current in milliampere.
 the maximum measurement time for the part measurement of the sample in
seconds.
 the measurement time for the part measurement of the sample in seconds.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 308 of 397
X-LabPro 5
28.2.3 State Icons

The State icons reflect the actual instrument state. Therefore each icon has two
different states.
28.2.3.1 Lock/Unlock
Figure 37: Sample chamber locked
The sample chamber is locked.
Figure 38: Sample chamber accessible
The sample chamber is accessible.
28.2.3.2 X-Ray on/off
Figure 39: X-Ray on
The x-ray tube is switched on.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 309 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Figure 40: X-Ray off
The x-ray tube is switched off.
28.2.4 Settings dialog
Figure 41: Settings dialog

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 310 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The Settings dialog lets you configure some parts of the Easy Routine dialog.
 enable / disable the Spectrum view.
 enable / disable printing directly after evaluation of the measurement.
 enable / disable Full screen mode. The Full screen mode is suitable only
when a touch screen monitor is used because in Full screen mode the
mouse pointer is hidden.
 enable / disable the question for an inserted protection foil.
28.2.5 Recalibration dialog
Figure 42: Recalibration dialog
With the Recalibration dialog you can prepare the instrument calibration.
Click one of the Recalibration method buttons to prepare the recalibration.
For information about the different calibration methods click the Help button next to
the Recalibration method button.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 311 of 397
X-LabPro 5
28.3 Recalibration
In this chapter the application flow of the different recalibration methods is
explained.
For information about the different calibration methods open Recalibration dialog
and click the Help button next to the Recalibration method you are interested in.
28.3.1 MCA
To perform a MCA Recalibration, open the Recalibration dialog and click the
MCA button. The recalibration is then prepared. If the actual method does not
contain any MCA sample you will be noticed.
If a MCA sample was found, the Easy Routine Dialog then switches into
Sample.
When the recalibration is complete the results are shown in the Result List. The
Easy Routine Dialog switches back to Normal Mode.
28.3.2 Global
To perform a Global Recalibration, open the Recalibration dialog and click the
Global Recalibration button. The recalibration is then prepared. If the actual
method does not contain any Global sample you will be noticed.
If a Global sample was found, the Easy Routine Dialog then switches into
Sample.
Depending on the settings in the Configuration Editor the Global Recalibration
is performed with one or more samples.
Mode.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 312 of 397
X-LabPro 5
28.3.3 Intercept
To perform a Intercept Recalibration, open the Recalibration dialog and click the
Intercept Recalibration button. A Select Dialog opens and you can choose a
method for calibration. The method must contain an Intercept Sample. After
successfully selecting a method, the recalibration is then prepared.
Depending on the settings in the Method Configuration the Intercept
Recalibration is performed with one or more samples.
Mode.
28.3.4 Method
To perform a Method Recalibration, open the Recalibration dialog and click the
Method Recalibration button. A Select Dialog opens and you can choose a method
for calibration. The method must contain a Method Sample. After successfully
selecting a method, the recalibration is then prepared.
When the recalibration is complete the results are shown in the Result List. In an
additional column in the Result List the recalibration factors are shown.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 313 of 397
X-LabPro 5
28.4 Validation
In this chapter the application flow of the validation is explained.
To perform a Validation, click the Validation button. A Select Dialog opens and
you can choose a method for validation. The method must contain a Validation
Sample against which the new sample is validated. After successfully selecting a
method, the Validation is then started.
When the Validation is complete the results are shown in the Result List. In an
additional column in the Result List the validation result is shown:
 a marks a valid result, the measured concentration was within limits.
 a marks an invalid result, the measured concentration was out of range.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 314 of 397
X-LabPro 5
SPECTRO iQ II XRF Tutorial

The term method is used in a very specific way in the X-LabPro Software. A
method is far more than only a calibration.
It is a complex structure built up from sub-methods:
The Method Administration is divided into different parts:
 General
 Elements
 Standards
 Measurement
 Deconvolution
 Calibration
 Output
In General all general parameters can be found.
In Elements the elements for the calibration (and additional elements, which can
be in the samples) are selected. In addition the concentration range is defined
here.
The card Standards contains a list of all standard samples in this method. This list
is used to create standards, to define the given concentrations...
Measurement defines all parameters of the measurement: the x-ray tube
conditions (voltage and current), type of sample, evacuation of the sample
chamber, measuring time, target, and so on.
The deconvolution section defines the elements of interest for each target /
measurement.
During the deconvolution the net count rates for the selected elements are
determined.
The calibration contains the functions typically described by the term calibration.
The selection of a specific calibration model and the correlation between net count
rates and concentrations are part of this sub-method.
This options and cards can be used to modify or check an existing method.
To create a new method, a comparable method should be selected in the tree part
of the screen. This source is copied using New in the menu Method. The visible
method is copied (with or without samples can be chosen in the following window).
That is the best way to start, because a method contains a lot of parameters and
details and all these will be copied from a working method. That's much easier
then start to start all over.
"How to create a new Method?" descibes the sequence of the most important
steps. In addition to this way, the Method Wizard can be a help to accelerate this.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 315 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The a.m. parts are influenced by each other, and the best way to design a new
method is to start with elements, followed by the measurement, the deconvolution,
the calibration and finished with the output.
But even the first steps, the selection of elements and the measurement
conditions, are already influenced by the aims of the calibration. A brief outline of
the steps for an idealized method development is listed below:
1. Select the Elements, which can be in the samples
Select the Elements, for which a concentration should be calculated (they
2.
have to be a part of the elements selected one step above)
3. Depending on 1. and 2. the Measurement Conditions have to be selected
Measure one or several standards without evaluation and use the Spectra
4.
Viewer to check 1. - 3.
Optimise the measurement conditions depending on the results of 4.: This
5. can be: Vacuum?, gas-flush?,
measurement time? or excitation conditions?
6. Define or optimise the deconvolutrion parameters based on 1. and 2.
7. Measure the calibration standards
8. Optimise background spectra for the method
9. Evaluate the samples to get the net count rates
Calibrate the method. The procedure, which should be used, depends on
10.
the number of elements and the concentration range
11. Evaluate standards again
12. Edit the output sub-method
Some of the steps are very easy to perform, while others require a detailed
knowledge of the software.
All of the critical steps will be explained in detail on the linked pages, but it is
impossible to explain all of the basics of x-ray fluorescence spectroscopy in this
guide. Please refer to the typical literature on these topics.
30 Calibration
The sub-method Calibration is used to get the correlation between the measured
net count rates and the given concentrations of the standards.
The user interface depends on the procedure which is selected at the tab General.
This figure above shows the calibration screen, when the SPECTRO procedure is selected.
This is the most comprehensive calibration and contains three different sub-procedures:
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 316 of 397
X-LabPro 5
 Mass Attenuation Coefficient This procedure is used to calculate the

"concentration"
of the non-visible part of the sample. This calculation - based on the
Compton-peak - is used to normalize the results (of an unknown sample).
Whether this feature can be used, depends on the selected procedure.
Whether it should be used, can be defined in General.
 Compton Calibration This calibration is an empirical calibration. As part of the
SPECTRO procedure, it is used to calculate start values for the following and
final calibration based on Fundamental Parameters.
The Compton model is using the intensity of the scattered Compton peak to
correct matrix influences.
 Fundamental Parameter Calibration. The Fundamental Parameter Model (FP)
is a calibration model, which tries to explain the spectra of the sample by
physical equations. At the end of this procedure, a theoretical sample is
calculated, which shows the same spectra as the measured one.
 On top of this selection list an important and well-known calibration can be
chosen:
Lucas-Tooth, Price. This calibration is the easiest correlation between
intensity and concentration, because it's a line, described by concentration =
calib-factor * intensity.
As summary, three analytical procedures (plus combinations for hybrid
procedures) can be used in X-LabPro:
 Lucas-Tooth, Price as easiest calibration model
 Extended Compton model using the Compton peak for matrix correction, if the
concentration range is too wide for Lucas-Tooth/Price
 Fundamental Parameter Model, if the concentration range (and the matrix
range) is wide

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 317 of 397
X-LabPro 5
30.1 Calibration Procedure

net count rates and the given concentrations of the standards. The simplest case
is a linear relation between these two values, but in most cases it will be more
complex. In X-ray fluorescence, the net count rate is influenced drastically by the
matrix and therefore needs an evaluation model to correct for this.
The software X-LabPro contains a wide selection of calibration models. They can
be selected using the function Mathematics in the tab General.
The Calibration models can be divided into three sub-groups:
 Empirical models (like Lucas-Tooth/Price or extended Compton)

 Fundamental parameter models (FPM)
 Specials like Layer Thickness
Fundamental parameter models calculate the inter-element effects on the basis of

physical relations. In empirical models, all matrix effects have to be corrected on
the basis of real measured standards.
One of the advantages of a fundamental calibration approach is the lower number
of necessary standards (approximately one per element calibrated is
recommended), but on the other hand the demands on the standards for an FPM
are higher. As all inter-element influences are calculated on a theoretical basis the
complete composition of a standard, even the concentrations of the elements not
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 318 of 397
X-LabPro 5
measurable via XRF (i.e.: carbon, oxygen), are necessary.

Empirical models are commonly used for narrow ranges of matrix variation or if
some other influences, like grain size effects, do not allow the use of fundamental
parameter methods.
A brief description of the different models, their typical fields of application and
some hindrances are listed in the following table:
Calibration Model Typical Application
Analysis of low-Z elements (Na to Fe) as main and

minor elements. Especially in slag, dusts and minerals
Lucas-Tooth, Price
when particle size effects hinder a theoretical
calculation.
Standard based FP Main, minor and trace elements in a varying but known
(thick) matrix, i.e. additives in oil.
As FPM (thick): The normalization to 100% is only
Standardless FP (thick) useful, if all main and minor elements can be analyzed,
i.e. alloys.
Standard based FP Low sample amount on filter material (i.e. aerosols),
(thin) very thin films.
As FPM (thin): The normalization to 100% is useful, if
all of the main and minor elements can be analyzed.
Standardless FP (thin)
Typical application is the rubber technique with
diamond paper. The method works without calibration.
Analysis of the layer thickness on a substrate, i.e.
Layer thickness model
Aluminium on Silicon wafer.
In addition to the calibration models above, some general options can be set here.
The calibration models will be explained in the following in more detail.
The following figure compares the four most common procedures with their
advantages and disadvantages:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 319 of 397
X-LabPro 5
This figure compares the four procedures regarding Accuracy and how much they
are matrix indepentent. The meaning of this comparison is that Lucas-Tooth/Price
is the procedure using a minimum of mathematics which results in the best
accuracy. The more mathematics are used, the bigger the deviations.
On the other hand, the models located at the left side of this figure, are not able to
handle different matrices or a wide range of concentrations in the same calibration.
If it is important to use a method, which is matrix independent, one of the models
of the right side of the figure should be used.
But then there can be a bigger deviation between expected and calculated results:
In addition, there are some individual advantages / disadvantages for each
procedure:
 Lucas-Tooth/Price: The advantage is the simple algorithm. It can be
controlled using a pocket calculator and it is "stupid", that means, there are no
physical / logical tests (e.g. a concentration can be > 100%) - this can be
used for special jobs
 Extended Compton: The most important limitation for this model is the
Compton-peak, which is needed. If in measurement no sub-measurement
using a Compton-Target is defined, this procedure cannot be used for
calculations.
 Fundamental Parameter Model: Defining the given concentrations, the
software has to know all information about the elements in the calibration
standards, e.g. if a Diesel, containing 400 ppm of Sulphur should be defined,
the residual nearly 100 % of "oil" are important for the procedure, too. This
100%-knowledge can be a big problem.
 Spectro-procedure: Disadvantages are the same as for FPM, additionally
more samples (especially for mac) are needed.
Unfortunately it is not possible to give a general answer to the question, which

procedure should be used. There are too many details influencing this decision
e.g. elements in the samples, concentration range...
One possible way is, to start with the easiest (especially mathemetics) procedure
to get an impression about the correlation between intensities amd concentration.
If Lucas-Tooth/Price is able to solve this application problem, it's the best choice.
If it is not able to solve it, the next procedure can be tried (Ext. Compton, if a
Compton-Peak is available).
The physical procedures using a lot of mathematics inside should be used at last
or if completely unknown samples should be analyzed.
Matrix for Calib. (Element Bonds)

If this option is selected, all elements will be converted to their bonds. This makes
it possible to calculate concentrations for low-Z elements (especially Oxygen)
without measuring them directly. These calculated values for the low-Z elements
will be taken into account during matrix correction.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 320 of 397
X-LabPro 5
If Matrix for Calib. should be used, they can be selected in General from a set of
predefined bonds. To edit / create predefined Bonds the Configuration Editor has
to be used.
Normalization
All options for the normalization are concentrated in the Normailization region on
General.
The normalization procedure allows to force the sum of the concentrations on a
specific value (defined by Normalization Concentration). This function influences
the concentrations after the calibration. The options MSK (mac) and Normalization
to a fixed concentration are not possible at the same time. When MSK is selected,
an additional tab is displayed in the calibration tab.
The use of a Difference element is an additional option. This can only be one of
the non-visible elements (typical H to F). If this option is used the difference
between the sum of all analyzed elements and 100% is calculated as the
difference element. It is possible to select bonds for the difference elements (see
sub-method evaluation) to define matrices like (CH2)n for an organic sample.
The option Normalize Results normalizes the results before each iteration step, so
that the matrix effects are calculated again based on the new information. The
option Normalize Results will be performed after the last iteration. This will always
lead to a sum of all concentrations equal to the Normalization Concentration.
These options can be used successfully, if all elements can be analyzed directly
(i.e. alloys) or if the bonding state of the elements is exactly known (i.e. oxides in
fusions) and the option Matrix for Calib. is selected at the same time.
This normalization has nothing in common with the normalization on the Compton
scattering peak or the normalization on regions of spectra used in the evaluation
process.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 321 of 397
X-LabPro 5
30.2 Empirical Calibration using Lucas-Tooth/Price

The easiest possible correlation between intensity and concentration is the
following:
concentration = calib-factor * intensity.

This describes the procedure called Lucas-Tooth/Price.
In detail we find a lot of possible corrections like Offset or 2 types of Interelement-
Corrections (Overlapping elements and Matrix elements).
This card shows on the left side the list of the standard samples.
There are two possible presentations: If the option "Hide non-certified samples" (at
the right side) is enabled,
two important conditions will control, if a sample appears in this list:
The standard needs a given concentration for this element AND intensity is found
for this element during evaluation.
If this option is disabled, one of these conditions is enough, because it is an OR-
condition.
This standard list contains different columns:
N This column shows, if the sample is a part of the calibration and about its
weight:
None
Sample is not in the calibration
1-5
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 322 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The sample is in the calibration. The number shows, how many times this
sample will be in the calibration
Name That's the name of the sample
Norm. Int The normalized intensity of the selected element in this sample.
We like to use normalized intensities, because using them, we are able to
handle different tube currents and/or measurement times in the same
calibration.
Given That's the goal
Conc.
C The certification level describes, how "sure" the given concentrations are:
N Not analyzed. simple: not analyzed
L Laboratory The given concentration is measured using another
instrument
I Info At a certification paper some values are certified as
"Info"
C Certified The given concentration is certified
Calc. The result of the calibration
Conc.
Diff. To check the quality of the calibration, the differences between calculated
and given concentrations are an important number.
At the right side of this sample list, some options were located, explained in
the following:
Lower Conc./Upper Conc.:

These two values were calculated by the calibration mathematics - please do not
change them
Calibration Weight
That's a value to control the calibration range, which should be important. If the
calibration for smaller concentrations should be increased, reduce the value and
vice versa for high concentrations...
Color Level
After the calibration is done the sample are shown using black or red color: The
red color means, that the difference between given concentration and calculated
value for this sample is too big. The limit, if a line is printed red or black, is this
parameter (in % relative).
Hide non-certified samples

This option controls, which samples are shown in the sample list.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 323 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Output Unit
The concentrations in the standard list are presented in the internal unit "ppm".
Most times it is more comfortable to use the unit, which is used for the printout.
Calibration regions
Only for Lucas-Tooth/Price it is possible, to calibrate using up to 3 regions. If more
then 1 region is selected, the limits to switch between the regions have to be
defined. The presentation on this card shows only the selected region. As result,
the region which is interesting has to be selected. All following steps are now for
this region. If another region should be modified, it has to be selected first..
Possible Corrections:
Intensity Ratios
That's an unusual correction option, only available for this empirical model
(Lucas-Tooth/Price): These are normalized matrix elements (normalization of
count rates or weighting of the concentrations). This leads to better analyzes of
samples with irregular surfaces. When using this correction, the calibration should
be checked with a large number of samples
Overlapping Elements
Elements that influence the deconvolution of the main line of the element of
interest through peak overlap. If systematic error occurs (because of this) during
deconvolution, the respective elements should be selected here. For example the
K-lines of S are overlapped by the M-lines of Pb. This overlapping can lead to a
systematic error. Pb should be entered as an overlapping element for S.
Matrix Elements
Secondary excitation and discontinuity elements are entered as matrix elements
for the Compton model. Secondary excitation elements are used for Fundamental
Parameter Models. Elements that have a matrix influence on the element of
interest are entered for Lucas-Tooth/Price
Offset
If the calibration needs an offset, this can be enabled here.
Parameters:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 324 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The card Parameters shows the calibration parameters.

After a successful calibration the Slope should be shown. All other parameters are
additional options.
Calibration Diagram:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 325 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The Calibration Diagram shows the calibration line. The different signs are
showing the level of certification.
If the right mouse button is used, a context menu is available, to select different
options like linear or logarithmic scaling.
Touching a sample with the mouse, an info-box appears, that shows some details
regarding this sample.
A double-click in the top-line (with the double-line) opens the diagram as full-
screen version.
Calculate:
The button Calculate will start the mathematical procedure to calibrate the selected element.
If no errors occur, this ends in the window which informs about the standard deviation during
the calibration.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 326 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Enable All/Disable All:

A faster way - especially if a complete new method has to be calibrated and each
sample is disabled - to enable samples for calibration is the "all"-feature. Instead of
marking each sample individually by clicking, it is much more comfortable to select
all samples using this feature.
Reset:
This function allows to reset the calibration to the last set of parameters, if the
actual calibration was not successful.
Print:
It is possible to print the calibration data (samples, results, parameters, standard
deviation) e.g. for documentation.
If something is going wrong or if some unexpected results were calculated, an
error message will appear, which informs about the problem.
30.3 Calibration based on a Fundamental Parameter Model

(FPM)
There are two different types of calibrations built-in in X-LabPro:
EMPIRICAL CALIBRATIONS and FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETER MODELS
The empirical procedures like extended Compton or Lucas-Tooth / Price try to find
a correlation between intensities and concentrations using "stupid" mathematics -
if the calculated parameters can be explained or not.
The complete opposite of this strategy are Fundamental Parameter Models.
They try to explain the sample during the calibration and the evaluation of
unknown samples. It's not just a calibration factor together with an intensity which
is creating the result - it's much more...
During the calibration all known information about the sample is taken into
account. These are much more then the given concentration. These are in addition
all other concentrations (including "non-visible" elements like Oxygen), Loss of
ignition, the (theoretical) Mass Attenuation coefficient based on the
concentrations....
All this together is used for calibration. If the calibration is done and unknown
samples are analyzed the evaluation is again not easy, because all calculated
information/concentration are used to calculate the element of interest.
Unfortunately the concentration of this element can have an influence to other
elements.
As result the calculation of the other elements has to be repeated, which will
influence again the element of interest....That's a big circle and at the end we will
find some concentrations.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 327 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The calculated concentrations are responsible for the spectra - that's the theory of
the FP-Model.
Following the calibration screen for Fundamental Parameter Model is described.
This description takes care for the differences to Lucas-Tooth / Price. Similar
functions are explained there.
K-Shell/L-Shell:
That can be an option for future...not available yet.
Secondary excitation via Matrix Elem.:

This option allows to work with Matrix Elements, which can be defined, using the
"Matrix Elements" icon.
Thick sample extrapolation:

For light elements a sample with a thickness of several millimeters is thick
compared to the penetration depth.
But the heavier the elements, the bigger the penetration depth of the exciting
radiation.
For heavy elements the thickness of the sample influences the intensity in the
spectrum.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 328 of 397
X-LabPro 5
This parameter uses the sample thickness for calculations. Depending on

experience and physical data, this parameter is used starting at Bromine (Br = 35).
Calculate:
after pressing calculate, the calibration is done, but before the final window shows
the standard deviation
an additional screen presents some intermediate results:
If something has gone wrong or if some unexpected results are calculated,

an error message appears, which informs about the problem.
Corrections:
There are three places to select corrections at this calibration screen:
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 329 of 397
X-LabPro 5
 Overlapping Elements
 Matrix Elements
 Calibration with Offset
30.4 Special procedure for Calibration of Layer thickness

Analysis of the layer thickness on a substrate, e.g. Aluminum on Silicon wafer or
layers of Gold.
The card looks different compared to the other procedures, because this
calibration is a special one:
First of all a layer thickness can be detected in different ways:

- The Emission of the coating is detected and the thicker the coating is, the higher
the intensity.
- The second way is Absorption: The observed intensity is created by the
substrate.
The thicker the coating is, the bigger the absorption of the radiation of the
substrate and
the smaller the intensity of the observed peak of the substrate element.
- The best way is a combination of both: Emission/Absorption
The first calibration can be used for Au-Layers on other metals, the second can be
used, if the coating material is not visible for XRF (like plastic coatings) and the
combination is used e.g. for wafers.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 330 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The example above shows case 1 (Emission of the coating material) for Gold
layers. In this case some options for the substrate material are disabled, because
the substrate is not taken into account.
The calibration is completed, if the intensity, which is found for the blank sample
(green high-lighted in the figure above), is used as "Offset" value (here: 0,0041)
(light blue). This has to be done manually !!!!
30.5 Elements
This tab is one of the most important tabs in a method, because it contains a list of
all elements, which
a) can be contained in the samples
b) should be analyzed.
Both will control the Measurement Conditions and the Deconvolution!
As first step (using the button Elements on top) all possible elements have to be
defined.
These are the elements which can be in the samples.
All the selected elements are visible in the list, shown above.
Now, as second step, one can assign the elements of interest. This can be done
by using the Analysis Elem column. If an element is marked here, the intensity of
this element is fed to the calibration procedure to calculate a concentration.
The LODs are the Limits Of Detection for each element.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 331 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The column Conc. Range Min. [µg/g] defines the lower limit of the calibration and it
describes the detection limit. The following column Conc. Range Max. [µg/g] is
important to define the size of the concentration range.
That's an important information regarding the calibration procedure.
The values for both columns will be extracted from the method automatically.
Whether the columns called Coupling Factor L... and Conc. Limit [µg/g] are visible,
depends on the user level.
The last column contains the correction factors, which are calculated during a
Method Recalibration.
In addition to these factors the two factors for the scattering intensities (Coherent
Back Scatter Correction and Incoherent Back Scatter Correction) are editable on
top of the list.
If Bonds should be used, they can be selected from a set of pre-defined bonds at
General and/or Output.
To edit / create pre-defined bonds the Configuration Editor has to be used.
30.6 Measurement
The setting of the measurement conditions is one of the first steps of the method
development.
It is necessary to decide the purpose of the method first. Which are the critical
parameters, detection limits or measuring time?
Is it possible to measure the samples in vacuum or is gas flushing necessary?
Which elements are important?
These questions have to be answered in advance to create a tailor made method
for a specific application.
For almost all elements a variation of different excitation conditions exists for each
instrument. The first step is to select the best target combination for a specific
method.
A method is limited to 8 different targets. The number of targets used is influenced
by the analytical needs and by the measuring time.
Some basic rules for the development of a measurement strategy:

1. Always start the method with the Compton target if you need the information
of the Compton Scattering (for details: see Calibration).
2. Proceed with the target requiring the highest excitation energy. The
information from this measurement about the concentration of the heavy
elements can be used to improve the deconvolution of low-Z elements
influenced by line overlaps of the L or M-Lines of the heavy elements.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 332 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Such a combination is Molybdenum and Sulfur: The Sulfur-K-line, which is

used for calculations, is overlapped with the Mo-L-line.
Without any correction, Mo in the samples will influence the S-results. If the
sub-measurement which calculates Mo-K is done before the S measurement
the result of the latter can be corrected.
3. To analyze traces of light elements in a high-Z matrix, use a target that can
only excite the analyte. This is only possible if the energy of the excitation
source is between the absorption edges of analyte and matrix.
4. To increase the count rate, it is possible to increase the tube current.
Increasing the tube current leads to a higher intensity of the radiation.
Increasing the tube voltage not only changes the intensity, but also the
spectral composition of the radiation. Thus, it is necessary to create new
background spectra when the tube voltage is changed.
All measurement parameters are set in the sub-method Measurement.
The General Settings of the measurement are located in the upper half of the
screen. The number of sub-measurements can be selected here. Additionally, the
environmental conditions (vacuum, air or He-flush) are selected here.
The lower half of the screen contains the settings of sub-measurements for this
method.
Some of the values in the lower part of the window should not be changed, others
can be varied (see below). An overview of the parameters, the possible settings
are listed in the table below.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 333 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Parameter Notes
Channels 1024 and 2048 channels are recommended for
measurements at the Energy Range 12,5 and 25 keV,
respectively. For measurements at the Energy Range of 50
keV 4096 channels should be used. - Do not change
Peak Time [µs] The time for the detection electronics to shape a peak. This
time is a characteristic value for the detection electronics. It is
important to note that all used combinations of peak time and
energy range must be calibrated with the Method called MCA.
- Do not change
Zero Peak Rate Necessary for the accurate dead time correction - Do not
[cps] change.
Energy range The scaling of the x-axis of the spectra. For light elements we
[keV] like to use 12.5 keV, for mid-range energies 25 keV and for
heavy elements 50 keV. Each target or filter has its own
recommended Energy range. - Do not change
Target Selects the target for this sub-measurement.- Do not change
Voltage The excitation depends on the voltage which is used. A
voltage depending on the selected target/filter is
recommended. Changes in the voltage will influence the
background spectra which have to be modified after changing
the voltage. - Do not change
Current The optimum dead time is 25%. If Current Regulation in
enabled (see next item), the current stored here is only the
default start value. This will be regulated depending on the
intensity which is influenced by the sample type.
Current When this option is activated, the settings for tube current will
Regulation be used as a starting current only. The software will measure
the sample with the given settings and then optimize the tube
current. The resulting intensity should not exceed 100,000
cps.
Measurement Default: This option is selected as standard stop criteria.
Time Limit
Measurement This is the clock time for the measurement. It is not possible to
Time select a live time.
Live time = clock time * (1 - rel. dead time).
Measurement An alternative option to end a sub-measurement. If the
Pulse Limit number of counted impulses is bigger than the given value in
No. of Impulses the measurement will stop. If both options
(Measurement Time Limit and Measurement Pulse Limit) are
selected, the criteria first met will stop the sub-measurement.
No. of Impulses For the Measurement Pulse Limit option the criteria for
stopping the sub-measurement can be set here.
First Channel For the above listed option No. of Impulses the region of
interest (ROI) must be defined. This is done with the two

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 334 of 397
X-LabPro 5
parameters First Channel and Last Channel. This is only

necessary, if the option Measurement Pulse is used.
Last Channel See above.
30.7 Spectra Viewer

The Spectra-Viewer is an important tool in X-LabPro.
If elements should be identified using only the Spectra Viewer, please take care of
the ARTEFACTS !
The Spectra Viewer can be used for method development, because the question,
which elements could be in routine samples, can be answered a little bit easier
using this tool.
This information is necessary to define the deconvolution together with the
measurement conditions.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 335 of 397
X-LabPro 5
30.8 Deconvolution
The deconvolution is necessary to determine the net counts for the individual
elements of the method. This includes the subtraction of a background spectrum
and a selection which lines should be used for the deconvolution. As a method is
constructed of several sub-measurements, the parameters have to be defined for
each of the sub-measurements. It is possible to deconvolute elements in several
sub-measurements to correct for line overlaps, but it is only possible to calculate
the concentration from a single sub-measurement.
The sub-method Deconvolution is divided into two kinds of tabs:
The tab General is a summary of the deconvolution to get an overview.
The number of background spectra and the corresponding switching limits can be
selected here. The switchover values are the Compton to Rayleigh scattering
ratios. Therefore, it is only possible to use several background spectra, if a
Compton target is used in the method. With several background spectra available
for each target it is possible to calibrate different matrices with a different scattered
background (like organic and silicate samples) in one method.
The list shows, which elements have to be deconvoluted during evaluation in
general. These elements can be selected at the tab Elements.
All elements which are present in a specific sample, should be selected.
Even if the calculation of the concentration is not planned, it may be
necessary to deconvolute the lines because of possible interferences and
line overlaps.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 336 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Using the tabs Measurement x, all details of the deconvolution can be modified:
The main part of the screen is a list of elements, which shows all selected
elements, using the button Elements at the right side. The elements, which can be
chosen at this place are pre-defined on the Elements tab. Only elements chosen
on the tab are selectable here.
If an element appears in the list, the last three columns can be modified / defined:
The columns Line and Deconvolution describe the kind of calculation, which
should be applied. For example, Sodium will be calculated from the K-Alpha line
using Serial Fit as strategy. Possible strategies are:
- Summation,
- Series Fit ,
- Line Fit and
- Line Fit with Standardization
The check boxes in the column Conc are necessary to decide, whether an
intensity is used for the calculation of the concentration or just as intensity e.g. for
overlapping corrections. When a number is shown (like for Chromium) that means
that the concentration for this element must be calculated using the intensity from
a different sub measurement (Cr = 1).
On the right hand side there are 4 buttons to edit additional parameters.
Elements
If this button is selected a window with a periodic table of the elements will appear
on the screen:
In this periodic table all elements that were selected in the tab Elements are
marked in yellow and can be selected. All elements which can be excited in this

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 337 of 397
X-LabPro 5
sub-measurement should be selected. To select an element, click the element

symbol and the color changes to red.
All selected elements will be deconvoluted. It is not necessary to calibrate all of
them or use them as concentration elements. For the Compton target it is
essential to deconvolute the elements even if no concentration is calculated from
the Compton target (like in most geological calibrations). In this way the overlaps
with the scattering lines can be corrected.
Only the elements selected in this PTE can be ticked as "concentration elements"
in column Conc.
Deconvolution Region:
Most of predefined SPECTRO methods do not require any changes in the
deconvolution settings. If this is required for a specific application, the Optimization
must be disabled
With the above defined settings all lines to be deconvoluted are selected, but it is
not defined where the lines are and in which way they should be grouped in
deconvolution areas. These deconvolution areas are selected with the button
Deconvolution Region. These ROIs should be created in such a way that all
elements are in ROIs but not too many lines in the same ROI.
To create a ROI, the cursor is moved to the left edge of the planned ROI and then
the right mouse button is pressed. When the mouse is moved to the right hand
side – with still pressed mouse button – a region will be marked as ROI in a
different hatching. To simplify the creation of the ROIs, it is quite useful to show
the lines of the elements for this sub-measurement. This makes it easier to check,
if all elements are in selected regions and if all lines of the elements with Series Fit
are in the same deconvolution area.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 338 of 397
X-LabPro 5
To create the background regions, it is necessary to display a spectrum. The

sample shown in the window can be selected at the bottom of this window. There's
a list with all measured standards.
The deconvolution areas will be copied together with the rest of the parameters,
when a method is copied. So, it is not necessary to edit all the regions.
Background Region:
A background spectrum can be fitted to the measured spectrum after some of the
detector artefacts (as an example: pile-up, escape, shelf) have been corrected. To
do this, fitting regions have to be defined, according to the
way described under Deconvolution region:
The fitting of the background spectra allows to use longer measuring times for the
background spectra to reduce statistical effects. The fitting regions should never
be
in regions where elemental lines might influence the height of the fitted
background.
Normalization Region:
The normalization regions are defined exactly the same way as deconvolution and
background regions.
These normalization regions can be used as an internal standard even for other
sub-measurements. Two normalization regions are allowed per sub-measurement.
Iron-Cobalt-Correction:
With the button Iron Cobalt Corr. a special correction for Cobalt can be activated.
This correction improves the determination of Cobalt traces in the presence of a
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 339 of 397
X-LabPro 5
large amount of iron. The correction factor should not be changed. This special
correction is only possible if the Co K and the Fe K- Lines are in separate ROIs.
Use Optimization:
By ticking the Use Optimization check box the parameters from the three buttons
Deconvolution Region, Background RegionNormalization Region are calculated
automatically.
The deconvolution of a sub measurement follows the rules:

The deconvolution areas (ROI, region of interest) are unfolded with increasing
energy.
 In each ROI, the elements with Line Fit or Line Fit with Standard will be
processed with increasing energy. The K-line (or the L-line) will be
deconvoluted and founded on the net count rate.
 The additional lines of the same shell will be subtracted from the spectrum.
For the L-series all lines of the three different sub-shells LI, LII and LIII will be
considered. The coupling factors for the sub-shells can be edited in the
Evaluation sub-method.
 Then all elements with a Series Fit are deconvoluted with increasing energy.
The deconvolution parameters are absolutely essential for the proper evaluation of
a sub-measurement. Wrong or missing deconvolution parameters might result in
severe problems of the software.
A series fit is only allowed, if all lines for one specific element are in the same
deconvolution area (see Deconvolution Region) and if the background under the
lines is not too different.
If the background is too different, the line ratio might be influenced and this will
harm the accuracy of the series fit.
While copying a method all of the elements, lines and even deconvolution
strategies will be pre-set, reducing the necessary effort to a minimum.
30.9 Deconvolution Strategies

elements of the method.
This can be done, using different mathematical procedures:
- Summation,
- Series Fit,
- Line Fit and

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 340 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The first one is used only for special applications (e.g. during a mapping using a
MIDEX equipped with xyz stages).
To explain the differences between Line Fit and Series Fit, let's have a look, what
happens with a new unknown sample during its evaluation:
The energy-range of a sub-method is divided in different Regions of Interest
(ROIs).
These ROIs and their contents will be calculated from low-energy ROIs to high-
energy ROIs.
Starting with the first ROI, the first step will be the Line-Fit for all Line-Fit-
Elements:
It will start with the elements with the smallest Atomic-Number. In common cases
the Alpha-line like K-Alpha is chosen. In this case, the K-Alpha-line of this element
will be fitted. Based on this result, the corresponding Beta-line is calculated using
a theoretical alpha-beta-ratio. After removing these lines (alpha and beta) from the
spectra, the deconvolution will continue with the next element.
Doing this step-by-step (or element-by-element) all elements Line-Fit was chosen
for, will be removed from the spectra.
The residual spectra will be taken into a next deconvolution step:
In this last step, all elements with Series Fit (in one ROI) are deconvoluted in one
step in a big equation-system.
Line-Fit with Standardization means that, if a minimum intensity is reached, the
peak is used to recalibrate the energy-channel-calibration for this sample.
30.10 Artefacts:
The following figure shows a spectrum of the sample V2O5.
Without the artefacts the spectrum should contain the background information
from the instrument and the V-lines.
But in reality the spectrum looks a little bit different than expected: In addition to
the V-lines, it shows the 4 artefacts:
- Shelf
- Tail
- Escape
- PileUp

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 341 of 397
X-LabPro 5
As the figure shows, SHELF and TAIL are both creating additional background at
the low-energy side of a peak. Both decrease the S/N ratio with the result of
increased detection limits.
If elements shall be identified manually, the artefacts described in the following are
more difficult to handle, because they are creating "peaks":
The artefact Escape has an energy which is reduced by around 1,75 keV
compared to the "original"-peak. That's the energy of Silicon, which is used as
detector chip material.
The PileUp occurs, when 2 photons, reaching the detector at the same time are
identified as 1 photon with doubled energy. If the "original" peak is a single peak
(because peaks cannot be separated) like Si-K-series, we will find 1 PileUp peak.
The figure above shows what happens with 2 lines like alpha- and beta-line: These
two lines will generate 3 PileUp lines, because 2 alpha-photons or two beta-
photons or an alpha- with a beta-photon can combine.
30.11 Background Spectra

One part of the evaluation of a measurement is the subtraction of the Background
Spectra.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 342 of 397
X-LabPro 5
For each sub-measurement up to 6 Background Spectra can be stored

(Deconvolution). In a SPECTRO iQ II only one background spectrum per method
is typically defined.
The background spectra are stored as standards and at the Standards they are
visible as it is marked with B.
It can be necessary to modify these background spectra depending on the

application.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 343 of 397
X-LabPro 5
30.12 Background and Contaminations

In addition to the elements in the sample, which will have to be measured, there
are some "contaminations" in the spectra, making the job a little bit more difficult.
"Contaminations" of Spectra:
**********************************************************************************************
The Target:
- HOPG-Target: The tube material (anode): Pd +
Reflections
All these "contaminations"
together are visible in the
The Measuring Chamber:
Background spectra.
- Iron
The Detector:
- Ta, Zr or Pd and a little bit of Sn (detector
cooling)
**********************************************************************************************
Sample Cups / Protection Film:
- Prolene: without contaminations
- Mylar: P and Ca
- Carbonat: Si
The Dilution Material:
- Oil: Sulfur
- Charcoal: a variety of elements
Artefacts
Contaminations in the instruments, e.g. after a foil crack, or caused by sample
preparation
*********************************************************************************************

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 344 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Background Spectra:
Background Spectra for SPECTRO iQ II:
HOPG-Target
25 keV
(Low-Energy
range)
HOPG-Target
48 keV
(Mid-Energy
range)

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 345 of 397
X-LabPro 5
30.13 Library of Standards

The Library of Standards is available in the menu Tools.
It is a database which contains the given concentrations of a lot of Certified

Reference Materials (CRM). These data should be used during the creation of new
samples used as standard:
It is much faster done, if the given concentration were copied/imported from this
database instead of entering each element concentration.
30.14 Regions in Lucas-Tooth/Price

The Lucas-Tooth/Price calibration is the only one, which supports more then one
calibration region.
This feature can be used, if the concentration range is too big to get good results.
An example is Sulfur in Diesel. There are two possible regions:
- Around 400 ppm of S as common region and
- smaller then 10 ppm of S for Low-S-applications.
This example is used to show the region-feature.
First of all, the number of regions has to be increased. Doing this, the parameter
"Limit 1 - 2:"
is used to define the switching-limit. That's the concentration, where the next
region
(in this example region 2) starts. In the figure below, the limit is 10 ppm, that
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 346 of 397
X-LabPro 5
means,
that for concentrations smaller then 10 ppm region number 1 is used and for
higher concentrations region 2:
Pressing "Calculate" will calibrate only region 1!

The "Selected Cal.-Region:" shows, that the list at the left side is presenting the
samples and results for region 1.
If the second region (> 10 ppm) should be calibrated, change the "Selected Cal.-
Region" into "2":

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 347 of 397
X-LabPro 5
After this change, pressing "Calculate" will calibrate the second region.
30.15 Error Messages during Calibration
some error messages can appear, if something

After pressing
unusual was calculated.
Following a summary of these messages:

Message Reason Solution/next step
Negative Offset A negative Offset was Remove the Offset option
calculated
Offset seems to be Offset is unexpected big If the reason can be found
too big and explained, the message
can be ignored (1)
Incorrect The calculated correction Remove the mentioned

correction cannot be explained element
by Physical laws
Negative The calculated correction Remove the mentioned
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 348 of 397
X-LabPro 5

by Physical laws
Unexpected The parameter for the If the reason can be found
correction correction is unexpected and explained, the message
big. can be ignored (2)
No. of Standards Too many corrections More samples or less

too low No samples selected corrections (including Offset)
"Enable" samples
Negative Slope The slope of the calibration Many times, there is an error
line is negative in the given concentration like
a wrong unit during definition.
Has to be removed
Known examples for error messages which can be explained / ignored:
(1) "Offset seems to be too big" If the detector has a Zirconium collimator, the
offset for Zr will generate this message - that's ok.
(2) "Unexpected correction" Some K- and L-series line-overlapping like Ba-
L and Ti-K are creating these messages, if they are corrected.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 349 of 397
X-LabPro 5
SPECTRO XEPOS XRF Tutorial

The term method is used in a very specific way in the X-LabPro Software. A
method is far more than only a calibration.
It is a complex structure built up from sub-methods:
The Method Administration is divided into different parts:

 General
 Elements
 Standards
 Measurement
 Deconvolution
 Calibration
 Output
In General all general parameters can be found.
In Elements the elements for the calibration (and additional elements, which can
be in the samples) are selected.
In addition the concentration range is defined here.
The card Standards contains a list of all standard samples in this method. This list
is used to create standards, to define the given concentrations...
Measurement defines all parameters of the measurement: the x-ray tube
conditions (voltage and current), type of sample, evacuation of the sample
chamber, measuring time, target, and so on.
The deconvolution section defines the elements of interest for each target /
measurement.
During the deconvolution the net count rates for the selected elements are
determined.
The calibration contains the functions typically described by the term calibration.
The selection of a specific calibration model and the correlation between net count
rates and concentrations are part of this sub-method.
This options and cards can be used to modify or check an existing method.
To create a new method, a comparable method should be selected in the tree part
of the screen. This source is copied using New in the menu Method. The visible
method is copied (with or without samples can be chosen in the following window).
That is the best way to start, because a method contains a lot of parameters and
details and all these will be copied from a working method. That's much easier
then start to start all over.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 350 of 397
X-LabPro 5
"How to create a new Method?" desrcibes the sequence of the most important
steps.
In addition to this way, the Method Wizard can be a help to accelerate this.
The a.m. parts are influenced by each other, and the best way to design a new
method is to start with elements, followed by the measurement, the deconvolution,
the calibration and finished with the output.
But even the first steps, the selection of elements and the measurement
conditions, are already influenced by the aims of the calibration. A brief outline of
the steps for an idealized method development is listed below:
1. Select the Elements, which can be in the samples
Select the Elements, for which a concentration should be calculated (they
2. have to be a part of the elements
selected one step above)
3. Depending on 1. and 2. the Measurement Conditions have to be selected
Measure one or several standards without evaluation and use the Spectra
4.
Viewer to check 1. - 3.
Optimise the measurement conditions depending on the results of 4.: This
5. can be: Vacuum?, gas-flush?,
measurement time? or excitation conditions?
6. Define or optimise the deconvolutrion parameters based on 1. and 2.
7. Measure the calibration standards
8. Optimise background spectra for the method
9. Evaluate the samples to get the net count rates
Calibrate the method. The procedure, which should be used, depends on
10. the number of elements and
the concentration range
11. Evaluate standards again
12. Edit the output sub-method
Some of the steps are very easy to perform, while others require a detailed
knowledge of the software.
All of the critical steps will be explained in detail on the linked pages, but it is
impossible to explain all of
the basics of x-ray fluorescence spectroscopy in this guide. Please refer to the
typical literature on these topics.
32 SPECTRO Calibration - a Hybrid Procedure

This special procedure combines different procedures to get a calibration that
works with unknown samples in unknown matrices.
This is possible, because the evaluation is done in the following steps:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 351 of 397
X-LabPro 5
1. Mass Attenuation Coefficient (mac):

As option, the MAC calibration can be used as first evaluation step. If this is
enabled, the Compton peak is used to calculate the mass attenuation
coefficient. That's a physical parameter which can be used to calculate the
"concentration" of the non-visible part of the sample (Carbon, Oxygen,
Hydrogen, Nitrogen...).
2. Extended Compton Model:
The Compton calibration is an empirical calibration. As part of the Spectro-
procedure, it is used to calculate start values for the following and final
calibration based on Fundamental Parameters. The Compton model is using
the intensity of the scattered Compton peak to correct matrix influence.
3. Fundamental Parameter Model (FP):
The FP calibration is the final calibration in the Spectro-procedure and it's a
calibration model, which tries to explain the spectra of the sample by physical
equations. At the end of this explanation, a theoretical sample is calculated,
which shows the same spectra as the measured one.
4. Normalization:
As the final step, the calculated results can be normalized (as option). This
normalization works in two possible ways:
- mac:
If the mac-calibration (see 1.) is used, the results are normalized to the
sum of the "visible" part of the sample, which is: 100% minus "non-visible"
part. The size of the "non-visible" part was calculated in step 1.
- a fix sum concentration:
If a fix sum (like "100 %") is defined, the results will be normalized to this.
That's an option, which can be used for alloys.
Such a calibration using the Spectro-procedure is done in the following steps:
1. The samples must be evaluated to get an intensity for all elements and the
Compton peak.
2. The calibration placed on the first tab (Mass Attenuation Coeff.) has to be
done at first.
3. After finishing this, the samples have to be evaluated another time.
4. The next step is, to calibrate using Compton procedure
5. After finishing this, the samples have to be evaluated again.
6. The last calibration step is the FPM procedure.
7. Finally, the samples have to be evaluated.
If something is going wrong or if some unexpected results are calculated, an error

message appears which informs about the problem.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 352 of 397
X-LabPro 5
33 Calibration
net count rates and the given concentrations of the standards.
The user interface depends on the procedure which is selected at the tab General.
This figure above shows the calibration screen, when the SPECTRO procedure is
selected.
This is the most comprehensive calibration and contains three different sub-
procedures:
 Mass Attenuation Coefficient This procedure is used to calculate the
"concentration" of the non-visible part of the sample. This calculation - based
on the Compton-peak - is used to normalize the results (of an unknown
sample).
Whether this feature can be used, depends on the selected procedure.
Whether it should be used, can be defined in General.
 Compton Calibration This calibration is an empirical calibration. As part of the
SPECTRO procedure, it is used to calculate start values for the following and
final calibration based on Fundamental Parameters.
correct matrix influences.
 Fundamental Parameter Calibration. The Fundamental Parameter Model (FP)
is a calibration model, which tries to explain the spectra of the sample by
physical equations. At the end of this procedure, a theoretical sample is
calculated, which shows the same spectra as the measured one.
In addition to the SPECTRO procedure both analytical calibrations (Compton

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 353 of 397
X-LabPro 5
and FPM) can be used separately for calibrations. They can be selected in
General.
 On top of this selection list an important and well-known calibration can be
chosen:
Lucas-Tooth, Price. This calibration is the easiest correlation between
intensity and concentration, because it's a line, described by concentration =
calib-factor * intensity.
As summary, three analytical procedures (plus combinations for hybrid

procedures) can be used in X-LabPro:
 Lucas-Tooth, Price as easiest calibration model
 Extended Compton model using the Compton peak for matrix correction, if the
concentration range is too wide for Lucas-Tooth/Price
 Fundamental Parameter Model, if the concentration range (and the matrix
range) is wide
 SPECTRO procedure as combination of different algorithms. It is used, if the
ranges are very wide and the routine samples are completely unknown
33.1 Calibration Procedure

net count rates and the given concentrations of the standards. The most simple
case is a linear relation between these two values, but in most cases it will be
more complex. In X-ray fluorescence, the net count rate is influenced drastically by
the matrix and therefore needs an evaluation model to correct for this.
The software X-LabPro contains a wide selection of calibration models. They can
be selected using the function Mathematics in the tab General.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 354 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The Calibration models can be divided into three sub-groups:
 Empirical models (like Lucas-Tooth/Price or extended Compton)

 Fundamental parameter models (FPM)
 Specials like Layer Thickness
Fundamental parameter models calculate the inter-element effects on the basis of

physical relations. In empirical models, all matrix effects have to be corrected on
the basis of real measured standards.
One of the advantages of a fundamental calibration approach is the lower number
of necessary standards (approximately one per element calibrated is
recommended), but on the other hand the demands on the standards for an FPM
are higher. As all inter-element influences are calculated on a theoretical basis the
complete composition of a standard, even the concentrations of the elements not
measurable via XRF (i.e.: carbon, oxygen), are necessary.
Empirical models are commonly used for narrow ranges of matrix variation or if
some other influences, like grain size effects, do not allow the use of fundamental
parameter methods.
A brief description of the different models, their typical fields of application and
some hindrances are listed in the following table:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 355 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Calibration Model Typical Application
Analysis of low-Z elements (Na to Fe) as main and

minor elements. Especially in slag, dusts and minerals
Lucas-Tooth, Price
when particle size effects hinder a theoretical
calculation.
Extended Compton Trace and minor elements (K to U) in low-Z matrix (in
Model some cases even low-Z elements are possible)
Combination of fundamental parameter and extended
Compton scattering model with a calibration of the mass
attenuation coefficient. Used for applications like the
SPECTRO procedure
FPM (thick) model but even if the matrix is unknown and
varying like in the analysis of different liquids (oil and
water based).
Standard based FP Main, minor and trace elements in a varying but known
(thick) matrix, i.e. additives in oil.
As FPM (thick): The normalization to 100% is only
Standardless FP (thick) useful, if all main and minor elements can be analysed,
i.e. alloys.
Standard based FP Low sample amount on filter material (i.e. aerosols), very
(thin) thin films.
As FPM (thin): The normalization to 100% is useful, if all
of the main and minor elements can be analyzed.
Standardless FP (thin)
Typical application is the rubber technique with diamond
paper. The method works without calibration.
ALPHA Normalization Analysis of fused beads with Alpha parameters by de
Method Jongh.
Compton/Rayleigh- Traces in pharmaceutical products, developed by Dr.
Method Schelcher, Hoffmann La Roche.
Analysis of the layer thickness on a substrate, i.e.
Layer thickness model
Aluminium on Silicon wafer.
In addition to the calibration models above, some general options can be set here.
The calibration models will be explained in the following in more detail.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 356 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The following figure compares the four most common procedures with their
advantages and disadvantages:
This figure compares the four procedures regarding Accuracy and how much they
are matrix indepentent. The meaning of this comparison is that Lucas-Tooth/Price
is the procedure using a minimum of mathematics which results in the best
accuracy. The more mathematics are used, the bigger the deviations.
On the other hand, the models located at the left side of this figure, are not able to
handle different matrices or a wide range of concentrations in the same calibration.
If it is important to use a method, which is matrix independent, one of the models
of the right side of the figure should be used.
But then there can be a bigger deviation between expected and calculated results:
In addition, there are some individual advantages / disadvantages for each
procedure:
 Lucas-Tooth/Price: The advantage is the simple algorithm. It can be
controlled using a pocket calculator and it is "stupid", that means, there are no
physical / logical tests (e.g. a concentration can be > 100%) - this can be
used for special jobs
 Extended Compton: The most important limitation for this model is the
Compton-peak, which is needed. If in measurement no sub-measurement
using a Compton-Target is defined, this procedure cannot be used for
calculations.
 Fundamental Parameter Model: Defining the given concentrations, the
software has to know all information about the elements in the calibration
standards, e.g. if a Diesel, containing 400 ppm of Sulphur should be defined,
the residual nearly 100 % of "oil" are important for the procedure, too. This
100%-knowledge can be a big problem.
 Spectro-procedure: Disadvantages are the same as for FPM, additionally
more samples (especially for mac) are needed.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 357 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Unfortunately it is not possible to give a general answer to the question, which

procedure should be used.
There are too many details influencing this decision e.g. elements in the samples,
concentration range...
One possible way is, to start with the easiest (especially mathemetics) procedure
to get an impression about the correlation between intensities amd concentration.
If Lucas-Tooth/Price is able to solve this application problem, it's the best choice.
If it is not able to solve it, the next procedure can be tried (Ext. Compton, if a
Compton-Peak is available). The physical procedures using a lot of mathematics
inside should be used at last or if completely unknown samples should be
analyzed.
Matrix for Calib. (Element Bonds)

If this option is selected, all elements will be converted to their bonds. This makes
it possible to calculate concentrations for low-Z elements (especially Oxygen)
without measuring them directly. These calculated values for the low-Z elements
will be taken into account during matrix correction.
If Matrix for Calib. should be used, they can be selected in General from a set of
predefined bonds. To edit / create predefined Bonds the Configuration Editor has
to be used.
Normalization
All options for the normalization are concentrated in the Normailization region on
General.
The normalization procedure allows to force the sum of the concentrations on a
specific value (defined by Normalization Concentration). This function influences
the concentrations after the calibration. The options MSK (mac) and Normalization
to a fixed concentration are not possible at the same time. When MSK is selected,
an additional tab is displayed in the calibration tab.
The use of a Difference element is an additional option. This can only be one of
the non-visible elements (typical H to F). If this option is used the difference
between the sum of all analysed elements and 100% is calculated as the
difference element. It is possible to select bonds for the difference elements (see
sub-method evaluation) to define matrices like (CH2)n for an organic sample.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 358 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The option Normalize Results normalizes the results before each iteration step, so
that the matrix effects are calculated again based on the new information. The
option Normalize Results will be performed after the last iteration. This will always
lead to a sum of all concentrations equal to the Normalization Concentration.
These options can be used successfully, if all elements can be analysed directly (i.
e. alloys) or if the bonding state of the elements is exactly known (i.e. oxides in
fusions) and the option Matrix for Calib. is selected at the same time.
This normalization has nothing in common with the normalization on the Compton
scattering peak or the normalization on regions of spectra used in the evaluation
process.
33.2 Empirical Calibration using Lucas-Tooth/Price

The easiest possible correlation between intensity and concentration is the
following:
concentration = calib-factor * intensity.

This describes the procedure called Lucas-Tooth/Price.
In detail we find a lot of possible corrections like Offset or 2 types of Interelement-
Corrections (Overlapping elements and Matrix elements).

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 359 of 397
X-LabPro 5
This card shows on the left side the list of the standard samples.
There are two possible presentations: If the option "Hide non-certified samples" (at
the right side) is enabled, two important conditions will control, if a sample appears
in this list:
The standard needs a given concentration for this element AND an intensity is
found for this element during evaluation.
If this option is disabled, one of these conditions is enough, because it is an OR-
condition.
This standard list contains different columns:
N This column shows, if the sample is a part of the calibration and

about its weight:
None
Sample is not in the calibration
1-5
The sample is in the calibration. The number shows, how many
times this sample will be in the calibration
Name That's the name of the sample
Norm. Int The normalized intensity of the selected element in this sample.
We like to use normalized intensities, because using them, we are
able to handle different tube currents and/or measurement times in
the same calibration.
Given Conc. That's the goal

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 360 of 397
X-LabPro 5
C The certification level describes, how "sure" the given

concentrations are:
N Not analyzed. simple: not analyzed
L Laboratory The given concentration is measured using
another instrument
I Info At a certification paper some values are
certified as "Info"
C Certified The given concentration is certified
Calc. Conc. The result of the calibration
Diff. To check the quality of the calibration, the differences between
calculated and given concentrations are an important number.
At the right side of this sample list, some options were located, explained in
the following:
Lower Conc./Upper Conc.:

These two values were calculated by the calibration mathematics - please do not
change them
Calibration Weight
That's a value to control the calibration range, which should be important. If the
calibration for smaller concentrations should be increased, reduce the value and
vice versa for high concentrations...
Color Level
After the calibration is done the sample are shown using black or red color: The
red color means, that the difference between given concentration and calculated
value for this sample is too big. The limit, if a line is printed red or black, is this
parameter (in % relative).
Hide non-certified samples

This option controls, which samples are shown in the sample list.
Output Unit
The concentrations in the standard list are presented in the internal unit "ppm".
Most times it is more comfortable to use the unit, which is used for the printout.
Calibration regions

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 361 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Only for Lucas-Tooth/Price it is possible, to calibrate using up to 3 regions. If more

then 1 region is selected, the limits to switch between the regions have to be
defined. The presentation on this card shows only the selected region. As result,
the region which is interesting has to be selected. All following steps are now for
this region. If another region should be modified, it has to be selected first..
Possible Corrections:
Intensity Ratios
That's an unusual correction option, only available for this empirical model
(Lucas-Tooth/Price): These are normalized matrix elements (normalization of
count rates or weighting of the concentrations). This leads to better analyzes of
samples with irregular surfaces. When using this correction, the calibration should
be checked with a large number of samples
Elements that influence the deconvolution of the main line of the element of
interest through peak overlap. If systematic error occurs (because of this) during
deconvolution, the respective elements should be selected here. For example the
K-lines of S are overlapped by the M-lines of Pb. This overlapping can lead to a
systematic error. Pb should be entered as an overlapping element for S.
Matrix Elements
Secondary excitation and discontinuity elements are entered as matrix elements
for the Compton model. Secondary excitation elements are used for Fundamental
Parameter Models. Elements that have a matrix influence on the element of
interest are entered for Lucas-Tooth/Price
Offset
If the calibration needs an offset, this can be enabled here.
Parameters:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 362 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The card Parameters shows the calibration parameters.

After a successful calibration the Slope should be shown. All other parameters are
additional options.
Calibration Diagram:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 363 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The Calibration Diagram shows the calibration line. The different signs are
showing the level of certification.
If the right mouse button is used, a context menu is available, to select different
options like linear or logarithmic scaling. Touching a sample with the mouse, an
info-box appears, that shows some details regarding this sample.
A double-click in the top-line (with the double-line) opens the diagram as full-
screen version.
Calculate:
The button Calculate will start the mathematical procedure to calibrate the
selected element. If no errors occur, this ends in the window, that informs about
the standard deviation during the calibration.
Enable All/Disable All:

A faster way - especially if a complete new method has to be calibrated and each
sample is disabled - to enable samples for calibration is the "all"-feature. Instead of
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 364 of 397
X-LabPro 5
marking each sample individually by clicking, it is much more comfortable to select

all samples using this feature.
Reset:
This function allows to reset the calibration to the last set of parameters, if the
actual calibration was not successful.
Print:
It is possible to print the calibration data (samples, results, parameters, standard
deviation) e.g. for documentation.

error message will appear, which informs about the problem.
33.3 Calibration based on a Fundamental Parameter Model

(FPM)
There are two different types of calibrations built-in in X-LabPro:
EMPIRICAL CALIBRATIONS and FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETER MODELS
The empirical procedures like extended Compton or Lucas-Tooth / Price try to find
a correlation between intensities and concentrations using "stupid" mathematics -
if the calculated parameters can be explained or not.
The complete opposite of this strategy are Fundamental Parameter Models.
They try to explain the sample during the calibration and the evaluation of
unknown samples. It's not just a calibration factor together with an intensity which
are creating the result - it's much more...
During the calibration all known informations about the sample are taken into
account. These are much more then the given concentration. These are in addition
all other concentrations (including "non-visible" elements like Oxygen), Loss of
ignition, the (theoretical) Mass Attenuation coefficient based on the
concentrations....
All this together is used for calibration. If the calibration is done and unknown
samples are analyzed the evaluation is again not easy, because all calculated
information/concentration are used to calculate the element of interest.
Unfortunately the concentration of this element can have an influence to other
elements.
As result the calculation of the other elements has to be repeated, which will
influence again the element of interest....That's a big circle and at the end we will
find some concentrations.
The calculated concentrations are responsible for the spectra - that's the theory of
the FP-Model.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 365 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Following the calibration screen for Fundamental Parameter Model is described.

This description takes care for the differences to Lucas-Tooth / Price. Similar
functions are explained there.
K-Shell/L-Shell:
That can be an option for future...not available yet.
Secondary excitation via Matrix Elem.:

This option allows to work with Matrix Elements, which can be definded, using the
"Matrix Elements" icon.
Thick sample extrapolation:

For light elements a sample with a thickness of several millimeters is thick
compared to the penetration depth. But the heavier the elements, the bigger the
penetration depth of the exciting radiation.
For heavy elements the thickness of the sample influences the intensity in the
spectrum.
This parameter uses the sample thickness for calculations. Depending on
experience and physical data, this parameter is used starting at Bromine (Br = 35).
Calculate:
after pressing calculate, the calibration is done, but before the final window shows
the standard deviation
an additional screen presents some intermediate results:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 366 of 397
X-LabPro 5
If something has gone wrong or if some unexpected results are calculated, an

error message appears, which informs about the problem.
Corrections:
There are three places to select corrections at this calibration screen:
- Matrix Elements
- Calibration with Offset
33.4 Calibration with Extended Compton Model

Another well known procedure in XRF-calibration technique is the Compton
Model. One of the interactions between radiation and material is called Compton
effect:
During this scattering, a photon will interact with one of the outer electrons of
an
atom of the material and doing this it will lose a part of its energy.
Using a secondary target, this energy loss can be observed, because the
Compton Peak is visible (at the low-energy side of the peak created by the target
material, e.g. Molybdenum).
What's the analytical advantage of the scattered Compton Peak?
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 367 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The easiest empirical procedure (Lucas-Tooth/Price) has the disadvantage, that it

will work only properly, if the concentration range is limited and the matrix is the
same for all samples (in detail both limitiations have the same meaning, because a
wide range of concentrations will influence the matrix...). The wider the
concentration ranges in the matrix, the poorer the quality of such a Lucas-
Tooth/Price calibration.
correct for matrix influences.
This is working, because the

Compton intensity depends on the
"heaviness" of the sample:
Light samples (like organic

samples) have a big Compton peak
and heavy samples (like ores or
metals) have a small Compton peak
(see end).
This figure compares the Compton

peaks for different solution
materials.
The bigger the Oxygen part in the
chemical bond, the smaller the
Compton peak, because water
(shown in blue) is heavier than oil
(in green) without any Oxygen.
This effect is used to calculate a matrix correction, which allows to calculate a

calibration with different matrices and/or with a wider concentration range
(because a wide concentration range is similar to different matrices), compared
with Lucas-Tooth/Price. The disadvantage of this correction is an additional
mathematical step, which will increase the statistical error in the calibration,
because now two intensities (element and Compton) instead of one (only the
element in Lucas-Tooth/Price) are used. Each intensity has its own error
(statistical and
mathematical caused by deconvolution) and that's the reason, why the error of a
Compton calibration is higher compared to Lucas-Tooth/Price.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 368 of 397
X-LabPro 5
This figure shows the tab for the Compton calibration. In the following only the
differences to the same screen in Lucas-Tooth, Price are presented,. These
differences are located at the right side of the tab:
 2 or 3 calibration regions are not available
 Log. Term: hat's an additional calibration parameter that can be used in this
procedure.
 Comp./Ray. Ratio as Matrix Element: The ratio Compton/Rayleigh is used as
internal standard to normalize results. This feature can be used for light
matrices (organic) with a big Compton peak.
 Compton Range: These 2 numbers describe in which measurement (here the
first one) the Compton-peak is found. The second number is the number of a
region (ROI) selected in the deconvolution - do not modify these entries.
error message will appear which informs about the problem.
This final figure shows the above mentioned differences between light, mid-range and
heavy matrices:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 369 of 397
X-LabPro 5
This figure shows the big differences in the Compton intensity for
- Wax (Organic Matrix = green)
- a glass sample (SiO2 = red)
- V2O5 as a heavy oxide sample (blue)
33.5 Special procedure for Calibration of Layer thickness

Analysis of the layer thickness on a substrate, e.g. Aluminium on Silicon wafer or
layers of Gold.
The tab looks different compared to the other procedures, because this calibration
is a special one:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 370 of 397
X-LabPro 5
First of all a layer thickness can be detected in different ways:

 The Emission of the coating is detected and the thicker the coating is, the
higher the intensity.
 The second way is Absorption: The observed intensity is created by the
substrate.
The thicker the coating is, the bigger the absortion of the radiation of the
substrate and
the smaller the intensity of the observed peak of the substrat element.
 The best way is a combination of both: Emission/Absorption
The first calibration can be used for Au-Layers on other metals, the second can be
used, if the coating material is not visible for XRF (like plastic coatings) and the
combination is used e.g. for wafers.
The example above shows case 1 (Emission of the coating material) for Gold
layers. In this case some options for the substrate material are disabled, because
the substrate is not taken into account.
The calibration is completed, if the intensity, which is found for the blank sample
(green high-lighted in the figure above), is used as "Offset" value (here: 0,0041)
(light blue). This has to be done manually !!!!

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 371 of 397
X-LabPro 5
33.6 Elements
This tab is one of the most important tabs in a method, because it contains a list of
all elements, which
a) can be contained in the samples
b) should be analyzed.
Both will control the Measurement Conditions and the Deconvolution!
As first step (using the button Elements on top) all possible elements have to be
defined.
These are the elements which can be in the samples.
All the selected elements are visible in the list, shown above. Now, as second
step, one can assign the elements of interest. This can be done by using the
Analysis Elem column.
If an element is marked here, the intensity of this element is fed to the calibration
procedure to calculate a concentration.
The LODs are the Lmits Of Detection for each element.
The column Conc. Range Min. [µg/g] defines the lower limit of the calibration and it
describes the detection limit. The following column Conc. Range Max. [µg/g] is
important to define the size of the concentration range. That's an important
information regarding the calibration procedure. The values for both columns will
be extracted from the method automatically.
Whether the columns called Coupling Factor L... and Conc. Limit [µg/g] are visible,
depends on the user level.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 372 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The last column contains the correction factors, which are calculated during a
Method Recalibration.
In addition to these factors the two factors for the scattering intensities (Coherent
Back Scatter Correction and Incoherent Back Scatter Correction) are editable on
top of the list.
If Bonds should be used, they can be selected from a set of pre-defined bonds at
General and/or Output.
To edit / create pre-defined bonds the Configuration Editor has to be used.
33.7 Measurement
The setting of the measurement conditions is one of the first steps of the method
development. It is necessary to decide the purpose of the method first. Which are
the critical parameters, detection limits or measuring time?
Is it possible to measure the samples in vacuum or is gas flushing necessary?
Which elements are important?
These questions have to be answered in advance to create a tailor made method
for a specific application.
For almost all elements a variation of different excitation conditions exists for each
instrument. The first step is to select the best target combination for a specific
method.
A method is limited to 8 different targets. The number of targets used is influenced
by the analytical needs and by the measuring time.
Some basic rules for the development of a measurement strategy:
1. Always start the method with the Compton target if you need the information
of the Compton Scattering (for details: see Calibration).
2. Proceed with the target requiring the highest excitation energy. The
information from this measurement about the concentration of the heavy
elements can be used to improve the deconvolution of low-Z elements
influenced by line overlaps of the L or M-Lines of the heavy elements.
Such a combination is Molybdenum and Sulphur: The Sulphur-K-line, which
is used for calculations, is overlapped with the Mo-L-line.
Without any correction, Mo in the samples will influence the S-results. If the
sub-measurement which calculates Mo-K is done before the S measurement
the result of the latter can be corrected.
3. To analyze traces of light elements in a high-Z matrix, use a target that can
only excite the analyte. This is only possible if the energy of the excitation
source is between the absorption edges of analyte and matrix.
4. To increase the count rate, it is possible to increase the tube current.
Increasing the tube current leads to a higher intensity of the radiation.
Increasing the tube voltage not only changes the intensity, but also the
spectral composition of the radiation. Thus, it is necessary to create new
background spectra when the tube voltage is changed.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 373 of 397
X-LabPro 5
All measurement parameters are set in the sub-method Measurement.
The General Settings of the measurement are located in the upper half of the
screen. The number of sub-measurements can be selected here. Additionally, the
environmental conditions (vacuum, air or He-flush) are selected here.
The lower half of the screen contains the settings of sub-measurements for this
method.
Some of the values in the lower part of the window should not be changed, others
can be varied (see below). An overview of the parameters, the possible settings
are listed in the table below.
Parameter Notes
Channels 1024 and 2048 channels are recommended for
measurements at the Energy Range 12,5 and 25 keV,
respectively. For measurements at the the Energy Range
of 50 keV 4096 channels should be used. - Do not
change
Peak Time [µs] The time for the detection electronics to shape a peak.
This time is a characteristic value for the detection
electronics. It is important to note that all used
combinations of peak time and energy range must be
calibrated with the Method called MCA. - Do not change
Zero Peak Rate Necessary for the accurate dead time correction - Do not
[cps] change.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 374 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Energy range [keV] The scaling of the x-axis of the spectra. For light elements
we like to use 12.5 keV, for mid-range energies 25 keV
and for heavy elements 50 keV. Each target or filter has
its own recommended Energy range. - Do not change
Selects the target for this sub-measurement.- Do not
Target
change
Voltage The excitation depends on the voltage which ist used. A
voltage depending on the selected target/filter is
recommended. Changes in the voltage will influence the
background spectra which have to be modified after
changing the voltage. - Do not change
Current The optimum dead time is 25%. If Current Regulation in
enabled (see next item), the current stored here is only
the default start value. This will be regulated depending
on the intensity which is influenced by the sample type.
Current Regulation When this option is activated, the settings for tube current
will be used as a starting current only. The software will
measure the sample with the given settings and then
optimize the tube current. The resulting intensity should
not exceed 100,000 cps.
Measurement Time Default: This option is selected as standard stop criteria.
Limit
Measurement Time This is the clock time for the measurement. It is not
possible to select a live time.
Live time = clock time * (1 - rel. dead time).
Measurement Pulse An alternative option to end a sub-measurement. If the
Limit number of counted impulses is bigger than the given
value in No. of Impulses the measurement will stop. If
both options (Measurement Time Limit and Measurement
Pulse Limit) are selected, the criteria first met will stop the
sub-measurement.
No. of Impulses For the Measurement Pulse Limit option the criteria for
stopping the sub-measurement can be set here.
First Channel For the above listed option No. of Impulses the region of
interest (ROI) must be defined. This is done with the two
parameters First Channel and Last Channel. This is only
necessary, if the option Measurement Pulse is used.
Last Channel See above.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 375 of 397
X-LabPro 5
33.8 Spectra Viewer
If elements should be identified using only the Spectra Viewer, please take care of
the ARTEFACTS !
The Spectra Viewer can be used for method development, because the question,
which elements could be in routine samples, can be answered a little bit easier
using this tool.
This information is necessary to define the deconvolution together with the
measurement conditions.
The following figure shows with which target one can calculate which element (for
XEPOS and the standard TurboQuant applications).

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 376 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Enhanced TurboQuant conditions using additional secondary targets:
33.9 Deconvolution
elements of the method. This includes the subtraction of a background spectrum
and a selection which lines should be used for the deconvolution. As a method is
constructed of several sub-measurements, the parameters have to be defined for
each of the sub-measurements. It is possible to deconvolute elements in several
sub-measurements to correct for line overlaps, but it is only possible to calculate
the concentration from a single sub-measurement.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 377 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The sub-method Deconvolution is divided into two kinds of tabs:

The tab General is a summary of the deconvolution to get an overview.
The number of background spectra and the corresponding switching limits can be
selected here. The switchover values are the Compton to Rayleigh scattering
ratios. Therefore, it is only possible to use several background spectra, if a
Compton target is used in the method. With several background spectra available
for each target it is possible to calibrate different matrices with a different scattered
background (like organic and silicate samples) in one method.
The list shows which elements have to be deconvoluted during evaluation in
general. These elements can be selected at the tab Elements.
All elements which are present in a specific sample, should be selected. Even if
the calculation of the concentration is not planned, it may be necessary to
deconvolute the lines because of possible interferences and line overlaps.
Using the tabs Measurement x, all details of the deconvolution can be modified:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 378 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The main part of the screen is a list of elements, which shows all selected
elements, using the button Elements at the right side. The elements, which can be
chosen at this place are pre-defined on the Elements tab. Only elements chosen
on the tab are selectable here.
If an element appears in the list, the last three columns can be modified / defined:
The columns Line and Deconvolution describe the kind of calculation, which
should be applied. For example, Sodium will be calculated from the K-Alpha line
using Serial Fit as strategy. Possible strategies are:
- Summation,
- Series Fit ,
- Line Fit and
The check boxes in the column Conc are necessary to decide, whether an
intensity is used for the calculation of the concentration or just as intensity e.g. for
overlapping corrections. When a number is shown (like for Chromium) that means
that the concentration for this element must be calculated using the intensity from
a different sub measurement (Cr = 1).
On the right hand side there are 4 buttons to edit additional parameters.
Elements
If this button is selected a window with a periodic table of the elements will appear
on the screen:
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 379 of 397
X-LabPro 5
In this periodic table all elements that were selected in the tab Elements are
marked in yellow and can be selected. All elements which can be excited in this
sub-measurement should be selected. To select an element, click the element
symbol and the colour changes to red.
All selected elements will be deconvoluted. It is not necessary to calibrate all of
them or use them as concentration elements. For the Compton target it is
essential to deconvolute the elements even if no concentration is calculated from
the Compton target (like in most geological calibrations).
In this way the overlaps with the scattering lines can be corrected.
Only the elements selected in this PTE can be ticked as "concentration elements"
in column Conc.
Deconvolution Region:
Most of predefined SPECTRO methods do not require any changes in the
deconvolution settings. If this is required for a specific application, the Optimization
must be disabled
With the above defined settings all lines to be deconvoluted are selected, but it is
not defined where the lines are and in which way they should be grouped in
deconvolution areas. These deconvolution areas are selected with the button
Deconvolution Region. These ROIs should be created in such a way that all
elements are in ROIs but not too many lines in the same ROI.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 380 of 397
X-LabPro 5
To create a ROI, the cursor is moved to the left edge of the planned ROI and then
the right mouse button is pressed. When the mouse is moved to the right hand
side – with still pressed mouse button – a region will be marked as ROI in a
different hatching. To simplify the creation of the ROIs, it is quite useful to show
the lines of the elements for this sub-measurement. This makes it easier to check,
if all elements are in selected regions and if all lines of the elements with Series Fit
are in the same deconvolution area.
To create the background regions, it is necessary to display a spectrum. The
sample shown in the window can be selected at the bottom of this window. There's
a list with all measured standards.
The deconvolution areas will be copied together with the rest of the parameters,
when a method is copied. So, it is not necessary to edit all the regions.
Background Region:
A background spectrum can be fitted to the measured spectrum after some of the
detector artefacts (as an example: pile-up, escape, shelf) have been corrected. To
do this, fitting regions have to be defined, according to the way described under
Deconvolution region:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 381 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The fitting of the background spectra allows to use longer measuring times for the
background spectra to reduce statistical effects. The fitting regions should never
be in regions where elemental lines might influence the height of the fitted
background.
Normalization Region:
The normalization regions are defined exactly the same way as deconvolution and
background regions.
The normalization regions are parts of the spectra that can be used to normalize
the net count rates of an element. These normalization regions are necessary for
Compton targets because the entire principle of the Extended Compton model
(see Evaluation) and of the matrix correction based on the Compton intensity (or
the Compton/Rayleigh ratio) is based on this normalization:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 382 of 397
X-LabPro 5
These normalization regions can be used as an internal standard even for other
sub-measurements. Two normalization regions are allowed per sub-measurement.
Iron-Cobalt-Correction:
With the button Iron Cobalt Corr. a special correction for Cobalt can be activated.
This correction improves the determination of Cobalt traces in the presence of a
large amount of iron. The correction factor should not be changed. This special
correction is only possible if the Co K and the Fe K- Lines are in separate ROIs.
Use Optimization:
By ticking the Use Optimization check box the parameters from the three buttons
Deconvolution Region, Background RegionNormalization Region are calculated
automatically.
The deconvolution of a sub measurement follows the rules:

 The deconvolution areas (ROI, region of interest) are unfolded with increasing
energy.
 In each ROI, the elements with Line Fit or Line Fit with Standard will be
processed with increasing energy. The K -line (or the L -line) will be
deconvoluted and founded on the net count rate.
 The additional lines of the same shell will be subtracted from the
spectrum. For the L-series all lines of the three different sub-shells LI, LII
and LIII will be considered. The coupling factors for the sub-shells can be
edited in the Evaluation sub-method.
 Then all elements with a Series Fit are deconvoluted with increasing
energy.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 383 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The deconvolution parameters are absolutely essential for the proper evaluation of
a sub-measurement. Wrong or missing deconvolution parameters might result in
severe problems of the software.
A series fit is only allowed, if all lines for one specific element are in the same
deconvolution area (see Deconvolution Region) and if the background under the
lines is not too different.
If the background is too different, the line ratio might be influenced and this will
harm the accuracy of the series fit.
While copying a method all of the elements, lines and even deconvolution
strategies will be pre-set, reducing the necessary effort to a minimum.
33.10 Deconvolution Strategies

elements of the method.
This can be done, using different mathematical procedures:
- Summation,
- Series Fit,
- Line Fit and
The first one is used only for special applications (e.g. during a mapping using a
MIDEX equipped with xyz stages).
To explain the differences between Line Fit and Series Fit, let's have a look, what
happens with a new unknown sample during its evaluation:
The energy-range of a sub-method is devided in different Regions of Interest
(ROIs).
These ROIs and their contents will be calculated from low-energy ROIs to high-
energy ROIs.
Starting with the first ROI, the first step will be the Line-Fit for all Line-Fit-
Elements:
It will start with the elements with the smallest Atomic-Number. In common cases
the Alpha-line like K-Alpha is chosen. In this case, the K-Alpha-line of this element
will be fitted. Based on this result, the corresponding
Beta-line is calculated using a theoretical alpha-beta-ratio. After removing these
lines (alpha and beta) from the spectra, the deconvolution will continue with the
next element.
Doing this step-by-step (or element-by-element) all elements Line-Fit was chosen
for, will be removed from the spectra.
The residual spectra will be taken into a next deconvolution step:
In this last step, all elements with Series Fit (in one ROI) are deconvoluted in one
step in a big equation-system.
Line-Fit with Standardization means that, if a minimum intensity is reached, the
peak is used to recalibrate the energy-channel-calbration for this sample.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 384 of 397
X-LabPro 5
33.11 Artefacts:
The following figure shows a spectrum of the sample V2O5.
Without the artefacts the spectrum should contain the background information
from the instrument and the V-lines.
But in reality the spectrum looks a little bit different than expected: In addition to
the V-lines, it shows the 4 artefacts:
- Shelf
- Tail
- Escape
- PileUp
As the figure shows, SHELF and TAIL are both creating additional background at
the low-energy side of a peak. Both decrease the S/N ratio with the result of
increased detection limits.
If elements shall be identified manually, the artefacts described in the following are
more difficult to handle, because they are creating "peaks":
The artefact Escape has an energy which is reduced by around 1,75 keV
compared to the "original"-peak. That's the energy of Silicon, which is used as
detector chip material.
The PileUp occures, when 2 photons, reaching the detector at the same time are
identified as 1 photon with doubled energy. If the "original" peak is a single peak
(because peaks cannot be separated) like Si-K-series, we will find 1 PileUp peak.
The figure above shows what happens with 2 lines like alpha- and beta-line: These
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 385 of 397
X-LabPro 5
two lines will generate 3 PileUp lines, because 2 alpha-photons or two beta-
photons or an alpha- with a beta-photon can combine.
33.12 Background Spectra

One part of the evaluation of a mesurement is the subtraction of the Background
Spectra.
For each sub-measurement up to 6 Background Spectra can be stored
(Deconvolution).
That's an option, if a Compton-target like Molybdenum secondary target is used in

the method.
With several background spectra available for each target it is possible to calibrate
different matrices with a different scattered background (like organic and silicate
samples) in one method.
Which background spectra should be used depends on the Compton/Rayleigh
ratio.The background spectra are stored as standards and at the Standards they
are visible as they are marked with B. Each of the shown background spectra
belongs to one matrix and for each sub-meaurement a "sub-spectra" is stored:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 386 of 397
X-LabPro 5
It can be necessary to modifiy these background spectra depending on the

application.
33.13 Background and Contaminations

In addition to the elements in the sample, which will have to be to measured, there
are some "contaminations" in the spectra, making the job a little bit more difficult.
"Contaminations" of Spectra:
The Target:
- The Target Material: Mo, Zr, Pd, Zn, CsI, Co
- The Compton-Peak: Mo-, Pd- and Zr-Target
- HOPG-Target: The tube material (anode): Pd +
Reflections All these "contaminations"
- Filters: Mo, Zr, Ta, Pd, Cu, Fe together are visible in the
Background spectra.
The Measuring Chamber:
- Iron
The Detector:
- Ta, Zr or Pd and a little bit of Sn (detector
cooling)
Sample Cups / Protection Film:

- Prolen: without contaminations
- Mylar: P and Ca
- Carbonat: Si
The Dilution Material:
- Oil: Sulfur
- Charcoal: a variety of elements
Artefacts
Contaminations in the instruments, e.g. after a foil crack, or caused by sample
preparation

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 387 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Background Spectra:
Background Spectra for XEPOS:
HOPG-
Target
(Low-
Energy
range)
Mo-
Target
(Mid-
Energy
range)

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 388 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Al2O3-
Target
(High-
Energy
range)
Pd-
Target
(Mid-
Energy
range)

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 389 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Zn-
Target
(Low-
Energy
range)
CsI-
Target
(High-
Energy
range)

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 390 of 397
X-LabPro 5
Co-
Target
(Low-
Energy
range)
Zr-
Target
(Mid-
Energy
range)

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 391 of 397
X-LabPro 5
33.14 Calibration of the Mass Attenuation Coefficient

The calibration of the Mass Attenuation Coefficient is a possibility to get an
impression about the size of the "non-visible" part of the sample and it is used
as part of the SPECTRO procedure. To do this the Compton peak is used.
In the frame of the calibration 9 parameters are calculated. Look at the tab
Parameters (see figure below).
The green highlighted limits are the switch-limits for the three regions.
If these parameters shall be controlled, the yellow highlighted parameters should
be positive.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 392 of 397
X-LabPro 5
The following figure shows the correlation between Compton intensity and "mac".
a1, a2 and a3 are the three parameters for each region (1 to 3) shown in the figure
above, "I" means the intensity of the Compton peak and µ is the "mac".
For a better visualization a double logarithmic scale is used to form a diagram in

the tab Mass Attenuation Coeff. The expected result is a line.

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 393 of 397
X-LabPro 5
33.15 Library of Standards

The Library of Standards is available in the menu Tools.
It is a database which contains the given concentrations of a lot of Certified

Reference Materials (CRM). These data should be used during the creation of new
samples used as standard:

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 394 of 397
X-LabPro 5
It is much faster done, if the given concentration were copied/imported from this database
instead of entering each element concentration.
33.16 Regions in Lucas-Tooth/Price

The Lucas-Tooth/Price calibration is the only one, which supports more then one
calibration region.
This feature can be used, if the concentration range is too big to get good results.
An example is Sulfur in Diesel. There are two possible regions:
- Around 400 ppm of S as common region and
- smaller then 10 ppm of S for Low-S-applications.
This example is used to show the region-feature.
First of all, the number of regions has to be increased. Doing this, the parameter
"Limit 1 - 2:" is used to define the switching-limit. That's the concentration, where
the next region (in this example region 2) starts. In the figure below, the limit is 10
ppm, that means, that for concentrations smaller then 10 ppm region number 1 is
used and for higher concentrations region 2:
Pressing "Calculate" will calibrate only region 1!

The "Selected Cal.-Region:" shows, that the list at the left side is presenting the
samples and results for region 1.
If the second region (> 10 ppm) should be calibrated, change the "Selected Cal.-
Region" into "2":

Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 395 of 397
X-LabPro 5
After this change, pressing "Calculate" will calibrate the second region.
33.17 Error Messages during Calibration
some error messages can appear, if

After pressing
something unusual was calculated.
Following a summary of these messages:

Message Reason Solution/next step
Negative Offset A negative Offset was Remove the Offset option
calculated
Offset seems to Offset is unexpected big If the reason can be found and
be too big explained, the message can be
ignored (1)
Incorrect The calculated correction Remove the mentioned

by Physical laws
Negative The calculated correction Remove the mentioned
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 396 of 397
X-LabPro 5

by Physical laws
Unexpected The parameter for the If the reason can be found and
correction correction is unexpected explained, the message can be
big. ignored (2)
No. of Too many corrections More samples or less

Standards too No samples selected corrections (including Offset)
low "Enable" samples
Negative Slope The slope of the calibration Many times, there is an error in
line is negative the given concentration like a
wrong unit during definition.
Has to be removed
Known examples for error messages which can be explained / ignored:
(1) "Offset seems to be too big" If the detector has a Zirconium collimator, the
offset for Zr will generate this message - that's ok.
(2) "Unexpected correction" Some K- and L-series line-overlappings like
Ba-L and Ti-K are creating these messages, if they are corrected.
34 Important Information
Data Backup
Regular data backups are important for the operation safety and availability for
your analytical system. Utilities that enable regular backups of the program
directory that are appropriate for the installed operating system should be used. In
this way, it is possible to restore the most current data possible to a new computer
or newly installed software if the PC or your specific data is lost or destroyed. The
medium on which the backup is stored should be stored in a location that is
spatially separated from the PC.
Copyright and Guarantee
© 1992-2010 SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH, D-47533 Kleve, Boschstr.
10, All rights reserved
The X-LABPro software is copyrighted and is protected by international copyright
laws. This software must be treated as a book. You have the right, however, to
transfer the software to computers for internal use within the company or to make
storage copies of this software. Additional copies, especially for transmission to
third parties are prohibited. This is in violation of SPECTRO A. I.'s copyright.
SPECTRO A. I. cannot guarantee that the software and documentation are free of
errors. Nor can SPECTRO A. I. assure that the delivered software can fulfull all of
your requirements. Especially for the error-free communication with products from
third parties (e.g., printers and their drivers) or networks can no responsibility be
accepted.
Pro
Revision 4; 17/08/2011 Page 397 of 397

Xlab5 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Xlab5 Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Xlab5 Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

X-LabPro 5

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

4.4.1 Spectra Viewer Menu Overview ....................................................................50

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

6.1.2 Commands in the File Menu ..........................................................................98

7.2.4 Commands in the View Menu ......................................................................136

18.4 Import Jobs ........................................................................................................200

24.1 Application Requirements ..................................................................................228

25.6.6.3 Start the Scan..........................................................................................283

SPECTRO iQ II XRF Tutorial ............................................................................................315

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

1.1 Job Manager

1.1.1 Window overview

1.2 Job Window

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

1.3 Create New Job/Job Properties

Key Information Group

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

1.4 Edit Job

Key Information Group

1.5 Import Job

1.6 Export Job

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

1.7 Tree Control

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

1.8 Context Menu for a job

1.9 Context Menu for a sample

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

1.10 Context Menu for the trashcan

1.11 Menu Commands

1.11.1 Commands in the File Menu

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

1.11.2 Commands in the Edit Menu

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

 Paste with Data

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

1.11.3 Commands in the View Menu

1.11.4 Commands in the Window Menu

1.11.5 Commands in the X-LabPro Menu

1.11.6 Commands in the Help Menu

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

Open the Method Administration.This button is disabled because the

Open the Routine Dialog.

Open the Spectra Viewer.

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

1.12.2 Title Bar

1.12.3 Status Bar

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

2.1 The X-LabPro Routine Dialog

2.2 How to Define New Samples/Enter the Sample Data

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

2.3 How to Define New Samples/Enter the Sample Data (IQ)

It is possible to define a sample measurement for repeated runs by selecting a

2.4 How to Load and Save the Sample Plates

SPECTRO Analytical Instruments GmbH

2.5 The Measurement

The command buttons have the following functions: